Inventor Tutorials

Contents

Chapter 1 Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1What are Projects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3What Else Do Projects Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Understand Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Examine a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Understand Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Select a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Use the Projects Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Test Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Manage Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Use Paths in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Refine your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Use Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Control Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Use Other Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2 Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

i

The ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Overview: SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Hands-on Demo: ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23The Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24More about Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Click and Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Pan and Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Orbit and Pivot Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Up and Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Walk and Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Mini Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Drag Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Drag Geometry (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Drag All the Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Rotate a Sketched Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Constrain to the Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Apply a Horizontal Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Apply a Perpendicular Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Apply a Parallel Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Apply a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Apply an Angular Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Examine Constraint Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Delete a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Open the Sketch Profile file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Revolve the Sketch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Interpreting the In-Canvas Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Create a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ii | Contents

Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Draw the Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Mirror the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Create a Third Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Extrude the Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Create an Edge Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Create a Tapped Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Rotate a Face Using the Triad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Chapter 5 Parts 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . 97Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Create and Pattern a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Create a Revolved Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Use Save As to Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Create a Concentric Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Edit the Tapped Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Mirror a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 6 Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Create the Mounting Base Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Sketch on a Part Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Create a Tangent Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Add the Base Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 7 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Create the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Create a Contact Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Insert and Constrain a Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Edit a Part in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Constrain Cylindrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Add the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Contents | iii

Chapter 8 Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209View Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Add a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Place Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Place Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Place Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Radial and Reference Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Add a Hole Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Open an Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Place a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Add Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Adjust the Leader Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Place Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Set the project and open the Tutorial File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Object Defaults and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Override Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Custom Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Chapter 10 iLogic Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Prepare to Add Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Create a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Create a Text Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Create a True-False Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Set Parameter Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Create Feature Suppression Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Create Feature Activation Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Create Dimension Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Test for Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Chapter 11 The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

iv | Contents

Interface Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Set the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Create a Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Finish the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Switch to an Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Place Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Use File Tabs and Edit the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Increase Screen Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Create Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Create Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Create Parts List and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Customize Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Create Your Own Tab Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Export Tab Settings to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Using Access Points through the Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 12 Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Review Content Center Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Place from Content Center Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Browse in Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Place Content Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Create iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Place Content Manually Using iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Use AutoDrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Resize Standard Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Replace Standard Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Create Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Edit Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Format Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Contents | v

Chapter 14 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Create the External Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Finish the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Review Parameter Assignment Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Open a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Work with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Link Your External Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Prepare to Assign Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Modify Your Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Modify the Two Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Modify the Chamfer Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Modify the Hole Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Control Your Part with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Update Your Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Introduction to the Sample Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Open a Part Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Create Port Size Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Create Block and Component Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Test the Block Shape Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Manage Part Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Test the Port Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Create Block Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Set the Component Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Reorder Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Change Driving Rule Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Update iProperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Test the iProperties Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Start a New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Customize Components Before Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Add Control Parameters for Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Create Rules in the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

vi | Contents

Calculate Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454Test Your Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Chapter 17 Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477Create a Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Create a Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Understand Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Add Features to the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Modify the Parent Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482Update the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Protect the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Restore and close the parent file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Chapter 18 iFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Create an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Insert an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Place an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Modify the iFeature File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Place iFeatures from a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Configure Standard and User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Enable Edit of a Part Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Edit the Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Verify the Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505Use Save Copy As to Create a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Edit Family Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Verify Your Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Verify the Published Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Contents | vii

Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517Make Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521Offset Components from the Layout Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations . . . . . . . . . . . 535About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536Open sample file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Workflow Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Derived In-place Part Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540Create the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542The Substitute Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543Use the Substitute Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544Compare Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545Part-on-disk Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545Create the Substitute Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547Guidelines for Creating a Substitute Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Chapter 22 Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552A Word about Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554Create Tweaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556Tweak Clamp.ipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560Tweak the Retaining Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561Place an Exploded View on a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563Edit the Explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564Associative Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Rotational Tweaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573Split the Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576Create the Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Create a Rule Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583Create a Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586Create a Lip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587Create a Body Using Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593Create a Segmented Lip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595Create a Snap Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

viii | Contents

Create a Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607Add Holes to a Single Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617Insert a Toolbody Using Derive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617Moving Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618Use the Combine Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620Create a Body Using Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621Export the Design as Individual Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626Render . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626Change Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627Change Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627Save Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628Image Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Chapter 25 Studio - Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630Prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630Start at the Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630Watch Your Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630Configure the Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631Animate Camera Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635Open Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636Create Three Positional Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637Define the First Positional Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638Define the Second Positional Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640Define the Third Positional Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642Activate Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642Reduce the Timeline Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643Create the First Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643View the Keyframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644Create the Second Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Contents | ix

Create the Third Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645Play the Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646Edit the Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649Open the Sample Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654Create a Frame Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658Create a Frame Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659Create a Diagonal Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663Add a Second Horizontal Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665Derived Surface from Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667Complete the Frame Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671Assembly Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676Open Target Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680Constrain iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685Copy and Reuse iCopy Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688iCopy: File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Chapter 29 Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691Open the Template Layout Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692Create the iCopy Template Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694Constrain the Template Layout Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696iCopy Author - Layout tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696iCopy Author - Geometry tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697iCopy Author - Parameter tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701Create a Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710Complete the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713Constrain the Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717Place the Support Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

x | Contents

Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739Create Spline Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741Create a Spline Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745Create a Lofted Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face . . . . . . . . . . . 749Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752Create Another Split Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765Isolate the Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766Create an Offset Surface and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767Create an Embossed Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772Create a Vented Opening Using Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

Chapter 31 Bolted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784Place the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789Add the Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790Use Existing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795Edit Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Modify Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805Change Bolted Connection Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809Change Configuration of Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Chapter 32 Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820Create an Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821Start the Shaft Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8212D and 3D Dynamic Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822Add Shaft Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823Specify Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825Specify Shaft Element Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827Change Dimensions of Cone Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830Change Dimensions of the Next Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832Insert Cylindrical Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Contents | xi

Add Shaft to Templates Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835The Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836Specify Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836Specify Loads and Perform Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839Insert the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840Edit the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845Open Sample File and Start Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846Spur Gears Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847Select Gear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851Place the Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853Place the Second Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859Perform the Calculation and Set File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864Select the Belt Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865Select Belt Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867Select First Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868Set First Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868Select Second Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870Set Second Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871Change Pulley Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872Specify the Second Pulley Final Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Chapter 35 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . 879Select Type of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882Set Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882Update the Bearing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883Select Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

xii | Contents

Insert First Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value . . . . . . . . . . 885Select Bearing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887Place and Insert Second Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 36 Disc Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893Specify Disc Cam Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894Specify Disc Cam Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895Set Segment Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896Adding Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897Create Your Own Motion File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Chapter 37 Compression Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . 908Measure the Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 915Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Chapter 38 Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919Welding Steps Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920Weldment Feature Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922Open an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924Weld Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927Complete the Cosmetic Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928Weld Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930Complete the Weld Extent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930Create a 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931Complete the 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932Change Weld Symbol Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934Add a Machining Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Contents | xiii

Add an Extrude Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936Complete the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937Feature Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939Create a Weldment Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940Place Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940Complete Orthographic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941As-machined Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942Projected Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943Retrieve Weld Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944Add a Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945Add a Caterpillar (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952Open the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954Prepare Your Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956Create the Open Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958Create a Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960Complete the Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963Place a Flange Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968Sketch Punch Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971Punch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973Punch Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975Mirror the Punched Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976Create the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981Place a Punch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989Lofted Flange - Create the Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993Rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994Rip (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003Bend Order Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005Directed Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007Sequential Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

xiv | Contents

Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019Create a Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022Create a Second Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023Add another Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026Flatten the Rolled Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028Unfold and Refold Feature Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030Continue Unfold Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032Partially Unfold the Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036Complete the Unfold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044Pattern the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046Add Two Refold Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050

Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054Edit the Project and Open the Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056Add a New Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057Change the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material . . . . . 1058Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief . . . 1060Save Styles to Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062Create Sample Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063Use Sheet Metal Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069Update Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

Chapter 42 Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077Skeletal Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077Insert Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079Profile Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081Create Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086Place the Upper C-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087Orient the Upper C-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090Place the Lower C-channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091Place the Horizontal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094Place the Angle Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100Create Miter Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102

Contents | xv

Change Miter Joint Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103Remove End Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106Re-create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108Trim Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109Cut Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117Change Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119Modify the Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119Hybrid Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122Insert Profile - Select Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members . . . . . . . . . 1129Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130Create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132Insert Profile - Place Other Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135Insert Profile - Add Support Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138Cut Profile - Trim Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145Insert Profile - Point To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147Cut Profile - Trim Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Chapter 43 DWG Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160Open a New Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161Import DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162Extrude Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163Orient the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165Change the Part Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166Save the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168

Chapter 44 DWG Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170Open Part and Access DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171Import DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172Extrude Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173Create a Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176Create a Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186

xvi | Contents

Chapter 45 DWG Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189Create New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191Create In-place Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192Insert DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193Extrude Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194Create Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196Create Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199Create Cut Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208Show Origin Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209Add Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210Unconstrained Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212Grounded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221View the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224

Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227Translate the Alias Wire File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229Update the Inventor Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Contents | xvii

xviii

Projects

About this tutorial

Create a project to manage files.

New UsersCategory

20 minutesTime Required

1

1

Start a new project fileTutorial FileUsed

This exercise explains the purpose and function of the Autodesk Inventorproject file (*.ipj file). You do not need to complete this tutorial to completeany of the other tutorial exercises.

If you are working for a company that already uses Autodesk Inventor, thechances are good the company already has one or more existing project files.If so, consult the CAD Manager or a co-worker to determine the companypolicy regarding project files. You may be able to set the proper project fileand move on to the other exercises.

This tutorial is intended to provide a "best practices" example in which a singleproject file controls all the searchable directories. The single master projectfile technique provides stability and simplicity. It also makes the data moreaccessible to document control systems such as Vault or Productstream.

NOTE A master project file supports the use of other project files. You can createmultiple project files if they are needed for prototyping or other developmentwork. If multiple project files are required, they should be located in subfoldersbeneath the master project folder for stability and simplicity.

Objectives■ Learn about Project file options.

■ Create a simple project file to introduce the concepts Inventor uses tomanage files.

Prerequisites■ Inventor is installed.

■ Inventor is open in a blank document state.

■ Desire to learn how to create Project files.

Navigation Tips■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or

return to the previous one.

Next (page 3)

2 | Chapter 1 Projects

What are Projects?Relationships exist between the various files you create with Autodesk Inventor.Projects files are text files saved in an xml format that specify the valid filelocations for Autodesk Inventor data. For example, a part is usually linked toboth an assembly and a drawing document. To avoid broken links or browsingfor files that were not found, an understanding of Project files is essential.

If you plan on using a data management solution such as Autodesk Vault orProductstream, a clean file folder structure and a single master project file canease the transition.

A single master project file provides:■ Simplicity

■ Reduced file resolution failures

■ Increased design re-use

Autodesk Inventor actively supports two types of projects:■ Single-user project

What are Projects? | 3

■ Vault project (If Autodesk Vault is installed)

We recommend using Autodesk Vault for users whose sharing requirementsextend beyond a single-user project. Vault provides a file check-out andcheck-in process which prevents files from being accidentally overwritten.Autodesk Vault also contains other powerful file management tools such aseasily copying an entire design.

For more information on Autodesk Vault and the Autodesk Data ManagementServer, please refer to the Implementation Guide. This guide is delivered in.pdf format with Vault.

Previous (page 1) | Next (page 4)

What Else Do Projects Control?The following list summarizes a few of the purposes and features of projects.■ The Styles Library folder identifies where the program stores

project-specific styles definitions.

■ The Templates folder identifies where the program stores file templates.

■ The Content Center Files folder identifies the root folder for the ContentLibrary files of the project.

■ The Libraries folders store standard components.

■ The Frequently Used Subfolders create shortcuts to folders deeplynested within project locations.

You create, modify, and manage your projects using the Projects editor.

You can access the Projects editor dialog box from Autodesk Inventor, orexternally from the Microsoft Windows Start menu.


Understand ProjectsAll projects contain the following parameters:■ Workspace location (or a workgroup location)

■ Styles folder, Templates folder, and a location for Content CenterComponents

■ Project options


Projects can also contain any of the following parameters:■ Included project file

■ Library search paths

■ Frequently used subfolders

A simple project typically contains a workspace parameter, and perhaps somesubfolders and library search paths.


Examine a ProjectWhen you install Autodesk Inventor, it creates a Default project, an iLogicSamples project, and a tutorial_files project automatically.

Examine a simple project:

1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files.

2 Click ➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

Examine a Project | 5

3 Click tutorial_files in the upper pane of the Projects editor dialog box.

The contents of the file display in the lower pane of the Projects editor.



Understand WorkspacesIn addition to the default Folder Options and Options parameters, thetutorial_files project contains only one other parameter, a workspacelocation. It is the simplest type of project.

The workspace points to the folder where your tutorial exercise files areinstalled.

When this project is active, the Open, Save, and Place Component dialogboxes default to this location.

Only one workspace can be defined in a single-user project.


Select a ProjectTo select a project and make it the active project.

1 In the top pane of the Projects editor, locate the name of the project; inthis case, locate the tutorial_files project.

2 Double-click tutorial_files.

Understand Workspaces | 7

A check mark appears next to the project name, indicating that it is theactive project file.

In the lower pane, the workspace path is absolute and defined as "Location =(wherever you installed Autodesk Inventor)\Inventor {version}\Tutorial Files\."


Use the Projects EditorIn the upper section of the Projects editor you can create, rename, and deleteprojects (excluding the Default and tutorial_files projects). You can alsobrowse for existing projects.

In the lower section, you can modify the parameters of the current project.

Right-click to access context menus with available options, or use thecommands at the bottom and side of the editor.



Test Project SettingsNext, test the project settings.

1 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

2 Click ➤ Open.

The Tutorial Files folder opens, and its files and subfolders are listed.

If you hover over the Workspace entry in the Open dialog box, the tooltipindicates that the Tutorial Files folder is defined as your workspace.In addition, any libraries and subfolders that you define are also accessiblehere.

Test Project Settings | 9



Manage ProjectsYou use the Projects editor to manage your designs.

You can create new projects as you need them, and modify existing projectswhen paths change or new paths are required.

Place common search paths (such as library search paths) in a separate projectfile. You can then specify this file as the included project file in your otherproject files. All search paths in the included project file are added to thecurrent project file.


Use Paths in ProjectsIf you are working alone, your single-user project might only contain aworkspace and perhaps one or more library paths for files such as standardfasteners.

NOTE If you are working as part of a team, consider using Autodesk Vault, anddiscuss project and file-sharing strategies with team members.

Manage Projects | 11

Use the Projects editor from Autodesk Inventor or from the Microsoft WindowsStart menu to maintain and manage your projects.


Create a ProjectNext, we create a project.

1 Create a folder on your local hard drive in the My Documents area.Name the new folder InventorMasterProject.

2 Locate the Tutorial Files folder in the Autodesk Inventor installdirectory.

3 Copy the Arbor Press folder to the InventorMasterProject folder.

Notice that the Arbor Press folder contains two subfolders to furtherorganize the data files.

4 Start Autodesk Inventor in a blank document state.


5 If the Projects dialog box is not currently open, close any open files, and

then click ➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

6 Click New at the bottom of the dialog box.

7 Click New Single User Project, and then select Next on the AutodeskInventor project wizard dialog box that appears.

8 In the Name field, enter: InventorMasterProject

9 In the Project (Workspace) Folder, select Browse to navigate to theInventorMasterProject folder.

10 Select InventorMasterProject from the folder list and click OK toclose the Browse For Folder dialog box.

11 Click Finish in the Inventor project wizard dialog box to create theproject.

Autodesk Inventor adds the new project to the list of your other projectsand makes the new project the currently active project.


Refine your ProjectNow we will refine the project with additional settings.

1 In the lower panel of the Projects editor, select Use Style library.

2 Right-click, and choose Read-Write in the context menu.

Setting the Style Library option to Read-Write enables read/writecapabilities for the xml files that control styles such as dimensioning,materials, and appearances.

3 Select Libraries, and right click to access the context menu.

4 Choose Add Path in the context menu.

Inventor creates a folder named Library under the InventorMasterProjectfolder.

NOTE Library folders are used to hold standard components that do notchange. You can store library files on a shared, read-only network folder toprovide access for all users.

Files placed in a project libraries folder cannot be edited in the contextof the project file. To edit a file that resides in a defined project file library

Refine your Project | 13

location, create a project file that does not list this directory as a projectlibrary folder.

If you edit a file saved in an active library location, the following messagedisplays: Cannot modify the library file C:\MyDocuments\InventorMasterProject\Library\<filename>.

TIP To create a separate folder for library files without limiting the editabilities, do not use the project to define the Library. Instead, create a libraryfolder with the required name nested under the project file folder.

5 Select Frequently Used Subfolders, and right-click to access thecontext menu.■ Use Add Path to add one directory folder at a time. You can provide

a unique shortcut name for each folder added.

■ Use Add Paths from File to specify another project file to addpaths.

■ Use Add Paths from Directory to add all subfolders beneath theselected folder to the subfolder list.

6 Select Add Paths from Directory, and select the Arbor Press folder.

7 Click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box.

Notice that the subfolders located beneath the Arbor Press folder appearin the Projects dialog box.

8 Click Save, and then click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

NOTE In the future, press Esc to exit any Add Path operation withoutadding a path.


Use Your Project

1 Click ➤ Open.

Notice the Workspace is the InventorMasterProject folder. The Opendialog box shows all the subfolders contained in the root of theworkspace.

2 In the upper-left panel of the Open dialog box, choose the Componentsfolder under Frequently Used Subfolders.


3 The Components folder containing the arbor press part files opens.

4 To navigate back to the root of the workspace, click Workspace in theupper-left panel.

Notice the Content Center Files folder is listed as an available Libraryin the left panel.

5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box.


Control ProjectsIn the Projects Editor dialog box, use the right-click context menus in theupper pane to:■ Rename existing projects.

■ Browse for existing projects.

■ Create new projects.

■ Delete existing projects.

You can directly edit the various parameters in the current project usingcontext menus to add, change, and delete paths.

You can also change optional settings for a project, including the number offile versions to store.


File VersionsEach time you save an Autodesk Inventor file, the previous version of the fileis stored in an OldVersions folder under the folder containing the file.

You can specify how many versions of each file are stored in the OldVersionsfolder.

1 Expand Options.

2 Select Old Versions To Keep On Save.

3 Click the Edit selected item button (on the right-hand portion of thedialog box).

4 Enter the number of versions to keep.

Control Projects | 15

Once the specified number of saved versions is reached, subsequent saveseliminate the oldest version.

Old versions are formatted as follows:■ First save of existing file = file name.0001.extension.

■ Second save of existing file = file name.0002.extension.

■ Subsequent saves are named in a similar manner.

You can open an older version of a file as a read-only file. Alternatively, youcan restore an old version as the current version of the file. Before therestoration of an old version, the file is saved as the most recent version inthe OldVersions folder.

NOTE Assembly files always use the current version of parts included in theassembly. Old versions of assembly files do not retain information on the part andsubassembly versions that were in effect when you saved the assembly.


Use Other PathsIn addition to a workspace, you can also define library and subfolder searchpaths.

Search paths are examined in a specific order when opening a file (for example,an assembly) that references other files.

The Using Unique File Names option determines how Autodesk Inventorbehaves when searching for missing file references.■ When this option is Yes, Autodesk Inventor searches the entire project

workspace and workgroups (including subfolders) for a file with that name.If a file with that name is found, Autodesk Inventor uses it. If more thanone is found, then Autodesk Inventor displays a dialog box listing all thefiles with that name. If the missing file name is not found, AutodeskInventor activates the Resolve Link dialog box, where you can provideinput as needed.

■ When set to No, Autodesk Inventor uses its normal search process.



Collaborate with OthersThe primary collaborative environment for Autodesk Inventor is AutodeskVault.

Autodesk Vault is an engineering data management system that offers filesecurity, version control, and multi-user support. By using Autodesk Vault,you have a copy of the necessary project data in your workspace. All previousversions are maintained in a vault repository, which can be either on yourown computer or on a shared server. Autodesk Vault manages a collaborativework environment by tracking file versions. Other users can get the latestversion of data, modify it, and check the changes back into the vault.

NOTE Autodesk Inventor also continues to support two other legacy projectenvironments: shared and semi-isolated. Discuss these project types with yoursystem administrator or CAD Manager if your site is currently using either.

Collaborate with Others | 17


SummaryThis tutorial introduced you to single-user project fundamentals including:■ Understanding projects

■ Working with projects

■ Creating a simple project

■ Testing a new project file

If you are working with an existing collaborative team of Autodesk Inventorusers, discuss their use of the legacy project types: shared and semi-isolated.We recommend that you use Autodesk Vault for team collaboration.

Previous (page 17)


Navigation Tools

About this tutorial

SteeringWheel

ViewCube

Navigate in 3D space.

New UsersCategory


Tutorial File Used

2

19

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions atht-tp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorialdata sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install thedatasets as instructed.

Objectives■ Demonstrate the View Cube and SteeringWheels commands using a

combination of text, images, and animations.

■ Understand view tools to help navigate 3D model space efficiently.

Prerequisites■ Know how to open files.

■ See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.



NOTE The ViewCube and SteeringWheels appear in several Autodeskproducts. Some of the features and functions of these tools might not beappropriate for a particular workflow.

Next (page 20)

The ViewCube

20 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

http://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets


The ViewCube is an on-screen device, like Common View.

In R2009 and later, the ViewCube replaces Common View.

Like Common View, you click the cube corners to snap the model toisometric views, and click the faces for orthographic views. The ViewCubeprovides the following additional features:■ Persists onscreen in a corner of the graphics window (you can specify which

corner).

■ Can be dragged to orbit the model.

■ Provides labeled faces to indicate current view angle relative to the modelworld.

■ Provides clickable edges (along with the clickable corners and faces).

■ Provides a Home button to return to a user-defined base view.

■ Provides the ability to set the Front and Top views to user-defined views,thereby also redefining the other orthographic views, along with theisometric views. The redefined views are recognized by other environmentsor applications such as drawings or DWF.

■ In orthographic views, provides rotation arrows so you can rotate thecamera in 90-degree increments, normal to the screen.

■ Provides options so that you can adjust the cube characteristics accordingto your preferences.


The ViewCube | 21

Overview: SteeringWheelsSteeringWheels is a convenient onscreen pallet of familiar navigationcontrols, as well as controls that may be new to you.

SteeringWheels provides:■ Zoom Change the camera distance from the model. Zoom direction can

be reversed relative to mouse motion.

■ Orbit Change the camera position around a pivot point.

■ Pan Translate the camera across the screen.

■ Center Redefine the orbit center point.

In addition, SteeringWheels adds some controls that are either new toAutodesk Inventor or noticeably different and improved in their behavior:■ Walk In Perspective mode, the ability to navigate through a model,

much as you might walk through passages in a building.

■ Look In Perspective mode, the ability to change your view angle withoutchanging camera position, like pivoting a camera in any direction arounda fixed point, or like moving your head from side to side or up and down.

■ Up/Down The ability to translate the camera upwards or downwards,the direction defined as normal to the Top face of the ViewCube.

■ Rewind The ability to quickly, graphically select any previous view orperspective through a series of thumbnails.

SteeringWheels follows the cursor. You can access this pallet of toolsinstantly, without having to move the cursor to an icon on the ribbon. Likethe ViewCube, you can turn SteeringWheels on and off through thedrop-down menu in the Navigate panel of the View tab. Also, like the


ViewCube, SteeringWheels has options for tailoring the tool to yourpreferences.


Hands-on Demo: ViewCubeThe remainder of the tutorial highlights certain characteristics and behaviorsthat may not be familiar or readily apparent. The tutorial is not intended tocover every aspect of the tools. See Help for further detailed information. Anyreferences to default settings are based on the templates that ship withAutodesk Inventor.

The ViewCube is on by default (select View ➤ Windows ➤ User Interfaceto turn the ViewCube on and off). The default location for the ViewCube isin the upper-right corner of the screen. The ViewCube is partially transparentwhen inactive.


Switch Views1 Click an edge to switch to an edge-on view.

2 Click a face to switch to an orthographic view.

3 In an orthographic view, the Z-rotation arrows are available and providea rotation axis normal to the screen. The axis passes through thegeometric center of the model. Click an arrow to rotate the model 90degrees.

Also in orthographic view, the program shows arrows to select facesadjacent to the displayed face.


The ShadowNotice that a shadow is adjacent to the bottom face. It always moves with thebottom face to provide a constant, almost subliminal, indication of the Updirection of the model.

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube | 23

For most models, the sense of “up” is inherent in the model, or is notimportant. However, for some models and modeling situations, such as runninga gravity-influenced motion simulation, a clear and constant sense of up anddown may be useful or important. The shadow does not display when theBottom face is visible.


OrbitYou can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cubeto adjust your view.

Unless you are an AutoCAD user, the term “Orbit” may be new to you. Priorto Inventor 2009, all user interface labels and tooltips, along with Helpdocumentation, used the term “Rotate.” Though Rotate is descriptive of thisparticular interaction with the model, it is not technically accurate. Everyview of the model is actually from the viewpoint of a mobile camera, as if youare looking at the model through a camera. When you rotate a model, thecamera is actually orbiting the model.

Fortunately for veteran Autodesk Inventor users, the default behavior is thesame as it was in previous versions.


More about OrbitIn Inventor 2009, an additional, optional orbit behavior was added, knownas constrained orbit. Again, unless you are an AutoCAD user, this behaviormay be new to you. For the existing orbit behavior, the orbit is free about thescreen axes. For constrained orbit, the orbit is constrained about the Updirection of the model.

To see the difference between the two types:

1 Position the model in an isometric view with the Top face of the cubeon top.

2 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Constrained

Orbit (grouped with the Orbit command).


3 Position the cursor outside the reticle, adjacent to one of the horizontalmarkers. Click and drag the cursor across the screen. The orbit isconstrained to the Up axis of the model.

4 Click the Free Orbit icon , and drag the cursor as before.

Notice that the orbit axis is parallel to the screen.

If you are an AutoCAD user and new to Autodesk Inventor, you mayfind Constrained Orbit familiar and comfortable.


Home ViewThe Home button appears when you pause the cursor over the ViewCube.

1 Click the Home button. The viewpoint returns to a predefined location.

NOTE In R2009 and later, the context menu option Isometric View (F6) hasbeen changed to Home View.

You can set any viewpoint—not just an isometric view—as the Homeview.

2 Orbit the model to some arbitrary viewpoint.

3 Right-click the ViewCube, and then select Set Current View asHome ➤ Fixed Distance.

The Home view is now the specified view.


Front ViewYou can also set any viewpoint as the Front view.

1 Select any face on the ViewCube, other than the face currently labeledas Front.

2 Right-click the ViewCube, and select Set Current View as Front.

This function also reorients all the other orthographic and isometric modelviews, For example, the Back view must always be opposite the Front view.

Home View | 25

Notice that the view does not need to be orthographic. You can specify anyviewpoint to be the Front view.

To pick up model view redefinitions in a drawing, ensure that the FromModel option is selected in the Style and Standard Editor. To access to thisoption:

1 Start a new drawing.

2 On the ribbon, select Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards panel ➤ Styles Editor.

3 In the Style and Standard Editor browser, select the relevant standardunder the Standard node.

4 Select the View Preferences tab.

5 Ensure From Model is selected on the Front View Plane drop-downmenu.

As suggested in the introduction, drawing views created after a model viewredefinition honor the redefined model view.

On the other hand, model view redefinition is not backward-associative.Drawing views created before a model view is redefined do not update tomatch the redefinition.

Close the Style and Standard editor.


Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheelsUnlike the ViewCube, SteeringWheels is not on by default. On the ribbon,

click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Full Navigation Wheel.

SteeringWheels follows your cursor, also by default.

This feature makes the tool convenient in terms of access. If you find thisbehavior distracting and a little disorienting, hopefully, with a little use, youwill grow accustomed and appreciate the convenience and immediacy. If youfind that you really would like to use SteeringWheels, but thecursor-following behavior continues to be a distraction, you can use one ofthe mini wheels. More information on that option is provided later in thistutorial.



Click and HoldProbably the most important behavior to note about SteeringWheels is thatto use one of the controls, you must click and hold the mouse button. Thecontrol is only active while you hold the mouse button. Click and hold Pan, then drag the cursor across the screen. Release the button and the controlautomatically ends.

The advantage with this behavior is that you do not need any extra motions(like pressing Esc, bringing up a context menu, or pressing the commandagain) to end the command.


Pan and Screen SizeAnother interesting and convenient behavior that affects some of the controlsis that cursor movement is not limited by screen size. This is easiest todemonstrate with the Pan control. To see this:

1 Click and hold Zoom, and then draw the mouse towards you to zoomin close on the model.

2 Click and hold Pan, and then drag the cursor across the screen.

Notice that the cursor leaves the screen, and then instantly appears onthe opposite side.

You can pan more with one hand motion before you have to reposition yourhand on the mouse pad. The limiting factor is the mouse pad and cursor speedor acceleration, not the screen size. While this may seem insignificant, it alladds up. This feature may take a little getting used to when you are used tothe Pan cursor stopping against the edge of the screen.


Click and Hold | 27

Orbit and Pivot PointAs mentioned earlier, the actual behavior of the Orbit control is the same asearlier releases, as long as you selected Free Orbit on the ribbon.

1 Click and hold Orbit, and then drag the cursor. If Constrained Orbitis selected, then the Orbit control honors that setting.

Notice that a Pivot indicator appears on screen as you orbit. The indicatorprovides positive feedback as to the orbit center point location. You canmodify the pivot point and snap to model edges and vertices.

2 Press and hold Center, select a vertex, and then release the mousebutton. The orbit center point is now that vertex.


Up and DownJust as it sounds, you can use the Up/Down control to translate the cameraup and down. Up/Down translates the camera along the top/bottom axis.


RewindIf you have ever wanted to save and quickly access views in a part document,try using the Rewind control.

1 Press and hold the Rewind control. A set of thumbnails appear, almostlike a film strip, showing you a selectable history of model views.

2 Drag the cursor to the left across the thumbnails. The model viewseamlessly animates back through the preceding views.

3 Release the mouse button to select a view.

Notice that the selected view can be any ‘intermediate’ view, not justthe views shown in the thumbnails. Previous views are stored only forthat session.



Walk and LookThe Walk and Look controls work especially well when used in conjunctionwith each other. The controls only function when in Perspective mode. Ifyou are in Orthographic mode, when you click either control, the cameraautomatically switches to Perspective mode.

Before proceeding with the following steps, right-click the wheel and selectOptions. Clear the checkmark next to Walk Tool - Constrain movementto ground plane. Click OK.

1 Orient the model as shown. Press and hold Walk. Move the mouseforward, and the camera moves through the model. Move the mouse tothe side, and the camera moves laterally. Release the mouse button.

The walk speed is proportional to the cursor distance from walk originindicator.

2 Press and hold Look. Move the mouse, and the camera pivots arounda fixed point in that direction.

3 Now use the controls in conjunction. Press Walk to move through themodel, then press Look to turn and look down the next “walk path.”Use the Walk control again to move down that line of sight.


Other FeaturesIf you have multiple windows open, SteeringWheels passes seamlessly fromwindow to window.■ As an alternative to right-clicking to bring up the SteeringWheel context

menu, you can click the context menu button to bring up the menu.

Walk and Look | 29

■ To switch the display of SteeringWheels on and off, press Ctrl + W.

■ To dismiss SteeringWheels, click the x at the top right of the tool.


Mini WheelsThe full version of SteeringWheels displays by default, but you can specifyother full-size versions of SteeringWheels as well as miniature versions ofeach wheel. To experiment with these versions, right-click theSteeringWheels tool, and select a version from the menu. For example,select Mini View Object Wheel to see a small version of the fullSteeringWheels.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Use the ViewCube to switch defined views.

■ Use the ViewCube to orbit a model.

■ Use the ViewCube to redefine named views.

■ Use the ViewCube to return to a home view.

■ Use SteeringWheels to orbit a model and redefine the orbit pivot point.


■ Rewind to and select previous viewpoints.

■ Navigate model space using the Walk and Look commands.

■ Access alternative SteeringWheels.

Check Help for further detailed information.

Previous (page 30)

Summary | 31

32

Sketch Constraints

About this tutorial

Explore the impact of geometric and dimensional constraints on a simple sketch.

New UsersCategory


3

33

sk1.iptTutorial File Used


Understand sketch constraints to work effectively with Autodesk Inventor.

Objectives■ Apply constraints.

■ Establish relationships between geometry.

■ View and delete constraints.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view

tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching andextruding.




Next (page 34)

Get Started1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to open the sketch for edit.

2 To orient the view, click View Face from the navigation toolbar, andclick Sketch1 in the browser so the sketch is parallel to the screen.

34 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints



The sketch used in this tutorial contains four straight line segmentsdrawn so the line endpoints are constrained to be coincident. Otherwise,the geometry is unconstrained.

Get Started | 35


Drag GeometryMove the endpoint of one of the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor over the top-most endpoint.

2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and thendrag the point up and toward the right.

3 Release the mouse button to select the new position.


Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position specified forthe endpoint.


Drag Geometry (continued)Move one of the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor over the left-most line.

2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and thendrag the line toward the left.

Drag Geometry (continued) | 37


Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position while theselected segment becomes shorter.


Drag All the GeometryMove all the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor to the left and below the sketch geometry.

2 Click and drag a selection window to the upper-right around thegeometry. Release the mouse button to select the geometry.


3 Move your mouse cursor over one of the lines.

4 When the line highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, andthen drag up and toward the right.


Drag All the Geometry | 39

The program repositions all the selected geometry without changing thesize or angle of any of the line segments.

6 Click in your graphic window to cancel the selection of all four linesegments before proceeding to the next step.



Rotate a Sketched LineRotate one of the lines:

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rotate.

2 Select the left-most line in the sketch.

3 Right-click and select Continue.

4 Select the lower endpoint of the line segment as your center point. Thisis the pivot point for the rotation.

5 Click No on the dialog box which prompts you if you want to removeconstraints. If you click Yes, the constraints on the line are deleted andthe line rotates independent of the other geometry.

6 Drag the displayed handle to rotate the line segment.

NOTE You can also enter a value in the Angle field of the dialog box andclick Apply to view the change.

Notice that one end of the line remains fixed while the programdynamically repositions the other. The attached segment also adjustslength and angle to stay attached.

7 Click to select a new angle for your line segment and click Done to closethe Rotate dialog box.

Rotate a Sketched Line | 41


Constrain to the Origin1 Right-click the Origin folder in the browser, and select Expand All

Children to see the browser nodes you use to select the origin geometrywhen it is not displayed.

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project

Geometry.

3 Select the browser node Center Point to include the origin point as apoint in your sketch.

4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Coincident Constraint.

5 Select the lower endpoint of the left-most line, and then the projectedorigin point.


Notice that two line segments adjust their length and angle to allow theendpoint to become coincident with the origin point.

NOTE Do not be concerned if the shape of your geometry does not exactlymatch the illustrations.


Apply a Horizontal ConstraintThe set of geometric constraints contains both a horizontal and verticalconstraint. You can apply to lines to make them horizontal or vertical relativeto the sketch X or Y orientation.

1 Select the Horizontal Constraint command.

2 Select the lower line of the sketch.

NOTE Ensure that you select the line and not the line midpoint.

Notice that the lower segment becomes horizontal while remainingcoincident to the origin.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint | 43


Apply a Perpendicular ConstraintThe set of geometric constraints contains a perpendicular constraint whichmakes one line perpendicular to another.

1 Select the Perpendicular Constraint command.

2 Select the right-most line of the sketch.

3 Select the (now horizontal) lower line of the sketch.

The line segment becomes perpendicular to the lower segment.

NOTE If a design change later requires you to rotate your sketch, it is oftenmore appropriate to make one line perpendicular to another rather thanusing the horizontal or vertical constraints (which prevent rotation).



Apply a Parallel ConstraintThe set of geometric constraints contains a parallel constraint which makesone line parallel to another.

1 Select the Parallel Constraint command.


3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

Although the left line segment becomes parallel to the right line segment,the length of the upper and lower lines changed.

Next, you apply dimensions which constrain your geometry to a specific size.


Apply a Parallel Constraint | 45

Apply a DimensionUse the General Dimension command in the sketch environment to placelinear and angular dimensions. What you select determines what type ofdimension you obtain. If you want to dimension the length of a line, you canselect the line. If you want to place a dimension between two pieces of sketchgeometry, you can select each piece of geometry.

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension.


3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

4 Click to place the dimension.

5 Click the dimension to change the value.

6 Enter a new value of 4 in, and click the check mark to apply the newvalue.


TIP You can set an application option so you can edit dimensions duringplacement. Each time you click to place a dimension, the Edit Dimensiondialog box appears automatically and you can specify the actual dimensionor equation. The option is called Edit dimension when created andis located on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box.


Apply an Angular DimensionThe Dimension command is still active. Place an angle dimension betweenthe right-most vertical line and the top line:


2 Select the top-most line of the sketch.

3 Click between the lines to place the dimension.

4 Click the dimension to change the value.

5 Enter a new value of 60 deg, and click the check mark to apply the newvalue.

Apply an Angular Dimension | 47

NOTE You can also delete dimensions. With no command active, right-clickthe dimension and select Delete from the context menu. Alternatively,select the dimension and then press the Delete key.

In the next steps, you explore which constraints you applied and ways todelete constraints that you no longer need.


Show All ConstraintsKnowing what constraints the program applies to which pieces of geometryis critical to predictable sketch behavior.

1 Right-click in an empty area of your sketch.

2 Select Done from the context menu to terminate the placement ofdimensions.

3 Right-click again in an empty area of your sketch.

4 Now select Show All Constraints from the context menu.


Notice that icons appear near each piece of geometry with indicationsof the applied constraints.


Examine Constraint RelationshipsThe icons represent the constraints that you applied to the geometry or thatthe system applied when you created the geometry.

Examine Constraint Relationships | 49

Pause your mouse over the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom ofthe right-most vertical line segment.

Notice that the lines which are perpendicular highlight, as does theperpendicular constraint icon. Using this technique you can understand thenetwork of constraints that govern the behavior of your sketch.



Delete a ConstraintBy right-clicking a displayed constraint icon, you can delete the constraint.

1 Right-click the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of theright-most vertical line segment.

2 Select Delete to remove the perpendicular constraint between this lineand the horizontal lower line segment.

3 Click and drag the top-most endpoint to see how the geometry nowbehaves.

Delete a Constraint | 51

Finally, right-click an empty area of your sketch, and select Hide AllConstraints to make the constraint icons invisible.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you explored:■ Various ways that under-constrained geometry behaves during dynamic

dragging.

■ The application of various geometric constraints such as: coincident,horizontal, perpendicular, and parallel.

■ The application of dimensional constraints.

■ The effect of constraints on geometry size and position.

■ Access to a display of constraint relationships to their geometries.

■ Deleting constraints.

Previous (page 51)


Direct Manipulation

About this tutorial

New UsersCategory


Sliding-pin Hanger.iptTutorial File Used

4

53


Maximize your skill using Direct Manipulation to interact with models.

Direct Manipulation is a new user interface where you interact and modify amodel while viewing the changes in real time. The resulting interaction isdynamic, visual, and predictable. You focus on the geometry in an in-canvasdisplay instead of interacting with user interface elements such as the ribbon,browser, and a dialog box.

Objectives■ Identify the various graphical elements of the Direct Manipulation

in-canvas display.

■ Rotate and extrude sketch profiles using manipulators.

■ Offset a work plane using a distance arrow.

■ Create a sketch using the mini-toolbar.

■ Use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to construct accuratesketch geometry and have it automatically dimensioned.

■ Recognize the differences between Join, Cut, and Intersect graphicalpreviews.

■ Create an edge fillet.

■ Construct a tapped hole.

■ Rotate an existing face.

Prerequisites■ See the Help topics "Getting Started", "Direct Manipulation", and “Dynamic

Input” for further information.

System Settings

On the ribbon Tools tab, Options panel, select Application Options andclick the Sketch tab to enable the following settings:■ Edit dimension when created

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit

NOTE The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environmentimages in this tutorial.

54 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation





Next (page 55)

Open the Sketch Profile file

1 Click Get Started tab ➤ Launch panel ➤ Open on theribbon. Select Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt from the file list in the Opendialog box.

2 Click OK.

3 The Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile appears in the isometric HomeView (isometric orientation) as shown. Press F6 to restore the HomeView if your view is different from the image.

Take a moment to study the Model browser at the left side of the graphicswindow. It displays both the part origin and the sole feature in the part,Sketch1. Click the + button to the left of the Origin folder name to expandthe item. Notice that the center point of the part (X=0, Y=0, Z=0), the origin

Open the Sketch Profile file | 55

planes, and origin axes are displayed in the browser. Each of the browserelements highlights in the graphics window as you move your cursor overthem.

NOTE The Origin elements appear dimmed in the browser. Although their visibilityis turned off by default, they are still active. You can turn on the visibility byright-clicking over any one of them and activating the corresponding Visibilitycheck box in the pop-up context menu. It is not necessary to turn them on forthis exercise, however.


Revolve the Sketch ProfileThe Revolve command creates a feature by revolving one or more sketchprofiles about an axis through any angle measuring between zero and 360°.The axis of revolution can be part of the profile or offset from it. The profileand axis must be coplanar.

1 Click Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve on the ribbon,or press R to invoke the Revolve command.

After invoking the Revolve command, both the Direct Manipulationin-canvas display and the title bar of the Revolve dialog box appear inthe graphics window. The dialog box is in a collapsed state, but can beexpanded by clicking the down arrow near the top of the dialog box.For this tutorial, we use the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display andmini-toolbar to revolve the sketch profile rather than use the dialog boxoptions.

2 Observe that the sketch profile automatically highlighted when youinvoked the Revolve command because it is the only sketch in the partfile. Note also that the axis button in the mini-toolbar is highlighted

. This indicates that the revolution axis selection is notyet satisfied.

3 Click to select the long horizontal axis of the profile.



Interpreting the In-Canvas DisplayAfter selecting the axis of revolution, the in-canvas display appears in thegraphics window. Take a moment to examine the various elements of thein-canvas display.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 57

The value input box reports that a full 360° revolution will be performedaround the sketch axis you selected. It is the default condition for the Revolvecommand and the graphical preview on your display screen reflects that.However, you can enter any angular value in the value input box to create arevolution other than a full 360°.

As an alternative to entering an explicit angular value in the value input box,you can also click the gold rotation arrow manipulator. Then dynamicallydrag the sketch profile around the axis of revolution.

1 Try it now. Click the rotation arrow manipulator and drag the profilearound the axis. First drag in one direction, and then try dragging in theopposite direction. As you drag the rotation arrow, observe the changing


angular values displaying in the value input box. Note also that thegraphical preview updates in real time to show the results of the Revolveoperation.

2 When you are finished experimenting with dynamic drag, direct yourattention to the Revolve mini-toolbar in the in-canvas display.

3 Starting at the upper-left, let us examine each of the buttons.

■ The grip button lets you easily move the mini-toolbar to adifferent screen location.

■ The fly-out arrow on the Extents button offersseveral termination options:■ Angle lets you revolve the sketch profile around the axis at any

angle.

■ To next face/body lets you revolve to an existing face or bodyof a multi-body part.

■ To selected face/plane lets you revolve to an existing part face,work plane, or work point.

■ Between two faces/planes lets you select beginning andending faces or work planes on which to terminate the revolution.

■ Full performs a full 360° of revolution around the sketch axis.

■ Click the Profile button and then select the sketchto revolve. (Remember that the very first sketch in a new part file isselected automatically.)

■ Click the Axis button and then select the axis aboutwhich to revolve the profile.

■ The Solid button selects the participating solid bodyin a multi-body part.

■ The Solid output button lets you revolve a profile intoa solid or a surface object.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 59

■ The Join button adds the volume created by the revolvedfeature to another feature or body. We will explore the Cut andIntersect options a bit later in this tutorial.

■ The fly-out arrow on the Direction button displaysthe direction options available:■ Direction 1 revolves the sketch profile in the positive direction

(towards you).

■ Direction 2 revolves the sketch profile in the negative direction(away from you).

■ Symmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions withequal angular values.

■ Asymmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions withdifferent angular values.

■ Click the Ok button to finish the Revolve command andcomplete the revolution.

■ The Cancel button cancels the Revolve command. Norevolution is performed.

■ The Mini-Toolbar Options button offers two options.You can pin the mini-toolbar so that it remains stationary in thegraphics window and/or use the Auto Fade option to enable or disablethe mini-toolbar display.

4 Now, select the Full option in the Extents button flyout and click thegreen Ok button to complete the Revolve command.

5 Observe that the Revolution1 feature was added to the Model browser.Click the + button to the left of the feature name to expand the item.The feature has one child - the sketch from which it was created.

6 Move your cursor over both the Revolution1 feature name andSketch1 in the browser. The corresponding items highlight in thegraphics window as you do so.



Create an Offset Parallel Work PlaneIn the next part of the tutorial, you create a work plane which is offset fromthe default XY plane of the part origin. The work plane is the base for a newsketch.

1 Click the down arrow of the Model tab ➤ Work Featurespanel ➤ Plane command on the ribbon. Then select Offset from

Plane from the Plane drop-down menu .

2 Once again, direct your attention to the Model browser at the side ofthe graphics window. The Origin folder should still be in an expandedstate. If not, click the + button to expand the part Origin folder.

3 As you did previously, move your cursor over the YZ Plane, the XZPlane, and the XY Plane in the browser. As each Origin plane

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane | 61

highlights in the graphics window, make a point of identifying whichbrowser element corresponds to which origin plane in the graphicswindow.

4 Click the XY Plane. Next, you create a work plane parallel to the defaultXY plane (highlighted in blue), but at a specified distance.

5 Click the gold distance arrow manipulator and drag the parallel workplane in a positive direction (towards you) approximately 38 mm.Alternatively, you can directly enter 38 in the value input box. It is notnecessary to include the mm if you choose this method.

6 Click the green Ok button to create the parallel offset work plane andend the command.

The new feature, Work Plane1, is added to the Model browser.



Create a New SketchWe will now create a sketch on the work plane. In a later step, this sketch ismirrored across the X axis of the part. It is used to cut away, or extrude,portions of material from the cylindrical feature of the part.

1 Click any one of the four edges of the work plane.

2 When the mini-toolbar appears, click the second button on the rightlabeled with the tooltip Create Sketch.

Create a New Sketch | 63

3 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is becausethe Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketchtab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

The new feature, Sketch2, is added to the Model browser.


Project Geometry onto the Sketch PlaneThe Project Geometry command projects edges, vertices, work features,loops, and curves from existing sketches or part geometry onto the currentsketch plane. It can also be used to project part origin planes and axes.

1 On the ribbon, click the Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ ProjectGeometry button.

2 Select the top horizontal line and the arc representing the sphericalradius to project onto the sketch plane. Select the X axis from the


expanded Origin folder in the Model browser, as well.

3 After selecting the three elements, right-click in the graphics windowand select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to end the ProjectGeometry command. Alternatively, you can also press the Esc key onyour keyboard.


Draw the Sketch Geometry

1 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line on the ribbon, orpress L to invoke the Line command. You can also right-click in thegraphics window and select Line at the top of the marking menu.

2 Left-click the point shown to begin the first point of the line. A greendot appears to indicate that you have selected the precise endpoint ofthe projected line. The Heads-Up Display (HUD) Pointer Input displays

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 65

the line starting coordinates as X = -25 mm, Y = 25 mm.

3 Move your cursor to the left (180°). End the first line segment by clickingwhere the horizontal line intersects with the start of the spherical radius.Do not be concerned with the displayed value in the value input box.

4 The first sketch line is now complete. The Line command can also beused to draw an arc radius. For the starting point of the arc, click theendpoint of the line you just drew. Press and hold the left mouse button


and drag your cursor to trace over a portion of the spherical radius.

5 The length of the arc segment is not important. Drag your cursor justenough to approximate what you see in the image. Be sure to keep yourcursor on the spherical radius to ensure that the arc ending point iscoincident with the projected geometry. (A yellow dot at the end of thecursor and a coincident constraint symbol appear when you arecoincident with the sketch geometry.) Click to set the ending point ofthe arc.

6 You now use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to sketchanother line with a precise distance and angle. Still in the Linecommand, pick the ending point of the arc you just completed and moveyour cursor to the right. Two value input boxes appear near your cursorindicating the length (distance) and angle of the sketch line underconstruction. Notice that the first value input box is highlighted andawaits your input. Enter 60 in the box for the line length and press theTab key to shift the input focus to the second value input box. Enter 0for the line angle and press the Tab key again.

7 Observe the small lock icon within each value input box. They indicatethat the values you entered are locked (constrained) for both the distanceand angle of the line. Note also the two parallelism glyphs indicating

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 67

that the two sketch lines are exactly parallel.

8 Press Enter to finish drawing the line. The dimensional values, calledpersistent dimensions, are created and placed when Dynamic Inputis used to define sketch geometry.

9 Next, draw the final line segment back to the point at which you started.When the green dot appears, click to complete the segment and closethe profile.

10 Finally, right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu, orpress the Esc key, to exit the Line command.

We will now create a vertical dimension to specify the width of theprofile.

11 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension on theribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. You can alsoright-click in the graphics window and select General Dimension fromthe marking menu.

12 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. (The endpoints appearas red dots when you place your cursor over them.) Move your cursorto the left and click to place the dimension.


13 Enter 9 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or pressEnter) to create the dimension.

14 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit theDimension command.


Mirror the SketchBefore making a mirror image of the sketch, turn off the visibility of the workplane. There are two ways to do it:■ Right-click any one of the four edges of the work plane and clear the check

mark in theVisibility marking menu node.

■ Or, right-click Work Plane1 in the Model browser and clear theVisibility check mark.

Your display screen should look like the following image.

NOTE The 60mm dimension has been moved and the angular dimension deletedin the image to provide clarity.

Mirror the Sketch | 69

You are now ready to mirror your new sketch about the X axis of the part.

1 Click Sketch tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror on the ribbon.The Mirror dialog box appears with the Select button active. Now picktwo diagonal points on the screen to enclose the sketch profile completelywithin the Mirror window.

2 Move your cursor to the upper left and outside the sketch to pick thefirst point. Next, move your cursor in a diagonal direction to the lowerright to pick the second point. As you move your cursor, the windowgraphically previews to help you determine the required extents of theMirror window.

3 Click the Mirror line button in the Mirror dialog box and select the Xaxis which you projected in a previous step.

4 Click the Apply button in the Mirror dialog box to preview the resultsof the mirror operation.


5 Click the Done button to mirror the sketch, close the Mirror dialog box,and exit the Mirror command.

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch on theribbon to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. You canalso right-click in the graphics window and select Finish Sketch fromthe marking menu.

7 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finishthe sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.


Extrude the Two Sketch ProfilesThe Extrude command creates a feature by adding depth to an open or closedsketch profile. You specify the direction, depth, taper angle, and terminationmethod for the extrusion.

You now perform an extrude operation with a Cut that uses the two sketchprofiles to remove material from the cylindrical portion of the part.

1 Click Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude on the ribbon,or press E to invoke the Extrude command. You can also right-click inthe graphics window and select Extrude from the marking menu.

2 Select the two sketch profiles.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 71

3 After selecting the profiles, the in-canvas display appears in the graphicswindow. The default option for the Extrude command is to perform aJoin operation. The graphical preview appearing on the screen displaysin green for a Join.

4 Click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut

option .

5 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Direction button and select the

Direction 2 option , if not already active. Observe that thegraphical preview changes color from green to red to indicate a Cutoperation. Note also that the gold distance arrow manipulator hasreversed position and now points in a negative direction into the screen.

6 Take a moment now and try dragging the distance arrow backward andforward over the object. The red graphical preview shows you the materialto be removed during a Cut operation.


NOTE As an experiment, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button

and select the Intersect option . An Intersect operation calculatesthe shared volumes of two or more intersecting objects and graphicallypreviews in blue. After previewing the intersections, click the flyout arrowon the Operation button and select Cut once again.

7 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Extents button to displaythe termination options. Use■ Distance to extrude a sketch profile with a numeric value which

you enter in the value input box. It is the default option.

■ To next face/body extrudes to the next part face or solid bodyencountered in the direction of the extrusion.

■ To selected face/point extrudes to an existing part face, workplane, or work point.

■ Between two faces/plane selects beginning and ending faces orwork planes on which to terminate the extrusion.

■ Through All performs a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation throughthe entire part.

8 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout

and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrudecommand.

The new feature, Extrusion1, is added to the Model browser.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 73


Create a Third SketchWe now create a third sketch to draw and dimension a rectangle. The rectangleis then extruded with a cut to produce a rectangular-shaped opening throughthe part.

1 Click the flattened top face of the part.

2 The Direct Manipulation mini-toolbar appears and, starting from theleft, displays three buttons offering the following commands:■ Edit Extrude

■ Edit Sketch

■ Create Sketch


3 Select the third button, Create Sketch.

4 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is becausethe Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketchtab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

5 The edges of the selected face are automatically projected. TheAutoproject edges for sketch creation and edit option on theSketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is also active.

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle on the ribbonand select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu. You canalso right-click in the graphics window and select Two Point Rectanglefrom the marking menu.

7 Pick the approximate point shown in the image to place the lower-rightcorner of the rectangle. Do not be concerned with the values displayed

Create a Third Sketch | 75

in the Pointer Input fields.

.

8 Move your cursor to the upper left to activate the rectangle horizontaland vertical value input boxes. The current input focus is in the valueinput field representing the horizontal dimension. Enter 50 and pressTab. The lock icon indicates that the horizontal dimension of therectangle is fully constrained.

9 Input focus is now shifted to the second value input field representingthe vertical dimension. Enter 25 and press Tab.

10 Press Enter to draw and dimension the rectangle. The rectangle is fullydimensioned because Dynamic Input with persistent dimensions was


used to input the dimensional values.

11 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit theTwo Point Rectangle command.

NOTE To move a sketch dimension to a new location, select the dimension,and press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the dimension. Releasethe mouse button when the dimension is placed to your satisfaction.

The new feature, Sketch3, is added to the Model browser.

We now create a single vertical dimension to center the rectangle on theflattened face.

12 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension on theribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. Remember thatyou can also select General Dimension from the marking menu.

13 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. Move your cursor tothe left and click to place the dimension.

Create a Third Sketch | 77

14 Enter 6.71 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (orpress Enter) to create the dimension.

15 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu.

16 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch on theribbon, or select Finish Sketch from the marking menu, to finish thesketch and exit the sketch environment.

17 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finishthe sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.



Extrude the RectangleRather than use the Extrude command from the ribbon, keyboard, or markingmenu, Direct Manipulation provides another method to create an extrusion.

1 Select any one of the four lines comprising the sketched rectangle todisplay the Sketch mini-toolbar.

2 Starting from the left, the Sketch mini-toolbar offers the following fourcommands:■ Extrude

■ Revolve

■ Hole

■ Edit Sketch

Extrude the Rectangle | 79

3 Click the Extrude button and select the rectangle as the profile toextrude. Be sure to pick inside the rectangle.

4 When the Extrude mini-toolbar appears, click the flyout arrow on the

Operation button and select the Cut option .

5 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout

and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrudecommand.

The new feature, Extrusion2, is added to the Model browser.



Create an Edge FilletFillets and rounds are placed features that round off or cap interior or exteriorcorners or features of a part. The Fillet command creates the following typesof fillets:■ Edge fillets are created based on selected edges. The fillets can be of constant

or variable-radius, of different sizes, and of different continuity (tangentor smooth G2). They can all be created in a single operation. All fillets androunds created in a single operation become a single feature.

■ Face fillets are created between two faces or face sets. The faces need notshare an edge. Any small edges and irregular geometry are blended overby the fillet.

■ Full round fillets are variable-radius fillets that are tangent to three adjacentfaces or face sets. The center face set is replaced by a variable-radius fillet.

Create an Edge Fillet | 81

We now create a simple edge fillet using Direct Manipulation.

1 Click the circular edge of the large diameter of the part.

2 The mini-toolbar appears offering both Fillet (first button) and Chamfer(second button) command options.

3 Click the Fillet button and the Fillet mini-toolbar appears.


NOTE While it is beyond the scope of this exercise to describe each of themini-toolbar components, you are encouraged to review the Fillet topicin the Inventor Help.

4 For the purpose of this tutorial, we need only consider the followingfour components of the mini-toolbar:■ Value input box - used to enter a fillet radius in the value input

field.

■ Ok button - indicated by a green check mark, the Ok button createsthe fillet and terminates the command.

■ Apply button - indicated by a green '+', the Apply button lets youapply one or more edge fillets without exiting the Fillet command.

■ Cancel button - indicated by a red 'X', the Cancel button cancelsthe Fillet command. No fillets are created.

5 Try dragging the gold distance arrow manipulator forward and backwardover the circular edge. Observe how the fillet radius increases anddecreases in real time.

Create an Edge Fillet | 83

6 Drag the manipulator until 3.250 mm appears in the value input box,or enter the value 3.25 from the keyboard.

7 Click the Ok button to create the fillet and exit the command.

The new feature, Fillet1 is added to the Model browser.


Create a Tapped Hole

1 Click Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole on the ribbon, orpress H to invoke the Hole command. You can also select the Hole


command from the marking menu. The Hole dialog box appears in itscollapsed state in the graphics window.

2 Select the top face at the rear of the part. The Hole mini-toolbarappears in the graphics window. If the mini-toolbar obscures the picklocation on the top face of the model, select the mini-toolbar by thegrip button just to the left of the value input box, and move it to a

different location.

3 Look closely at the point you picked on the top face. The ringmanipulator around the center of the hole represents the hole diameter.Click the ring with your mouse and it will turn gold in color. Try draggingthe gold ring manipulator to increase and decrease the diameter of thehole.

Create a Tapped Hole | 85

NOTE You may need to zoom up your display a bit to make the manipulatorseasier to select.

4 The sphere manipulator at the center of the pick point represents thecenter location of the hole. Click the sphere with your mouse and it willturn gold in color, also. Try dragging the gold sphere manipulator toplace the hole location dynamically.

For this exercise, we will use precise linear placement by selecting theappropriate edges and entering the required distances from each.

5 Click the inside edge of the rectangle.


6 Enter 5 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the horizontaldimension.

7 Next, click the outside edge of the highlighted face.

8 Enter 19 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the verticaldimension.

9 Using the Hole dialog box, enter the following values to create a M6x1- 6H metric tapped hole with a thread depth of 6 mm:

6 mmThread depth

118 degDrill Point

DistanceTermination

ThreadedHole Type

ANSI Metric M ProfileThread Type

6Size

M6x1Designation

6HClass

Right HandDirection


The Hole dialog box appears as shown in the image.



10 Click the OK button to close the dialog box, create the tapped hole, andfinish the command.

The new feature, Hole1, is added to the Model browser.


Rotate a Face Using the TriadThe Move Face command lets you move one or more faces on a part. Youcan specify an explicit direction and distance to move a set of faces. You canalso freely move and rotate a set of faces or features about the X, Y, or Z axesusing the Free Move option.

In this final section of the tutorial, the Free Move triad is used to modify thetop angled face of the Sliding-pin Hanger.

1 Click Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Face on the ribbon.

2 Select the angled face on the top of the part. The Move Face Free Move

triad appears.

You can interactively position a face or feature by dragging the triad ina planar move, axial move, or free movement. The selected area of thetriad controls the movement. The colors help you identify triad axes:

■ Red is the X axis

■ Green is the Y axis

■ Blue is the Z axis


When you first activate the triad, its origin sphere is coincident with thegeometry you want to transform. Click a triad section or drag to indicatethe type of transform you want. As you select other parts of the triad,you can drag or enter precise coordinates corresponding to your selection.

The triad is comprised of the following elements:

■ Arrowheads move the triad along the axes.

■ Rotational manipulators rotate the triad around the axis. Click thered rotational manipulator to rotate in the YZ plane dynamicallyaround the X axis. Click the green rotational manipulator to rotatedynamically in the XZ plane around the Y axis. Click the bluerotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XY plane aroundthe Z axis.

■ Planes move the triad in the selected plane.

■ Sphere allows unrestricted movement in the view plane.

In the next step, we rotate the angled face in the XZ plane using thegreen rotational manipulator. It may be helpful to rotate the view a bitto provide easier access to the manipulator.

3 Click the Free Orbit command in the Navigation Bar at the rightof the graphics window. The rotation symbol appears in the graphicswindow with both vertical and horizontal axes. Click inside the rotationsymbol. Press and hold the left mouse button as you move your cursor

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 91

to approximate the viewing angle shown in the image.

When you are satisfied with the new view, press the Esc key to exit theFree Orbit command.


TIP You can quickly access the Free Orbit function in the middle of anothercommand by pressing and holding function key F4 as you rotate the view.When the view is rotated to your satisfaction, release the function key toresume the previous command. You can also use the ViewCube to orbitthe model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view.

4 Click the green rotational manipulator and drag to the right to see theeffects of a negative rotation. Drag to the left to view a positive rotation.

5 Enter 2 in the value input box and click the green Ok button to rotatethe face 2° in the positive direction.

The Move Face command terminates and the new feature, Move Face1,is added to the Model browser.

6 Press F6 to restore the Home view.

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 93

7 Save and close the file. This concludes the Introduction to DirectManipulation tutorial.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Revolve and extrude profiles using Direct Manipulation.

■ Create a parallel work plane using a distance arrow manipulator.

■ Project a coordinate axis.

■ Sketch geometry and dimension using Dynamic Input.

■ Mirror a sketch profile.

■ Create a fillet using the mini-toolbar.

■ Create a tapped hole.

■ Rotate an existing face using the Move Face Triad.

What Next? In this exercise, the Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile wasprovided for you. To learn how to create a part from scratch and gain furtherexperience with sketching, part modeling, and work feature commands, trythe Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.

Previous (page 90)


Parts 1

About this tutorial

Create parts from sketches.

New UsersCategory


5

95

Start a new part file (metric).Tutorial FileUsed

In this tutorial, you work with various commands and workflows in Inventorto build 3D parts.

This tutorial exposes you to various feature creation commands and workflowsyou can use when you create 3D parts. If the finished part is the correct sizeand shape, your modeling effort is successful.

Objectives■ Create a part from a sketch.

■ Add dimensions and constraints to sketch geometry.

■ Create and use parameters.

■ Use feature commands such as Extrude and the Hole command.

■ Use the pattern command to array features.

■ Save a copy of a part as a new file.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Sketch Constraints and Introduction to Direct

Manipulation tutorials.

■ Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab:■ Apply driven dimension - Select

■ Grid lines – Clear

■ Minor grid lines – Clear

■ Axes - Select

■ Snap to grid – Clear

■ Edit dimension when created - Select

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select



Next (page 97)

96 | Chapter 5 Parts 1

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk InventorIn this section, we apply horizontal and vertical constraints to constrain theshape to the X,Y, Z coordinates 0, 0, 0. We then add dimensions, create namedparameters and use equations.

Adding relationships between dimensions reduces the amount of edits,especially in complex parts. You can also add mathematical formulas todimensions. A link is provided in the exercise to the operators that can beused in equations.

1 Click the Autodesk Inventor icon to start a new part. SelectNew to open the Create New File dialog box.

2 Click the metric folder to start a new metric part. Under the Part category,

double-click Standard (mm).ipt .

If your sketch settings match the recommendations listed previously,you see an X axis, a Y axis, and a point at 0,0,0.

3 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Rectangle. SelectRectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu, or select Two PointRectangle from the marking menu. Sketch a rectangle approximatelycentered about 0,0.

4 Apply a Horizontal constraint between the origin and the midpointof a vertical line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the verticalline to display and select the midpoint.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 97

5 Apply a Vertical constraint between the origin and the midpoint ofa horizontal line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the horizontalline to display and select the midpoint.

If the logic of these picks seems confusing, imagine the axis between thetwo points you are picking.

6 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or select General Dimension from the marking menu.

7 Place a horizontal dimension.

8 In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation Width=49mmto define a new variable named Width with an initial value of 49 mm.

9 Place a vertical dimension. Highlight the value in the Edit Dimensiondialog box. Instead of entering a number, pick the horizontal dimensionvalue. The variable name of the first dimension (Width) appears in thedialog box. Click the check mark to link the current dimension to thefirst dimension.

The vertical dimension displays as fx:49. The display means that aformula is in effect for the vertical dimension and the current value is49.

10 Right-click and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu to exit theDimension command.

You have created another equation!


11 To see the entire equation, right click in a blank area of the graphicswindow. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, andthen choose Expression. Notice the variable names and formulas appear.Each dimension is assigned a variable based on the order of creation. d0is the first value assigned because 0 is the first integer. In this example,d0 was renamed Width and is a “driving” dimension. The seconddimension retains the original variable name d1 and is “driven” by thedimension named Width.

NOTE The order of creation has no impact on which dimension can be thecontrolling dimension.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 99

NOTE The marking menu appears near the area of the screen on which youright-click. Use this technique to control where a marking menu appears.


Viewing and Editing ParametersYou can assign names to the dimension variables or you can create your ownparameters. You can also create formulas using mathematical expressions. Ifyou do not create an expression at the time you create a dimension, you canuse the parameters dialog box to add or edit equations.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parametersto open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Notice that d0 inside the Model Parameters column is displayed asWidth. The model parameter also shows d1 is equal to the value ofWidth.

NOTE Variables names are case sensitive and no spaces are allowed in thename.

3 Select Done when finished.

TIP You can use algebraic operators in the equation area or in the EditDimension dialog box to create a mathematical formula. Incomplete orinvalid equations display in red.


4 Right-click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose DimensionDisplay from the overflow menu, and then Tolerance to display thedimensions without the parameter names.

5 Finish the sketch using one of the following methods:

■ Select the Finish Sketch command.

■ Right-click in the graphics window, and choose Finish 2D Sketchfrom the marking menu.

■ Click the Return button on the Quick Access toolbar at thetop left of the screen display.

After finishing the sketch, the view automatically rotates to the Home(isometric) view.

6 Create the extrusion.

Click the 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude, or selectExtrude from the marking menu. Click and drag the gold distancearrow manipulator until the value 20 mm appears in the value inputbox. Alternatively, you can enter 20 in the field using the keyboard.

7 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and finish thecommand.

8 Save the file with the name End Cap Back.


Create and Pattern a HoleIn the next section, we will create a hole using offset sketch geometry todetermine hole placement. After we create the hole, we will use the rectangularpattern command to create additional holes.

There are several reasons to use a hole instead of an extrusion with the cutoption:■ Using a Hole command instead of an extrusion with a cut provides more

control over the part feature.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 101

■ The drafting environment contains a hole note command which canassociatively extract all the details of a hole.

To begin:

1 Start a sketch on the part face using one of these methods tostart a new sketch (the second option is the most direct and offers theleast amount of mouse movement).■ On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2D

Sketch, and then select the part face to sketch on.

■ Select the face to sketch on. When the mini-toolbar appears, clickthe third button on the right labeled with the tooltip, CreateSketch.

■ Select the face to sketch on, then right-click and select New Sketchfrom the marking menu.

The edges of the extrusion are copied to the current sketch.


TIP The icons for 2D Sketch and 3D Sketch are similar. They provide twodifferent sketching environments. If you start a 3D sketch, perform an Undoand start a new 2D Sketch.

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Offset.

3 Select one of the edges, then drag it to the inside, and click to place. Alledges highlight and drag. If all the edges do not highlight, right-clickand make sure Loop Select and Constrain Offset are checked in theoverflow menu, then retry the selection.■ Enable Loop Select to allow all planar continuous sketch geometry

to be selected as a group. Disable to select individual edges.

■ Enable Constrain Offset to apply automatic constraints which allowone offset distance to determine the position for the entire selection.Disable to allow each edge to be dimensioned independently.

4 Start the Dimension command. Dimension the offset geometry5 mm away from a feature edge.

5 Place a horizontal and vertical dimension on the two edges of theoffset geometry. The horizontal and vertical dimensions appear inparentheses as reference (driven) dimensions. These dimensions will beused later to extract the spacing in the feature pattern.

NOTE If you receive a warning when you dimension the offset sketchgeometry, choose Accept to create a driven dimension. This messageappears if you did not choose Apply driven dimension in theApplication Options ➤ Sketch tab.

6 Finish the Sketch.

7 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole, or select Holefrom the marking menu. Set the Placement option to From Sketch.Select the lower left vertex in the offset sketch to position the hole.Set the hole diameter to 6 mm and the termination to ThroughAll, then choose OK to create the hole.



The sketch is “consumed” under the hole feature in the browser.

8 To select the 39-mm sketch reference dimensions for the hole patternspacing, they must be visible. Locate the hole feature in the browser,and click + to expand and show the sketch. Right-click the sketch, andchoose Visibility from the context menu.

9

10 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Rectangular. TheFeatures selection arrow is selected. Pick the Hole. If you are viewing thehole in a plan view, it is difficult to select the hole on the part. Rotate


the view slightly in 3D before selecting the hole on the part. You canalso select the hole directly in the Model browser.

IMPORTANT Do NOT select the extruded body, or it will be patterned withthe hole.

11 Pick the Direction 1 arrow, and then choose a horizontal edge to setthe direction. The edge you choose determines the initial direction.

For example, if you choose the lower model or sketch edge, the horizontalpattern direction is to the left. If you choose the upper model or sketchedge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the right.

Use the Flip direction arrow to reverse the direction. Set thecount to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension spacingfield. With the text highlighted, select the horizontal sketch dimensionto use the dimension value for the spacing. Pick the Direction 2 arrow,and then pick a vertical model or sketch edge. Set the count to two, andthen highlight the text in the dimension field. Select the verticalreference dimension to use the dimension value.


12 Click OK to create the pattern. After you create the pattern, right-clickSketch2 in the Model browser, and turn off the sketch Visibility.


Create a Revolved FeatureIn this section, we create a revolved feature using projected model edges.

Projected edges help “anchor” the geometry to the model when no edges areprojected. Use the Revolvecommand to create cylindrical shapes quickly.

1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser, right-click on the YZ Plane,and select New Sketch from the context menu. Turn Visibility on toview the YZ Plane in the graphics screen.

Create a Revolved Feature | 107

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Slice Graphics fromthe overflow menu, or choose F7 to toggle Slice Graphics on and off.

Navigate to a plan view using the ViewCube (use Right, for example.).

3 Select Project Geometry to copy a parallel model edge to thesketch in the center of the part.

4 Start the Line command and begin to sketch a shape. Start witha vertical line from the midpoint of the projected geometry. A green dotindicates the midpoint.


TIP An explicit horizontal line on the lower section of the sketch is notrequired to create a closed shape. Inventor uses Coincident constraints todetermine closed boundaries. If the two vertical lines are attached to theprojected edge of the sketch with Coincident constraints, there is no needto draw the line.

5 Dimension the sketch as shown in the following image. Applya Collinear constraint to the outer vertical edges as shown in thefollowing image. It enables both lines to be controlled by the samedimension. All sketch elements change color to indicate that the sketchis fully constrained.

TIP If the sketch is not fully constrained, one or both of the outside verticallines are probably not attached to the projected line. Apply coincidentconstraints to attach the ends (indicated by the arrows in the followingimage) to the projected line. You can also apply a coincident constraint usinga drag operation to connect elements.


6 Finish the sketch.

7 On the Model tab, select the Revolve command. The closedboundary sketch profile you just completed should already behighlighted. If not, select it. Next, the highlighted axis button in themini-toolbar prompts you to pick an axis to revolve around. Pick thecenter line.


TIP■ If you define the axis line as a centerline, Autodesk Inventor selects

the axis for you. Define the axis as a centerline to dimension thediameter when you dimension from the centerline to an outer edge.

■ To designate the central axis as a sketch centerline, you must be inthe Sketch environment. Select the axis, and then choose the

centerline icon on the Format panel of the Sketch tab.


Finished shape -



Use Save As to Create a PartWe now turn the part into two unique parts.

There are multiple ways to create a part from the existing model. Two commonmethods are:■ Use Save As to create a part containing all the features in an editable state.

■ Create a table driven iPart, and suppress or enable unique features.

Before we create a new unique part, we create the sketch to locate the tappedhole on both parts.

1 Start a new sketch on the top face as shown in the following image.

TIP Use the ViewCube to navigate to the Top view.

Use Save As to Create a Part | 113

2 Create and dimension a line 6 mm from the midpoint of the front edge.Make sure it is either perpendicular to the front edge or parallel to a sideedge.


4 Save the file.

5 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Save As, and name the new part EndCap Front


6 You are now working in the new file, and the origin file End Cap Backhas been closed.

We are now ready to add the unique features to End Cap Front.


Use Work Planes to Terminate a HoleIn this section, we introduce the work axis command. We will use the workaxis and a work plane to simplify creating two intersecting holes.

1 Start the Hole command.

The Placement option From Sketch is active.

2 Select the far end of the 6-mm line for the hole center location. Setthe hole depth to 14 mm.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 115

3 Set the hole type to tapped. Change the thread type to ANSI MetricM Profile. Set the size to 5 and the designation to M5 x 0.8.


4 Click OK to finish the command and create the tapped hole.

5 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab ➤ Work

Features panel ➤ Axis command to display work axis options. Then select Through Center of Circular or Elliptical Edge fromthe Axis drop-down menu. Move your cursor over the tapped hole, andclick to place the Work Axis when you see the preview image of theaxis.

6 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab ➤ WorkFeatures panel ➤ Plane command to display work plane options.

Select Angle to Plane around Edge from the Planedrop-down menu. Pick the front face of the part and the work axis as


shown. Change the Angle in the value input box to 0, and then pickthe green check mark to create the work plane.

7 Start a new sketch on the front face of the revolved shape.

8 Create a vertical line on the center point. Add a 12.5-mm dimensionto the line.

9 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point. Place a center pointat the end of the vertical line to allow the Hole command to detect anduse the Center Point as a hole location. Finish the sketch.


10 Start the Hole command. The Center Point is selected.

11 Set the hole diameter to 4mm. In the Termination drop down, selectTo and then pick the work plane that passes through the tapped holeas the termination location.


12 Click OK to finish the command and create the hole. If you edit thesketch that locates the tapped hole, the work plane and the 4-mm holethat terminates on the plane will reposition.


TIP The cutaway image was created by starting a sketch on the YZ Originplane, then choosing Slice Graphics from the right-click context menu.It is not required for this exercise.



Create a Concentric HoleIt is possible to create holes with no pre-existing sketch. In the next section,we introduce you to alternative hole placement methods.


2 On the Placement drop down menu, select Concentric.

3 The Plane select option is enabled. Choose the front face of thecylindrical shape to define the plane.

4 The Concentric Reference select option is enabled. Choose an edgeof the cylinder to position the hole at the center of the circular face.

5 Set the diameter to 14 mm.

6 Set the Termination option to Through All.


7 Choose OK to create the through hole.

8 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Object Visibilityand then clear the All Workfeatures check box from the drop-downmenu to change the Work Plane and Work Axis display to off.

9 Save the file.


Create a Concentric Hole | 123

Edit the Tapped Hole LocationIn the next series of steps, we edit the sketch to move the tapped hole locationto demonstrate a feature edit and to show the associativity between features.

In this scenario, a change order was submitted stating that the tapped holeon the front cylinder cap must be located in the middle of the part. To begin:

1 Locate the tapped hole in the Model browser. If you did not delete anyholes in the first part of the exercise, it should be named Hole2 in thebrowser.

2 Click + next to the hole feature to expose the sketch beneath the feature.Right-click the sketch, and choose Edit Sketch from the context menu.

TIP You can also choose Edit Sketch with a right-click on the featurewithout exposing the sketch.

3 Double-click the 6-mm dimension to enable the edit box. Change the6-mm dimension to 10 mm.

Notice that when you edit a sketch, the part history is “rolled back” tothe feature state that existed at the time the sketch was created.


4 Exit the sketch. The tapped hole, the work plane, work axis, and 4-mmhole are updated.

5 Save the file and close it.

6 Open the file End Cap Back.


Edit the Tapped Hole Location | 125

Mirror a FeatureWe now add a unique feature to the back cylinder cap. Use the Mirrorcommand to create an identical feature on the opposite side of the part.

Creating a feature and then mirroring it allows symmetrical features to becontrolled by the original feature. When you edit the first instance, themirrored feature automatically updates.


2 In the Hole dialog box, set the Placement to Concentric and the holetype to Counterbore.


■ Set the counterbore diameter to 26 mm.

■ Set the counterbore depth to 6 mm.

■ Set the drill diameter to 10 mm.

■ Set the Termination to Through All.

Mirror a Feature | 127

3 Click the Plane selection arrow in the dialog box, and then select thefront plane of the revolved shape. The hole is previewed and the selectarrow is moved to Concentric Reference.

4 On the model in the graphics window, choose the edge of the revolvedshape to define the concentric edge.


5 Choose OK to create the hole.

6 Start the Hole command. Set the Placement to From Sketch,and select the end of the 6-mm line to locate the hole.

7 In the Hole dialog box.■ Set Hole Type to Drilled.

■ Set Termination to To.

■ Set Hole to Tapped.

■ Set Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile.


■ Set Size to 5.

■ Set Designation to M5 x 0.8.

8 Select the interior of the counterbored hole on the model to define theTo termination, and then click OK to create the hole.


9 Start a sketch on the side of the cylinder block shown in the followingimage.

10 Place a Point, Center Point near the middle of the face, andconstrain it to be horizontal and vertical to the outside edges.



12 Start the Hole command. Set the Placement type to FromSketch.

If there are no other sketches in the model, Autodesk Inventor selectsthe point. If there are other sketches present, pick the point.

13 Set the hole type to Drilled, the hole diameter to 10 mm, and thehole depth to 10 mm.

14 Click OK to create the hole.


15 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror.

16 The feature selection arrow is active. Select the inside of the hole youjust created to add it to the mirror.

17 Change the selection type to Mirror Plane. You can do it in the dialogbox, or you can right-click and choose Continue from the pop-upcontext menu.

18 In the Model browser, under the Origin folder, pick YZ plane to definethe mirror plane.

19 Click OK to mirror the feature.


20 Save and close the file.



Summary

Congratulations! You have successfully completed this tutorial. In this exerciseyou:■ Created a part from a sketch.

■ Used the dimension and constraint commands to control the size andbehavior of the sketch geometry.

■ Used parameters to name and link dimensions.

■ Used feature commands to create solid geometry.

■ Used the pattern command to array features.

■ Saved a copy of a part to create a new part file.

What Next? - This tutorial introduced you to basic part modeling commands.To learn about additional part modeling techniques, such as the use of workfeatures, see the Parts 2 tutorial.

Previous (page 126)

Summary | 135

136

Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore construction techniques to create elements of your model.

New UsersCategory


Start a new part file.Tutorial File Used

6

137

In this tutorial, you build a clamp mounting base using sketch geometry andcommon construction techniques.

Objectives■ Create a work plane that bisects the part to mirror symmetrical features.

■ Create an offset work plane for a new sketch.

■ Create a tangent work plane to locate a hole on a curved face.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Sketch Constraints, Introduction to Direct

Manipulation, and Parts 1 tutorials.

■ Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab:■ Apply driven dimension - Select

■ Edit Dimension when created - Select

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

■ Grid lines – Clear

■ Snap to grid – Clear



Next (page 138)

Create the Mounting Base ProfileIn this exercise, we sketch a rectangle and constrain the lower right corner ofthe first sketch to 0, 0, 0. Constraining a sketch to the origin makes the sketchbehavior predictable and eliminates two degrees of freedom by defining theXY location.

To begin:

1 Start a new mm part. Sketch a rectangle with the lower right-handcorner located at 0,0.


2 Start the Dimension command.

3 Create a horizontal dimension with a value of 160 mm and a verticaldimension with a value of 86 mm. The sketch is fully constrained.

NOTE If the sketch is not fully constrained, make sure that the sketch isconstrained to the Origin.

4 Exit the sketch. Use the Finish Sketch command, the Return command, or right-click and choose Finish Sketch from themarking menu to exit the sketch environment.

5 Start the Extrude command. Extrude the sketch 15 mm.


Create the Mounting Base Profile | 139

Sketch on a Part FaceIn the next step, there are multiple approaches to creating the feature:■ Create an extrusion the entire width of the part, and then cut out the

middle.

■ Create an extrusion the exact depth and then mirror it:


For this exercise, we detail the second technique.

1 Use Direct Manipulation to start a new sketch on the side of thepart. Click the face indicated. When the mini-toolbar appears, select thethird button on the right, Create Sketch.

Sketch on a Part Face | 141

2 Create and dimension the sketch profile geometry as shown. You do nothave to draw the bottom horizontal line if you connect the line endpointsto the projected geometry. As you dimension the profile, keep in mindthat the 53 mm dimension is from the bottom projected edge as shownin the image.


4 Extrude the profile 18 mm. Use the Direction 2 button onthe mini-toolbar to extrude the profile to the interior of the part.


TIP The default direction for extrude/join is away from existing material.The default direction for extrude/cut is towards existing material. It is goodidea to view a model in a 3D view before you extrude a profile to visualizethe direction. If you make a mistake and extrude a profile to the wrong side,use Edit Feature and flip the direction.

5 Use Direct Manipulation to start the Fillet command. Click theedge indicated and select Create Fillet from the mini-toolbar. Drag thedistance arrow manipulator to add an 8-mm radius to the edge,or enter 8 in the value input box.

Sketch on a Part Face | 143

6 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

7 Start the Hole command.■ Set the Placement option to Concentric.

■ Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■ Set the hole diameter to 11 mm and the Termination to ThroughAll

Select OK to create the hole.



Symmetrical and Offset Work PlanesIn the next section, we allow Autodesk Inventor to place a plane in the middleof the part. This technique is useful because it does not require any dimensionsor edits to maintain the position. If the width of the part is edited, the planestays centered.

We will then create an offset work plane to use as the location of a newsketched feature.

1 Select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from thePlane drop-down menu. To create a work plane that bisects the part,pick the face with the new feature and then the parallel face on theopposite side of the part. A work plane is created in the middle of thepart.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 145


NOTE The initial size of a work plane is determined by the size of the existingfeatures. To resize a work plane, first select the corner, then drag the cornerwhen the resize symbol appears.

2 Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion, the fillet, andthe through hole as the features to mirror.

TIP You can select the features on the part or in the Model browser.


3 When you finish selecting the features, choose the Mirror Planeselection arrow in the dialog box. You can also right-click and chooseContinue from the context menu to change the selection arrow. Selectthe work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.Click the OK button to create the mirrored features and terminate theMirror command.

4 Select Offset from Plane from the Plane drop-down menu.

Steps 4-6 create a work plane that is parallel to the center plane andoffset a specific distance.


5 Select the center work plane, and drag the new work plane towards youusing the distance arrow manipulator. The Offset value input boxdisplays with a numeric value in it as you drag (if not, clear all selectionsand restart the command, then try again).

6 Enter 30 mm in the Offset value input box to specify the exact distancefrom the center plane.

7 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

8 Start a new sketch on the offset work plane. (Select the edge ofthe work plane and click Create Sketch from the contextualmini-toolbar.)

NOTE When you select a work plane for a new sketch, no geometry isprojected to “lock” the sketch to the part. Project model edges to obtaingeometry for connecting the sketch.


9 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the front edgeas shown to project it to the sketch plane, and then sketch and dimensionthe profile shown. Be sure to select the bottom edge of the part whencreating the 25 mm dimension.



11 Extrude the profile 14 mm towards the interior of the part. Usethe Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to change the orientationbefore selecting OK.

12 Start the Hole command.■ Set the Placement option to Concentric.

■ Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■ Set the hole diameter to 8mm and the Termination to ThroughAll

13 Select OK to create the hole.


14 Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion and thethrough-hole as the features to mirror. Select the work plane in the centerof the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.

We now create two chamfers on the front of the base to create a smallerfootprint for the front of the base. To determine the chamfer distance,we use the Measure Distance command to extract the distance betweenthe two planes.

15 Start the Measure Distance command. You will find thiscommand in the marking menu, or on the Measure panel of the Toolstab. Select the plane on the outside of the part and the plane on thefront face of the small mounting tab. The distance between the two facesdisplays as 13 mm. We will use this distance to create a chamfer thatterminates at the edge of this feature and the edge of the mirrored copy.


16 Start the Chamfer command. Select the Two Distances optionfrom the fly-out button on the mini-toolbar.

17 In the left value input box in the mini-toolbar, enter a value of 13 mmfor Distance 1, and a value of 40 mm for Distance 2 in the right valueinput box. Click the Edges button and select the vertical edge on theoutside of the part. If your preview image does not look like the previewin the following image, reverse the values for the distance input, or usethe flip direction arrow to reverse the reference face.


18 Click the green Apply button (+) to create the chamfer and stay in theChamfer command. Select the opposite outside edge to create the


second chamfer. Reverse the input values, or use the flip directionbutton to achieve the desired results.

In the next exercise, we create a tapped hole for a set screw on a curved face.To do this, we create a work plane that is tangent to the curve and parallel tothe base.


Create a Tangent Work PlaneIn this section, we create a work plane on a curved surface to provide a flatarea for a 2D sketch. We use projected geometry to assist in accurately placinghole location geometry.

1 Right-click the XY Plane in the Origin folder, and check the Visibilityoption to turn it on.

NOTE As you become a more advanced user, you might prefer to controlglobally the visibility of Work Geometry, Sketches, and more by using anObject Visibility filter in the View tab. If you switch the visibility offusing these controls, right-click a work plane, other work feature, or sketchand note that the visibility is enabled but the feature is off. To enable it,switch the visibility to on in the Object Visibility area.

2 Select Tangent to Surface and Parallel to Plane from thePlane drop-down menu. Select the edge of the XY Plane and thetangent face of the curved surface to create the work plane.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 155

3 Start a new sketch on the work plane.

4 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the two edgesof the mounting tab as shown in the following image to project themto the sketch plane. Repeat this process for the other tab before leavingthe Project Geometry command.

5 Start the Line command, and draw a line from the midpoint ofone line to the midpoint of the other line. Repeat this process for othertab.

6 Place a Point, Center Point at the midpoint of each line to locatethe hole in the middle of the mounting tab. These points also allow theHole command to detect them for hole placement.



8 Start the Hole command. The Placement option defaults toFrom Sketch because Autodesk Inventor detects that an unconsumedsketch is present. Autodesk Inventor detects the hole centers and selectsthem for the hole location.

TIP Autodesk Inventor automatically selects hole locations from sketch pointsif no other unconsumed sketch exists.

9 Select the Tapped Hole option. Set the Thread Type to ANSI MetricM Profile, the Size to 6, and the Designation to M6x1.


10 Select To in the Termination option to terminate the tapped holes onthe center holes.

11 Select an inside face of one of the existing holes to satisfy the terminationselection. Make sure the check box in the dialog box is selected as shownhere, or the operation fails. Click the OK button to create the holes andexit the Hole command.




Add the Base Mounting HolesWe are almost done. We now create the mounting holes to secure the base.Make sure that the work plane in the middle of the part is visible.

1 Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

2 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the work planein the middle of the part to project the work plane as a line to the currentsketch.

3 Place two points (Point, Center Point) vertically in-line witheach other.

4 Place a vertical constraint between the two points to align them.

5 Add a 16-mm dimension from the center of the base to theupper center point.

6 Dimension the overall distance between the two points. Pickthe two center points. Instead of adding a number for the overall distance,clear the value in the dialog box. Then, select the 16-mm dimension toadd the dimension variable to the dialog box. Enter the multiplicationoperator *, and then the number 2.

NOTE The dimension variables in your sketch may differ from the numberspresented in the following image. If they do, it does not affect the exercise.

7 Add a 33-mm dimension from the front edge of the part to oneof the center points.



9 Start the Hole command. Place two through holes of 11 mmeach on the center points.

10 Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 161

11 Start the Line command. Create a line from the mid-point ofthe back edge of the base towards the middle of the part.

12 Add a dimension of 16 mm to the line.


In the remaining steps, we create a counterbore clearance hole for a hexhead bolt from a look up table.

14 Start the Hole command. Pick the endpoint of the line to specifythe hole location.


15 Select the counterbore hole with the clearance hole option as shown inthe following image. The system determines the proper counterbore sizefor the fastener you specify.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 163

16 Select the fastener parameters listed in the image, and then click OK tocreate the hole.

17 Save the file.

You have successfully completed this exercise!


SummaryThe completed part with all work features turned off.

In this tutorial, you created a:■ Part from a sketch.

■ Symmetrical work plane in the middle of the part.

■ Planar parallel offset work plane.

■ Tangent work plane.

■ Tapped hole on a cylinder.


■ Counterbore and clearance hole from a look-up table for a specifiedfastener.

You used the mirror command to duplicate symmetrical features, and projectedgeometry from existing features to a sketch.

Previous (page 160)

Summary | 165

166

Assemblies 7

167

About this tutorial

168 | Chapter 7 Assemblies

Insert and position components in the Assembly environment.

New UsersCategory


Cylinder Base.ipt, Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, Clamp Sketch.ipt,Long Shaft.ipt, Short Shaft.ipt, Lock Pin.ipt, 6mm SHCS.ipt.

Tutorial FilesUsed


An assembly is a collection of components constrained to each other. Thisexercise introduces workflows you can use to insert and precisely positioncomponents relative to each other.

Objectives

The goal of the tutorial is to introduce techniques you can use to position andanalyze the movement of components. Some of the topics covered are:■ Assembly constraints

■ Contact sets

■ Flexible assemblies

■ Analyze interference

■ Insert components

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various

view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketchingand extruding.




Next (page 170)

About this tutorial | 169



Create the AssemblyTo begin, create the top-level assembly.

1 Set you active project to tutorial_files.

2 Start a new Standard (mm) assembly.

3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place , or right-click and choose Place Component from the contextmenu.

4 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤ Cylinder Base.ipt and choose Open. Thecomponent is placed in the assembly.

NOTE By default, you can place multiple copies. If you click in the graphicswindow, you will place place two copies. If you accidentally placed twocopies remove one before proceeding.

5 Right-click, and select Done, or press ESC to exit the command.

6 Orient the view as shown in the following image. Set the view as theHome view. Make sure Work Plane1 in the center of the base is visible.

TIP If necessary, expand the list under Cylinder Base in the browser,right-click Work Plane1, and turn on Visibility.


7 Save the file with the name Cyl_Clamp.iam.


Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a SolidIn a top down workflow, create a part or subassembly in the assembly usingCreate Component. At the prompt to select the sketch plane, select anorigin plane, a work plane, or part face. This pick establishes the coordinatesystem for the new component. In the Create In-Place Component dialogbox, the option Constrain sketch plane to the selected face or planeis enabled by default. This option applies a Flush constraint between the newcomponent and the selected face or plane. Clear the check mark to apply noinitial constraint.

The following are some of the advantages to creating a part in the assembly:■ Use a top-down workflow to design a component in place.

■ Project edges from other components to a part sketch.

■ Measure clearance space for the component envelope.

To create a part in the assembly, start the Create Component command,follow the steps described previously, and use the provided clamp sketch asa guide.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 171

To save time, insert a 2D part in the assembly. Apply assembly constraints toposition the 2D sketch on the base. Then extrude the sketch into a solid.

1 Start Place Component.

2 Place one copy of Clamp Sketch.ipt, and stay in the PlaceComponent command.

3 While still in the the Place Component command, move the cursorover the edge of the sketch circle.

In the graphics window:

■ The entire Clamp Sketch highlights.

■ A copy of the Clamp Sketch moves with your cursor.

■ A tooltip prompts you to make a second selection.

When the axis displays, select the circle, as shown in the following image.A mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphicswindow.


4 To select an axis, move the cursor over the inside of the hole on thebase. When the axis preview displays, select inside the hole, as shownin the following image. Do not select the edge of the hole when a greendot appears. The dot is a point constraint, and does not result in an axisto axis constraint.


The copy of the Clamp Sketch is attached to the Cylinder Base, and themini-toolbar moves to the area where you clicked.

5 Click OK to create the constraint.

Hold the left mouse button down as you select the 2D sketch, and thenpush or pull on the geometry. The movement is limited to the axis youdefined.

6 In the browser, under Clamp Sketch, expand the Origin folder,right-click the XY Plane, and turn on Visibility

7 Start the Assemble command. The mini-toolbar displays in the upperleft-hand corner of the graphics window.

8 On the clamp sketch, select the XY Plane to satisfy the first pick.

9 Select the work plane in the center of the base, as shown in the followingimage.


The mate constraint displays in the preview.

10 On the mini-toolbar, click Constraint Type, and select Mate-Flush.Click the green OK button to apply the constraint and close themini-toolbar.

The following image shows the correct Mate/Flush solution on the left.The solution on the right is the result of a Mate/Mate. If you made amistake, you can edit the constraint and apply the correct solution. Inthis case, the correct selection was specified for you. In the future, usethe preview to help you decide whether to apply a Mate/Mate or aMate/Flush constraint between two planes.


11 Click the Clamp Sketch, and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the2D sketch. The part still has one degree of rotational freedom. Allungrounded components initially have six degrees of freedom: threetranslational (linear X, Y, and Z), and three rotational (rotational X,Y,and Z).

12 Click View tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Degrees of Freedom. Arotational arrow on the Clamp Sketch indicates the part still hasrotational freedom. Select the Degrees of Freedom command againto turn it off.

13 Save the file as Cylinder_Main.iam.


Create a Contact SetAdd a contact set to an assembly and then set limits on the motion. Use acontact set to stop movement when bodies collide, as they would in thephysical world. To avoid slow calculation time, limit the number ofcomponents in a contact set to only the components necessary.

1 Open the file Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, located in \TutorialFiles\Cylinder Clamp.

2 Use the left mouse button to click and drag the blue shaft on theassembly. The shaft can move in a linear and rotational direction. Youcan also pull the piston and shaft completely out of the body. The linear


and rotational freedom is intentional so that the piston can move in ahigher-level assembly.

Before proceeding, use Undo to restore the piston to the position it wasin when you opened the file.

3 On the ribbon, click Inspect tab ➤ Interference panel ➤

Activate Contact Solver. The command activates, but no componentsbelong to the contact set yet.

4 In the browser, right-click each of the following components, or in thegraphics area right-click the components. Enable Contact Set in thecontext menu.■ Cylinder Head Cover_Front

■ Cylinder Head Cover_Back

■ Piston

5 Push and pull on the piston shaft. The piston body movement is limitedby the physical contact with the front and back cylinder heads.

NOTE Rapid mouse movement allows the piston to pass through the cylindercover bodies. This intentional behavior enables you to move contact setmembers in or out of a closed body.

6 Pull the piston to the end of its stroke. In the Interference panel, clickActivate Contact Solver again to deactivate it.

7 Right-click the Cylinder Body and clear Enabled to make it easier toselect internal parts.

When you turn off Enabled, a component displays transparently forreference, and you cannot select it. A component that is not enabledappears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, right-click thecomponent in the browser, and click Enabled.

8 Start the Constraint command. In the dialog box, do not change anysettings.

9 Click the end face of the Cylinder Head Cover- Back, as shown in thefollowing image.

Create a Contact Set | 177

10 Rotate the assembly or use Select Other to select the back face of thePiston, as shown in the previous image.

11 Click More, and specify the following:

Maximum: 35mm

Minimum: 0

12 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box.

Drag the piston rod. The piston stops at either end.

13 In the browser, right-click the cylinder body and select Enabled.

Experiment with Limits settings to change the range of motion. In the browser,edit the constraint. Expand the Piston, right-click the last Mate constraint,and select Edit. If you click Use Offset As The Resting Position, you can entera default value for the piston position. If you drag the piston and let go, itsnaps back to the resting position.



Insert and Constrain a SubassemblyConstrain the piston to the Base and the 2D sketch part. The next portion ofthe exercise assumes Cylinder_Main.iam and Cylinder BodySub_Assy.iam are both open.

1 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

2 Click inside the window containing Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.

3 Click and drag the assembly icon from the browser to theCylinder_Main window. The subassembly is inserted in the mainassembly without using the Place Component command.

4 Save and Close the subassembly file.

5 Maximize the window containing the main assembly.

6 Start the Constrain command.

7 Apply a Mate axis/axis constraint between the 2D sketch and the holein the piston rod, as shown in the following image.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 179

When the subassembly is open in a separate window, the piston is freeto move. When you insert the subassembly in the upper level assembly,the free movement is disabled. To finish constraining the subassemblyin the main assembly, you must enable the freedom to move in theupper-level assembly. If the piston is not free to spin, the subassemblycannot rotate into the correct position.

8 Locate Cylinder Body Sub_Assy in the browser.

9 Right-click the subassembly, and select Flexible in the context menu.It activates the freedom of movement that was present in the subassemblyin the upper level assembly.

The subassembly icon in the browser changes to indicate that Flexiblestatus is active.


On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Position panel ➤ Rotate tomove the subassembly until the tapped holes in cylinder end caps arefacing up, as shown in the following image. Right-click, and select Done.

Unlike a view rotation, this command physically rotates a componentin space. If you take the time to orient components relative to each otherbefore you apply constraints, the constraints behave more predictablywhen applied.


10 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default settings.

11 In the browser, expand Cylinder Base and Cylinder Body Sub_Assyto expose the browser tree. Expand the Origin folder in Cylinder BodySub_Assy.

12 Select Work Plane1 under Cylinder Base and YZ Plane in theOrigin folder under Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to apply a Mateplane/plane constraint.


If the subassembly turns inside-out, drag it toward the back of the baseto correct the orientation as shown in the following image. Theconstraints you applied limit the movement.

13 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default options.

14 Select the center of each of the holes indicated in the following imageto place a Mate axis/axis constraint.


15 Drag the 2D sketch part to check the motion of your digital prototype.



Edit a Part in an AssemblyIn this section, we will finish creating the 2D hinge clamp without leavingthe assembly. The edit-in-place workflow allows you to project edges fromother components into a sketch if necessary. You can also measure the availableclearance before creating a solid.

We will then check the part for interference in the required range of motion.

To get started, drag the piston rod or the 2D sketch until the 2D sketch isin a near vertical orientation, as shown in the following image.

1 Right-click the part Clamp Sketch in the browser and select Edit fromthe pop-up context menu, or right-click the 2D sketch in the graphicswindow and select Edit Component from the marking menu. You canalso double-click the sketch or the part file in the browser to start anedit-in-place operation. Do not choose Open; if you do, the part fileopens in a separate window.

The inactive assembly components appear transparent.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 185

2 Start the Extrude command. Enter a distance of 32 mm. Use thesymmetrical in both directions option. Click OK to create the extrusion.


3 To remove material from the solid to allow clearance for the piston, starta new 2D sketch on the front face of the clamp as shown in thefollowing image.


4 Project the geometry at the top of the extrusion to the sketch, as shownin the following image.

5 Sketch a rectangle that is coincident with the projected line, as shownin the following image.

6 Create a vertical constraint between the two edges indicated.

NOTE If your geometry does not match the following image after applyingthe constraint, undo and apply a horizontal constraint.

7 Add a 16-mm horizontal dimension and a 3-mm vertical dimension,as shown in the following image.



9 Start the Extrude command. Cut the profile through the part. Use theAll option.


10 Click OK to create the extrusion.

11 Click the Return command, or right-click and select FinishEdit to return to the assembly environment.

12 On the ribbon, enable the Inspect tab ➤ Interference panel ➤

Activate Contact Solver command.

13 Move the clamp forward until the piston touches the front-end cap.

14 Choose Analyze Interference. Select the piston rod to defineset 1. Select the clamp to define set 2. Click OK to check for interference.

A small interference is detected where the piston rod passes through thecut in the clamp.


15 To remove the interference, double-click the clamp hinge to initiate anedit-in-place operation. In the part browser, edit the sketch underExtrusion4, and increase the vertical dimension from 3 mm to 6 mm.Update the part, and return to the assembly. Check for interferenceagain. The interference has been resolved.

16 Save the assembly file and other components if prompted.


Constrain Cylindrical ComponentsIt is best to limit the number of constraints you use to position components.For example, if two components have face-to-face contact, then apply a singleMate constraint to the faces rather than using two Mate constraints on edges.Each constraint you add contributes to file size and complexity.

TIP Consider using Grip Snaps to position components and then ground them ifyou work with large assemblies and the components do not need to move.

The following section details the steps to minimally and fully constraincylindrical components in an assembly.

1 Start the Place Component command.

2 Place one copy of Long Shaft.ipt, and apply these constraints.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 191

3 Right-click, then choose Repeat Place and place one copy of ShortShaft.ipt. Right-click and select Done when finished.

4 Start the Constrain command, and useMate/Mate (the default) to constrain the axis of the long shaft to theaxis of the lower hole.

5 Choose Apply to place the constraint.

6 Constrain the axis of the short shaft to the axis of the upper hole, asshown in the following image.


8 Change the constraint type to Mate/Flush.

9 Select the planar face of the base mounting tab first, and then select theplanar face at the end of the long shaft. Enter 5 mm for the offset value.Notice that the face selection color matches the color of the selectionarrow order. The first selection is blue and the second selection is green.This can help you troubleshoot constraints as you use Autodesk Inventor.


NOTE If you pick the faces in the reverse order, enter a value of -5 mm.

10 Select Apply to place the constraint and stay in the dialog box to placeanother Mate/Flush constraint.

11 Pick the planar face of the clamp, and then pick the planar face at theend of the short shaft. Enter an offset value of 4mm, and then click OKto finish the command.

The long and short shafts should appear symmetrically constrained asshown in the following image. The shafts are still free to rotate, but theconstraints that fix their position relative to the other components arein place.


In the next segment, we will place and position the two cylindrical lock pins.We will position them in the hole so the flat surface of the pin faces the tappedhole. In this case, we do not want the cylinder to rotate.

1 Start the Place Component command, and place two instances ofLock Pin.ipt.


2 Select the Cylinder Base component. Right-click, and select Visibilityin the context menu to switch off the visibility .

3 Place a Mate/Mate constraint to align each of the lock pins axially tothe holes in the end of the Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. The long sectionshould face towards the middle on both lock pins, with the flat areafacing up as shown in the following image.

TIP Use the Rotate command to re-align the pins if they are constrainedaxially, but the long section is facing out. After rotating, use Update torecalculate the axial constraint in the new position.


4 Select the Cylinder Base in the browser. Right-click, and selectVisibility to re-enable the component visibility.

To align the center of the flat area on the lock pin with the tapped holein the base, we will create a work axis on the lock pin.

5 Double-click one of the lock pin instances, or right-click and chooseEditComponent from the marking menu to initiate an edit-in-placeoperation.

6 On the View tab ➤ Visibility panel, select Object Visibility andensure that All Workfeatures is enabled to view the work geometry.

7 On the 3D Model tab ➤ Work Features panel, select Work Axis.

8 Select Work Plane1 and the XZ Plane in the Origin folder of theLock Pin to create a Work Axis in the middle of the flat cutout. A workaxis should appear in the center of the flat section, as shown in thefollowing image.


9 Right-click, and choose Finish Edit from the marking menu.Alternatively, choose the Return command on the 3D Model tab tofinish the local edit and return to the assembly.

10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate constraintbetween the new work axis and the axis in the center of the tapped hole.


12 Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the two axes on the remaininglock pin to position the pin in the hole.


13 Click OK to apply the constraint and exit the dialog box. The lock pinsare fully constrained in alignment with the tapped holes.

14 Save the file.

In the following image depicting the Cylinder Base, Enabled is toggled off,while Visibility is not. If a component is not enabled, it remains visible ina transparent state, but it is not selectable. A component that is not enabledappears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, select the componentin the browser, and choose Enabled in the context menu.


Add the HardwareThe assembly is nearly complete. We will now finish placing the componentsnecessary to create an accurate Bill of Materials and Parts List.

This section of the exercise assumes that you have Content Center installedand available. If Content Center is not available, the required hardware to


finish the assembly is furnished in the tutorial directory. The steps listed inthe following section do not detail the workflow to place the circlips withoutContent Center.

The Content Center allows you to place a component, adjust the size to matchthe target, and constrain it in a few picks. The target edge for the circlip wewill place in the next section is the inside edge noted in the following image.

1 On the Assemble tab ➤ Component panel, choose the drop-downarrow under Place to access the Place from Content Centercommand. You can also right-click in the graphics screen and select thecommand from the context menu.

2 Expand the section titled Shaft Parts.

3 Expand the sub-section titled Circlips, and select External.

Add the Hardware | 199

4 Select ANSI B 27.7M in the dialog box, and then choose OK. A previewof the component appears in the graphics window attached to the cursor.The question mark in the preview image indicates that the clip can beautomatically resized using AutoDrop.

5 Move your cursor over the inside edge of the groove, and wait for thecomponent to resize automatically. Click the edge when the componentis the proper size, and then click the check mark in the AutoDrop dialogbox to place and constrain the component.


6 Repeat to place the remaining circlips. Choose Done from the contextmenu when finished. There should be four instances of ANSI B 27.7N3AMI-7 in the browser.

7 Start the Place Component command.

8 Place two copies of 6mm SHCS.ipt in the assembly.

9 Rotate the components, if necessary, to position the hex opening up asshown in the following image.


10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate between thecenterline of the fastener and the centerline of the hole.

11 Choose Apply, and repeat for the other fastener. Click OK to apply theconstraint and finish the command.

12 Turn off the Visibility of the Cylinder Base.

13 Start the Constrain command. Place a Mate/Mate constraint betweenthe planar face at the bottom of the fastener and the planar face of thecutout in the lock pin.


14 Choose Apply and repeat for the other side.

15 Choose OK to finish.

16 Turn on the Visibility of the Cylinder Base.

17 Save the file.



Summary

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you:■ Placed components in an assembly.

■ Applied assembly constraints.

■ Edited parts from the assembly environment.

■ Created and used Contact Sets.

■ Enabled the Flexible state on a lower level subassembly.

■ Used interference detection.

■ Placed components using the Content Center library with AutoDrop.


What Next? Try the Drawings tutorial to learn how to document parts andassemblies using the drafting and view layout commands.

Previous (page 198)

Summary | 205

206

Drawings

About this tutorialPrepare final drawings of your models.

New UsersCategory


hinge.idwhinge.ipt

Tutorial FilesUsed

Cylinder Clamp.idw

NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions atht-tp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial datasets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasetsas instructed.

It is likely that Archimedes created engineering drawings as early as 260 BC andda Vinci documented his designs in the 1500s using drawings. Although thecommon blueprint (in use since 1842) has faded from use, 3D digital prototypesare still documented using drawings. Often these drawings are for those peopleresponsible for manufacturing. Digital drawing files today follow the standardsdefined for paper drawings. The creation of a design drawing remains theultimate goal for a majority of engineers and designers.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Parts 2and Assemblies tutorials.

8

207



■ Understand the basics of the technical drawing process and industrystandards, such as ANSI, ISO, and so on.

■ Understand the material covered in the Help topic “Getting Started.”

■ Click Application Options on the Options panel of the Tools tab. Onthe Application Options dialog box, click the Drawing tab and uncheckthe option Edit dimension when created.



Next (page 208)

Get Started1 Open hinge.idw,located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp.

This file contains a simple, two sheet drawing that you can refer to duringthe tutorial. Sheet:1 of the drawing contains four views of the part you

208 | Chapter 8 Drawings

will detail during the first part of this tutorial. Sheet:2 shows how thedrawing would look after the addition of a section view, dimensions,and annotation.

2 To view Sheet:2, double-click the Sheet:2 node in the browser.

NOTE Although you can add sheets to any drawing you create, you do not typicallyadd sheets containing the same views shown on other sheets. The second sheetin the supplied drawing is simply an easy way to reference incremental progressfor this tutorial.

You can leave this drawing open as you continue with the tutorial.

In the next several steps, you will select a template to begin a new drawingand add front, left-side, top and isometric views to the drawing sheet.


Create a Drawing1 Click New on the Application Menu.

2 Click the Metric tab, and then select ISO.idw.

3 Click OK.

Create a Drawing | 209

Autodesk Inventor opens an empty A3 drawing sheet with a genericborder and title block. In the remaining steps, you place four views likethe views you saw on Sheet:1 of the already open drawing.

4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base.

5 To specify a model, in the Drawing View dialog box, click Open an

existing file.

6 Select hinge.ipt, and click Open.

7 Click a location on your sheet for your front view. Leave space betweenthe view boundaries and the drawing border to allow for additional viewand dimension placement.

NOTE Before you place the base view, you can use options on the DrawingView dialog box to specify the base view properties. For this tutorial, youaccept the system default values.



View ProjectionAfter you place a base view, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel

➤ Projected command is activated by default.

To understand your view projection options, move your cursor in a circlearound the front view boundary without clicking. Notice that AutodeskInventor previews eight different projected views.

1 Click below your front view to place a top view. Notice that a temporaryrectangle is placed, indicating the intended location of the new view.

2 Click to the right of your front view to place a left side view. Anothertemporary rectangle is placed.

3 Click below your front view and to the right of your top view. Atemporary rectangle is placed for an isometric view.

4 Right click, and select Create. The three projected views that youpositioned are now created.

NOTE The ISO drafting standard specifies first-angle projection. The ANSI draftingstandard specifies third-angle projection. Views are projected according to thestandard specified by the template used to create drawings. Autodesk Inventorsupplies templates for standards accepted world-wide. The supplied standards canbe modified to suit your requirements.

View Projection | 211

Approximate layout of current drawing sheet with one base view and threeprojected views. Moving views is easy, if necessary. Just click and drag adrawing view while the red dotted view boundary displays. Dependent viewswill position relative to the parent view.

At this point, you would likely begin adding dimensions to a simple part.However, for this part, add a section view.


Add a Section View1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section

.

The Status Bar at the bottom left of the display screen prompts youto: Select a view or view sketch.

2 Click the left side view located to the right of the front or base view onyour drawing sheet.

You are prompted to enter the endpoints of the section line. Draw avertical line that starts above the view geometry, extends below the viewgeometry, and passes through the middle of the part.


3 To find the middle of the part, slowly move your cursor over the top-mostline in the center portion of the part. When you reach the middle ofthat line, the cursor displays a green ball. Do not click yet!

4 Move your cursor slowly above the drawing view.

Add a Section View | 213

As you move upwards, notice the dotted line extending from your cursorto the middle of the part. This dotted line lets you know that you arealigned with the midpoint of the line that was located under the greenball. If you move too far to the right or the left as you move upwards,you are no longer aligned to that point, and the dotted line disappears.

5 With the dotted vertical line visible, click to select the top-most pointof the section line.

6 Move your cursor straight down below the view. Your cursor indicatesthat the line is perpendicular to the part edge.


7 While the perpendicular icon displays next to your cursor, click to selectthe end point of the section line.

8 Right-click, and select Continue. The Section View dialog box appearsoffering various options for defining, identifying, and scaling the sectionview. For this exercise, accept the default settings.

9 Move your cursor to the left of the front view, and click to place thesection view and close the Section View dialog box.

Add a Section View | 215

During the creation of a section view, you can use Inventor ability toinfer geometric relationships while you sketch your section line. In thisexample, you used a single, straight line. In other more complex cases,you will use a multi-segment line that passes through key points ofmultiple features.

A section view is created, and a label is positioned that identifies theview and indicates the view scale. This view label is optional and can berepositioned and edited after placement as required.

10 Move your cursor over the view label. When the label text changes tored, click and drag the label away from the view geometry to allow roomfor dimensions.

You will now place dimensions and other annotation on your drawing.



Place Centerlines and Center Marks1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤ Centerline

.

2 Move your cursor over the center of the upper left hole in the sectionview. When the green-filled circle appears, indicating that you are directlyover the center point, click to select the first point of your centerline.

TIP After clicking on the Centerline command, you can optionally clickto select the circle first. You can then more easily select the circle center witha second click.

3 Move your mouse to the right until you are over the center of theupper-right hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears,click to select the endpoint of your centerline.

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 217

4 Right-click to display the context menu.

5 Select Create to complete the placement of the centerline.

6 Repeat steps 2-5 to place a similar centerline between these same twoholes in the front view.

7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤ Center Mark .

8 Move your cursor over the center of the cylindrical feature in the lowerright of the section view. When the green-filled circle appears (to indicatethat you are directly over the center point) click to place a center mark.

9 Repeat the previous step to place a center mark on the inside cylindricalradius and on these same locations in the front view.


With centerlines and center marks in place, it is time to place dimensions.


Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 219

Place Dimensions

In this exercise, we use the general Dimension command. Autodesk Inventoralso provides some unique dimensioning commands that are not covered inthis tutorial. As you proceed, you may decide that a dimension (or otherannotation) you placed is unsatisfactory. To delete a dimension or annotationthat has already been placed, select the Undo command from the Quick Accesstoolbar. You can also select the dimension and press Del, or right-click andselect Delete from the displayed context menu.


NOTE The following steps assume that you canceled the Edit dimension whencreated selection on the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog boxas instructed in the Prerequisites for this tutorial. If you did not, you will see anEdit dialog box displayed after clicking to place each dimension. You can continuethis tutorial without changing the default settings by always clicking OK whenthis dialog box displays. However, we recommend that you change the default.

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel

➤ Dimension .

2 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center markon the left-most hole in the section view.

3 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent ofyour dimension.

4 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center markon the right-most hole in the section view.

5 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the right extent ofyour dimension.

Place Dimensions | 221

6 Notice that as you move your cursor, the dimension extension linesadjust. Click to position your dimension.

Although you placed a single dimension, the Dimension command isstill active.

7 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical center markon the left-most hole in the section view.


8 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent ofyour dimension.

9 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical linerepresenting the cut material.

10 To select the right extent of your dimension, click when the linehighlights and the green-filled circle appears.


11 Move your cursor to select a position, and then click to place the 16-mmdimension.


12 Continue to place horizontal and vertical dimensions on the section,front, left, and top views. Click the Esc key to terminate the dimensioncommand.

13 After placing several dimensions, you may decide that you would liketo move a dimension. With no command active, move your cursor overa dimension value that you would like to move. When the dimensionhighlights, click and drag the dimension value (up/down or left/right)to new location. You can also click and drag any of the green-filled circleedit handles to make other dimension edits.



Place Angular Dimensions1 The general Dimension command is also used to place angular

dimensions. On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Dimension.

2 Move your cursor over the angled line in the front view. When the linehighlights, click to select the first side of the angle that you wish todimension. For this selection, you do not have to locate a key point onthe line. No green-filled circles must be located that infer the selectionof the line midpoint or endpoint.


3 Move your cursor over the bottom horizontal line. When the linehighlights, click to select the second side of the angle that you want todimension. Notice that the icon near the cursor indicates that yourselection will create an angle dimension.

4 To understand your dimension options, drag your cursor in a circle andnotice that you can place your angle dimension in one of four quadrantsdefined by the intersection of the two lines that you selected.

Place Angular Dimensions | 227

5 Click to place your angle dimension in the quadrant shown.



Radial and Reference Dimensions1 The general Dimension command (which should still be active) is also

used to place radial dimensions. Move your cursor over the right-mostarc in the front view. Click when the arc geometry highlights.

2 Drag your cursor to place the radial dimension.

3 Move your cursor over the left-most arc in the front view. Move yourcursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears at the 270-degreeposition. It indicates that you located the left-most quadrant key point.Click to select the left-most point of what will be an overall referencedimension.

CAUTION: The midpoint of the arc segment also displays a green-filledcircle at approximately 290 degrees. Selecting the arc segment midpointwill not produce the appropriate dimension.

Radial and Reference Dimensions | 229

4 Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Move yourcursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears to indicate thatyou located the right-most quadrant key point. Click to select theright-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension.

5 Drag your cursor to place the overall dimension.


TIP Dimensions, centerlines, and center marks can also be placed for holesand other features in isometric views.


Add a Hole Note1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Feature Notes panel ➤ Hole

and Thread .

2 Move your cursor near the 10 o’clock position of the left-most hole inyour front view, and click to select the arrow location of your hole callout.

Add a Hole Note | 231

3 Drag your cursor to position the leader and dimension for your holecallout. Click to finalize the placement.

Your drawing should now appear like Sheet:2 on the previously openedhinge.idw. Before you continue by working within a partially completeassembly drawing, save your drawing.

4 With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Applicationmenu.

5 Type a name for your drawing in the File name field of the Save asdialog box.


6 Click Save. By default, your drawing is saved in the Inventor IDWdrawing format.

If you routinely work with or send drawings to individuals using AutoCAD,consider saving your drawing in the DWG format.■ With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application

Menu.

■ Click the selection arrow on the Save as type field on the Save As dialogbox.

■ Select Inventor drawing files (*.dwg) from the drop-down list.

■ You may want to change the name of the saved drawing or the locationwhere you will save DWG files, but for this tutorial, simply click Save.

7 From the Application Menu, click Close All.

Open an Assembly DrawingIn the next portion of the tutorial, you add a parts list, balloons, and notesto an assembly drawing. Assembly drawing views and dimensions are createdand placed using the same steps that you just completed. They are not repeatedin the remaining portion of the tutorial.

1 Click Open on the Application Menu.

2 Select Cylinder Clamp.idw in the Open dialog box, and click Open.

A single sheet drawing opens that has three orthographic views and oneisometric view of the cylinder clamp assembly used in the Parts 2 andAssemblies tutorials.

Open an Assembly Drawing | 233

Assembly drawings often contain numbered lists of component parts alongwith corresponding balloons which identify each part. In the next set ofexercises, you place a parts list and balloons with corresponding numbers.


Place a Parts List

1 On the Annotate tab, Table panel, click Parts List.

2 The Parts List dialog box appears, and the view selection stage of thecommand is active. Move your cursor over the isometric view of theassembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, clickto select the view.


3 In the Parts List dialog box, select Parts Only from the BOM Viewdrop-down list control in the BOM Settings and Properties area.

4 Click OK in the Parts List dialog box.

A rectangle the size of the parts list appears attached to your cursor.

Place a Parts List | 235

You are now ready to move the parts list to a position on your drawingsheet.

5 Move the parts list so that it aligns with the upper left of the drawingborder.

Notice that when your cursor is over the drawing border, an icon appearsindicating the connection point for the parts list.


6 Click to accept the position of the parts list on your drawing sheet.

Place a Parts List | 237

Each item in the assembly is given a sequential item number in the partslist. You will now add balloons which use these item numbers.


Add Balloons8 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel, and then click the

drop-down menu below Balloon. .

9 On the drop-down menu, click Auto Balloon.

10 Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When theview highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view.

11 Use the Balloon command to select individual components forballooning. In this exercise, you select all the components in the view.Click above and to the left of the view geometry, and drag the mouse


down and to the right. The pink rectangle should cover all the viewgeometry.

12 Release the mouse button to select all the view geometry.

Add Balloons | 239

13 Select the Around option in the Placement area in the Auto Balloondialog box.

14 Enter a value of 5 mm in the Offset Spacing field in the Auto Balloondialog box.

8 Click Select Placement in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon

dialog box.

9 Move your cursor into the drawing sheet. As you move your cursor, theballoons arrange themselves closer or farther away from the view center.Vertical rows move based on the horizontal position of the cursor relativeto the view center. Horizontal rows move based on the vertical positionof the cursor relative to the view center. The following illustration showsfour possible balloon positions using the Around option.


10 Move your cursor to a position that most closely resembles the displayin the lower-right quadrant of the image shown above. When yourballoon spacing appears similar, click to display the balloon arrows.

11 Click OK in the Auto Balloon dialog box to accept and place the balloonsand arrows.


Add Balloons | 241

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders

Having placed many balloons automatically, you may decide to repositionone or more balloons or balloon leaders.

In this case, the leader for balloon 1 (which identifies the base) needlesslycrosses over the cylinder. In the following steps you move both the balloonand the leader arrow.

1 Move your mouse over balloon 1. The balloon and leader highlight,and a green edit handle appears in the balloon center.

2 Move your cursor over the green edit handle. When the move glyphappears next to your cursor, drag the balloon down towards balloon7.


3 Drag slowly over balloon 7 and then downwards.

As you drag downwards, notice the vertical dotted line appears, indicatingthat your balloon position is aligned with balloon 7.

4 Release your mouse button to accept a new balloon position similar tothat shown in the following illustration.

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders | 243

Next, you adjust the leader arrowhead position.



Adjust the Leader ArrowheadNow that the balloon is in a better position, you will move the leaderarrowhead to a position closer to the balloon.

1 Move your cursor over the end-most edit handle located at the arrowheadpoint of the leader from balloon 1.

2 When the move symbol appears next to the cursor, click and drag thelocation of the arrowhead point to the corner of the base closest to theballoon.

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead | 245

3 When the lines representing the bottom and side of the base highlightand the connection point icon appears next to your cursor, release yourmouse button to select the new position for the arrowhead point.

Next, you will place a few example notes.


Place NotesEvery drawing contains text and annotation. This text may be attached todrawing geometry with an arrow leader or contained within a specific area ofa title block or revision table. It can be a lengthy set of notes.

To place text:

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text .


2 Placing text on a drawing requires you to specify a location and anapproximate initial size of the area occupied by the block of text. Moveyour cursor to the empty area above the title block. Click and drag arectangle approximately as shown in the following image:

NOTE For smaller amounts of text, your initial rectangle can be smaller. Thesize of the text boundary can be adjusted at any time after placement sogetting it exactly correct is not critical.

When you release the mouse button, the Format Text dialog box displays.In addition to some text formatting options, this dialog box contains alarge text entry field located along the bottom of the dialog box. Formany general notes, you can accept the text formatting defaults (whichare specified by the active style for your drawing).

3 Enter text in the text entry field. Type NOTES:, then press Enter andcontinue to type 1. This is a note. Press Enter again and continueto type 2. This is another note.

4 Click OK to place the text you typed in the text entry field on thedrawing sheet, within the area specified by your rectangle.

Place Notes | 247

5 Select another command, or click Esc to terminate the Text command.

6 Click the placed text.


The text highlights and displays edit handles (green-filled circles). Youcan drag the entire text block to a new location or move your cursorover one of the eight edit handles to resize the text block boundaries.

7 With the text selected, right-click and select Edit Text from the contextmenu. The Format Text dialog box opens with the selected text in theentry field. You can highlight individual words and apply formatting(bold, italic, underline) or change font or size.

8 Click Save to save the Cylinder Clamp drawing.

NOTE After clicking Save, you may be presented with the Save dialog boxprompting you with: Do you want to save changes to ‘CylinderClamp.idw’ and its dependents? You can click the Yes to All buttonto save all the files associated with the assembly, or click No to All if youwish to save none. Click the OK button to save only the files changed inthis exercise and close the dialog box.

Congratulations! You have completed the Drawings tutorial. A brief summaryfollows.

SummaryThe Autodesk Inventor drawing environment contains a collection ofcommands – most of which were not discussed in this tutorial. Knowing howto use the fundamental methods to create basic drawings provides you witha foundation to explore the use of these other commands. The basic procedurescovered in this tutorial include:■ Projected and section view creation

■ Basic dimensioning

■ Placing basic notes

Previous (page 246)

Summary | 249

250

Drawing Styles andStandards

About this tutorial

Open a drawing and modify the drawing styles for dimensions. Apply the stylesto dimensions and modify the display of hatch patterns.

New UsersCategory


9

251

Cylinder Body Sub-Assembly.idwTutorial File Used


A drawing communicates a design, and must do so in a way that other peoplecan understand. The drawings from every company follow some combinationof rules from national, industry, or internal standards.

In this tutorial, you change the style of the open drawing and load informationfrom the style library. The project file references the style library that containsthe data to load into the drawing.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Drawings tutorial.



Next (page 252)

Set the project and open the Tutorial FileInventor stores styles in documents (local styles) and in the style library (librarystyles). The Use Style Library setting in the project determines whether stylesin the style library are open for edit. The Read-Only status ensures that allstyle edits are kept in the local document.

1 With all Inventor files closed, click ➤ Manage ➤ Projects.

2 In the lower pane of the Projects dialog box, confirm that the UseStyle Library setting is Read-Only.

If it is set to Read-Write, right-click the setting, and select Read-Only.Then click Save.

252 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards



NOTE Read-Only status enables sharing styles in model or drawingdocuments. When styles in the library change, CAD administrator can updateall documents to use the new library styles.

3 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

4 In the Tutorial Files > Cylinder Clamp folder, open Drawing Styles.idw.

Previous (page 251) | Next

Annotation StylesDrawing styles control the appearance of drawing annotations. The defaultstyles delivered with Inventor comply with national and internationalstandards such as ANSI, ISO, and GB. You can modify the styles to meet therequirements of your company. For example, if you have a text style that usesa large font, you can use that style to override the appearance of notes.

This drawing was created using the ISO standard. Although most of theannotations follow the standard, some changes are required. In this exercise,you create a dimension style that uses a period instead of a comma for thedecimal marker.

Annotation Styles | 253

1 Click the Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards group ➤ StylesEditor. The Style and Standard Editor dialog box displays.

Each drawing contains the style information that controls the displayof the annotations. In addition, the drawing can contain styles that arenot used. The style library can store all the styles your company uses.To reduce file size, there are more styles in the style library than in adrawing. For example, styles for weldments only are not included inmost drawings.

The dialog box has a style tree list on the left side. The tree list has anode for each type of annotation. If you click a node, it expands todisplay the styles. Some annotations have only one style, while othershave several.

2 Expand the Dimension node in the browser, and select Default (ISO).

3 To create a dimension style based on the Default (ISO) style, click New…

4 In the New Local Style dialog box, in Name, enter Modified (ISO).Clear the Add to Standard setting, and click OK.

The new style is added to browser under the Dimension node.

NOTE Add to Standard controls whether to include the style in the activestandard. You do not use this style in the default standard.

5 In Decimal Marker, change the setting to . Period, as shown in thefollowing image.


6 Click Save.

NOTE Each style is a separate collection of settings. Save changes beforeyou switch to a different style.


Object Defaults and StandardsAn object default style is a collection of all annotation types and their defaultsettings. A standard contains settings for views, text, object defaults, andhatches. In this topic, you create an object default style and a standard, anduse them to control the appearance of the drawing.

Object Defaults and Standards | 255

1 Expand the Object Defaults node and select Object Defaults (ISO).Click New, and in Name,enter Modified Object Defaults (ISO). ClearAdd to Standard.

NOTE The Add to Standard behavior for object default styles differs fromannotation styles. If Add to Standard is selected, the new object defaultbecomes active for the standard.

2 Set the filter to Dimension Objects.

3 Change the Object Style for all dimension types that use the Default(ISO) to Modified (ISO), as shown in the following image.


4 Click Save. Expand the Standard node, select Default Standard (ISO),and create a standard named Modified Standard (ISO).

On the Available Styles tab, select Dimension ➤ Modified (ISO)style.

On the Object Defaults tab, set Active Object Defaults to ModifiedObject Defaults (ISO). Click Save, and double-click ModifiedStandard (ISO).

The standard name changes to bold type to indicate it is active.

Object Defaults and Standards | 257

5 Click Done.

Newly created dimensions use the Modified Standard (ISO).

TIP To update existing dimensions, select the dimensions in the graphic window.Then on the ribbon, select Modified Standard (ISO) from the Style list onthe Annotate tab ➤ Format panel.



Override Annotation StylesIn some cases, the appearance of certain annotations is wrong, and you donot want all the annotations to have this appearance. In this topic, you createa style that hides trailing zeros.

1 Right-click and select Repeat Style and Standard Editor.…

2 Expand the Dimension node, right-click Modified (ISO), and selectNew Style. In Name, enter Modified- No Trailing Zeros (ISO)

NOTE Do not clear the Add to Standard selection. Modified Standard (ISO)is active, and you want to add this style to it.

3 On the Units tab ➤ Display group, clear the selection of TrailingZeros. Click Save, and Done.

4 Select the hole notes in the base view.

Override Annotation Styles | 259

5 On the Annotate tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Style List, click Modified-No Trailing Zeros (ISO).


Hatch StylesHatch patterns are used in section views, and to fill in the profiles in sketches.Most standards specify the use of a single hatch pattern, and the angle of thepattern is automatically changed on individual parts in assembly section views.Some companies use different hatch patterns for different materials to helpdifferentiate them. In this exercise, you learn how to map hatch patterns tomaterials, import a custom hatch pattern, and override the appearance of ahatch pattern.


1 Zoom into view A-A. Since it is a view of a single part, all profiles havethe same hatch pattern.

2 On the Manage tab, click Styles and Standards group ➤ StylesEditor. Expand the Standard node and select Modified Standard(ISO).

Hatch Styles | 261

3 Click the Material Hatch Pattern Defaults tab. The default hatchpattern is set to ANSI 31, and no materials are listed. Click the FromStyle Library icon to import the materials from the style library. Allmaterials are listed, and they are all mapped to the default hatch pattern.

NOTE If materials do not display, confirm that the style library setting in theproject is Read Only.

Scroll down to Steel, Mild and click the hatch pattern. The drop-downmenu lists ANSI 31, several ISO hatch patterns, and Other… .

4 Click Other... to display the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box. This dialogbox controls which hatch patterns are available in the drawing. SelectANSI 32 and click OK.

The ANSI 32 steel hatch pattern is now available, but it is not set as thedefault hatch pattern for the Steel, Mild material. Click the hatch patterndropdown menu again, and select ANSI 32. Click Save, and Done.

Even though we set ANSI 32 as the default hatch pattern, the sectionview does not update. Once you map hatch patterns to materials, newsection views automatically use those patterns. For existing views, Editthe pattern and set the By Material option.

Right-click the pattern, and select Pattern ➤ By Material

The section view updates to use the ANSI 32 hatch pattern, as shown inthe following image.


The spacing on the hatch pattern is too close for this part cross-section.

5 Right-click on the pattern and select Edit… .

By Material is selected and Pattern is disabled.

Change the Scale to 2, and click OK.

Hatch Styles | 263

The hatch pattern updates as shown in the following image.

6



Custom Hatch StylesSome companies use custom hatch patterns to indicate a special material,surface finish, or to highlight an area for a manufacturing instruction. Youcan import AutoCAD standard pattern files into Inventor.

1 Open the Style and Standard Editor and create a hatch style calledModified Hatch (ISO). On the Pattern dropdown list, select Other… .In the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box, select Load... In the TutorialFiles ➤ Cylinder Clamp folder, select Sample.pat, and click Open.

Two hatch patterns are available in that file- Sample1 and Sample2.Select Sample1, and click OK to close the Load Hatch Pattern dialogbox. Click OK again to close the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box

Sample1 is now the active hatch pattern for this style. The image is arepresentation of the hatch pattern, but it is not a preview. The patternlines are at an angle, and Angle reads 45 degrees.

2 Change Angle to 0 degrees. The image does not update.

The Sample1 hatch pattern is defined with the crosshatch lines at 27and 48 degree angles. The default Angle setting shifts the pattern by 45degrees. By changing Angle to 0 degrees, the pattern appears in thedrawing the way it was created.

Click Save, and click Done.

3 Click View A-A.

On the Annotate tab, click Sketch Group ➤ Create Sketch. In theDraw group, click Project Geometry, and then select the four linesin the middle of the view. Click Done (ESC).

On the Sketch tab, in Draw group, click Fill/Hatch Region, andthen click in the profile defined by the projected lines.

4 In the Hatch/Color Fill dialog box, click the Hatch button to enablethe hatch controls. In the Pattern list, select Sample1.

The pattern displays in the sketch. Although you selected the sample1pattern, the rest of the settings did not update. The previous Angle settingdoes not work well with this pattern, so experiment with different angles.

In Angle, enter 90 degrees, and click OK.

The dialog box closes. Click Finish Sketch to return to the drawing.The section view resembles the following image.

Custom Hatch Styles | 265

NOTE Note If you do not select the view before you create the sketch, thesketch is created on the sheet instead of the view. You cannot project viewgeometry into a sheet sketch.



Summary

The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment supports extensive drawingcustomization. Knowing how to use the Style and Standard Editor to customizedimension and hatch appearance provides you with a foundation to exploreannotation customization further. The basic procedures covered in this tutorialinclude:■ Creating and modifying styles, object defaults, and standards.

■ Setting style defaults.

■ Overriding styles.

Previous (page 265)

Summary | 267

268

iLogic Basics

About this tutorial

Create rules-based models.

New UsersCategory

10

269


bracket_no_rules.iptTutorial File Used


iLogic extends the computational capabilities within Autodesk Inventor toinclude rules. These rules work with the parameter update mechanism ofAutodesk Inventor and allow you to include much more sophisticated designintent into your models.

In traditional parametric modeling, dimensional parameters drive geometry.Parameter values can be input directly by the user, or they can result fromfixed equations involving other parameters or even linked spreadsheet values.Using rules in a parametric model allows for conditionally defined equations.Conditional equations can involve all aspects of the design. Equations orrelationships can be defined between the parameters, properties, attributes,features, components, or any other aspect of the design. Defining therelationships between all objects in a design makes it possible to update themodel completely, correctly, and automatically when input parameter valuesare changed.

Objectives■ Become familiar with important iLogic concepts.

■ Create rules and parameters that control the modeling of a simple part.

Prerequisites■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling

functionality and concepts.




Next (page 271)

270 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics



Prepare to Add ParametersIn addition to the familiar numeric parameters available in Autodesk Inventor,you can create text and true/false parameters and then use them to controlyour model.

In the following lessons, you create additional parameters in your model forlater use in iLogic rules.

1 With Autodesk Inventor open, set your active project to iLogic 2012Tutorials.

2 Open the file bracket_no_rules.ipt.

3 Use the Save As command to save this document as a new file namedbracket.ipt. This open document is your working file for the tutorial.

4 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parametersto display the Parameters dialog box, which serves asthe editor for all Autodesk Inventor parameters.

Prepare to Add Parameters | 271

5 Click the Filters icon at the bottom of the dialog box. Select theAll option to ensure that all parameters associated with the bracketmodel are displayed.


Create a Numeric Parameter1 Select Add Numeric from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the

dialog box.

A new row is created at the bottom of the parameter list, and the cursoris positioned in the Parameter Name cell for that row.

2 Enter the name mass, and then click the Unit cell to display the UnitType dialog box.

3 Expand the Mass node, and select lbmass.

NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Please be sure to followthe case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and while creating rules.

4 Enter 100 in the Equation cell, then click in another cell in the rowand observe 100.000000 in the Nominal Value field.

5 Select the check box in the Key cell of this parameter to make it a Keyparameter.


Create a Text ParameterWith the Parameters dialog box still open:

1 Select Add Text from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialogbox.

2 Enter the name holes in the empty Parameter Name cell at thebottom of the parameter list.

3 Right-click in one of the cells of the row to display the contextual menucontaining the options Make Multi-Value and Delete Parameter.

4 Select Make Multi-Value to open the Value List Editor dialog box.


5 In the Add New Items field at the top of the dialog box, enter base,flange, and none. Make sure to press Enter after each item to place iton its own line.

6 Click Add to transfer the new items to the Value field at the bottomof the dialog box.

(1) Enter your items here. (2) Click Add. (3) Observe items added as values.

7 Click OK to accept these values and close the Value List Editor dialogbox.

In the Equation cell of the holes parameter, click the drop-down arrowto see the three string values you added.

Create a Text Parameter | 273

8 Select the flange choice. Notice that as you change the value of thehole parameter to flange, it also changes in the Equation field.

9 Select Key checkbox of this parameter to make it a Key parameter.


Create a True-False ParameterNow we create a parameter to control use of the chamfer feature on the bracketpart.

1 Select Add True/False from the drop-down menu at the bottom of thedialog box.

2 Enter the name chamfers in the empty Parameter Name cell at thebottom of the parameter list.

3 Click in the Equation cell and notice that a drop-down menu appears,with True and False as the available options.

4 Select the Key check box to make the chamfer parameter a Keyparameter.

5 Click Done to close the Parameter dialog box and complete the parametercreation process.



Set Parameter FiltersThe Parameters dialog box includes filters to control which parameters aredisplayed. Filters help you focus on specific parameters.

1 Open the Parameters dialog box, and expand the dialog box window toshow all the parameters associated with the bracket.

Click the Filters icon in the bottom left corner of the dialog toview a list of the filters you can use to restrict the parameter list.

2 Select the check box in the Key field of each of the following Modelparameters to set them as Key parameters.■ base_hole_length_loc

■ base_hole_width_loc

■ base_hole_dia

■ flange_hole_dia

■ flange_hole_length_loc

■ flange_hole_width_loc

3 Click the various choices in the list of filters.

Notice how the list of displayed parameters changes.

■ All shows all parameters.

■ Key shows only key parameters.

■ Non-Key shows only non-key parameters.

■ Renamed shows only those parameters that the user renamed.

■ Equation shows only those parameters involved in an equation.

4 Close the Parameters dialog box.

This simple bracket model has 28 parameters associated with it. It is notunreasonable to expect that a complex part or assembly of parts may havehundreds of parameters. By strategically designating Key parameters, it ispossible to find relevant parameters much more easily by filtering the list.


Set Parameter Filters | 275

Create Feature Suppression RuleWith the necessary parameters in place, we can now add logic to the modelusing rules. Rules can be defined for various actions, including setting thevalues of parameters and activating or suppressing features. Our first rulesuppresses a feature on a part.

Rule Editor

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ AddRule.

2 Enter Modify_Feature in the Name field of the Rule Name dialog box,and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box.

The Edit Rule dialog box is the heart of the iLogic functionality. You usethis dialog box to create and edit iLogic rules.

3 Select the Model tab. The top left panel of this window includes a viewof the Model tree. Click the Model Parameters node in the tree. Noticethat the top right panel now lists only the Model parameters.

To see other sets of parameters, you can click the User Parametersnode in the model tree to display only the manually created parameters.

You write rules in the rule text area, which is located in the bottom panelof the Edit Rule dialog box. You can enter Rule keywords by typing them


directly into the text entry field. Or, you can select generic statementsfrom the toolbar above the field and then editing the statements.

This tutorial describes entering the statements manually, unless otherwiseindicated.

4 Click the User Parameters node to display the User parameters.

The bracket model includes two holes: one in the base, and one on theflange.

(1) flange hole (2) base hole

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 277

Our new rule turns on (or off) the base hole, the flange hole, or both.In a previous lesson, we created a multi-value parameter named holes.We assigned three values to this parameter labeled base, flange andnone. The rule turns on the flange hole when flange value is selected.Choosing base turns on the base hole, and a value of none turns offboth holes

Add Parameters to Rule

Now we can create the rule. We begin with the flange setting of the holesparameter.

1 Enter If in the text box, followed by a space.

Notice that the text of the If keyword turns bold and red. The red colorindicates a recognized language element (in this case a keyword).

2 In the Model tree, click the User Parameters node, then double-clickholes to insert the holes parameter name into the editor.

3 Type = , followed by a space, and then type “flange” (be sure to includequotation marks). Add another space, and type Then to finish this line.

Notice that the different colors are applied automatically to the differentlanguage elements of the expression defined so far. This color codingmakes rules much easier to read, and it helps you quickly comprehendtheir meaning, and identify any information entered incorrectly.

4 Press Enter to move to the next line.

We can make the flange hole active by using an iLogic function.

Insert Code Snippets

1 In the Snippets area on the left side of the editor, click the System tab.Expand the Features node, then double-click the IsActive choice toinsert its text into the rule editor.


2 Click the Model tab at the top of the Edit Rule dialog box, and clickflange_hole in the Model tree.

3 Click the Names tab in the top right corner of the dialog box, and noticethat flange_hole now appears here.

4 Highlight featurename in the rule text, and then double-clickflange_hole in the Names tab to replace featurename withflange_hole.


(1) Highlight generic text. (2) Double-click name to replace highlighted text.

The Feature.IsActive function sets the activity state (suppression state)of a feature specified in quotation marks inside the parentheses.

5 To assign a value of True, first insert a space at the end of the statement.After the space, enter =, followed by another space, and then the wordTrue.

Assigning a value of True indicates that the flange hole is active(unsuppressed). When the flange option is chosen for the holesparameter, we want only the flange hole active. We must include acommand that deactivates the base hole.

6 At the end of your rule text, press Enter to move to the next line, andthen insert another Feature.IsActive(“featurename”) function.

7 Highlight the featurename string and click base_hole in the Modeltree. Then double-click base_hole in the Name tab to replacefeaturename with base_hole, and assign a value of False.

These two lines turn on the flange hole and turn off the base hole. Yourrule now consists of three lines.


Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" ThenFeature.IsActive("flange_hole") = TrueFeature.IsActive("base_hole") = False

For instances in which the base hole must be activated, a similar strategyis employed. We must activate the base hole and deactivate the flangehole.

Reuse Code Blocks

To create the next part of the rule, you copy and paste the reusable portionof the previous statements. Then change the pasted text as required.

1 Press Enter to insert a new line, and then enter ElseIf.

2 Highlight the reusable text, which includes everything after the wordIf, and press Ctrl + C to copy the text to the clipboard. Then, positionthe cursor after ElseIf, and press Ctrl + V to paste it.

NOTE You can also Cut, Copy, and Paste by right-clicking selected text andselecting the appropriate command from a context menu. It also containsother editing commands. Or, you can use the icons in the editing toolbarabove the rule text area.

3 In the newly pasted text, change flange to base, and switch the Trueand False conditions.


Copy Code Block

If holes= ”flange” ThenFeature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) = TrueFeature.IsActive(“base_hole") = FalseElseIf holes = “base” ThenFeature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) = FalseFeature.IsActive(“base_hole”) = True

4 Add another ElseIf statement, and use the same copy and paste methodto create the third part of this rule, where no holes are required. Modifythe newly pasted text to suppress both hole features when the holesparameter is set to none.

5 Finish the statement by typing End If (or clicking the correspondingkeyword button).

The rule is complete.

Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" ThenFeature.IsActive("flange_hole") = TrueFeature.IsActive("base_hole") = FalseElseIf holes = "base" ThenFeature.IsActive("flange_hole") = FalseFeature.IsActive("base_hole") = TrueElseIf holes = "none" Then


Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = FalseFeature.IsActive("base_hole") = FalseEnd If

6 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box.

If there are no mistakes, the dialog box closes without an error message.An icon representing the new rule appears in the Rule Browser.

7 To verify the new rule, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ Rule Browser and view the tree.

The Rule Browser provides a way for you to see the rules in the currentmodel. We explore the Rule Browser further later in this tutorial.

Test the Feature Suppression Rule

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters to display the Parameters dialog box.

2 Click the node icon to the left of the Model Parameters area to collapsethe list of Model parameters.

3 Click in the Equation field of the holes parameter to enable themulti-value drop-down arrow. Then click the arrow and select flangefrom the drop-down menu.


4 Click any other cell and observe the bracket. The only hole shown is theflange hole.

5 Change the multi-value selection to base, and click another cell. Onlythe base hole is shown.


6 Finally, change the multi-value selection to none, and click anothercell. No holes are visible.


7 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.

Rename the Feature Suppression Rule

The rule we created requires a more descriptive name.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ RuleBrowser.

2 In the tree, click Modify_Feature once to highlight the rule, then clickit again to enable edit mode.

3 Rename the rule to Hole_Rule, and press Enter.

4 Close the Rule Browser.



Create Feature Activation RuleNow, we create a second rule to control the activation of the chamfers on thebracket. Previously, we created a Boolean-type parameter labeled chamfers.The two possible values for a Boolean parameter are True and False. We willuse these values to turn chamfers on and off.


2 Name the new rule Chamfer_Rule, and click OK to open the Edit Ruledialog box.

The first part of the rule states that if the value for the Boolean parameterchamfers is true, then the chamfers feature is activated.

3 Enter the If statement for this rule.

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True Then

4 From the Snippets area, insert a copy of the IsActive snippet(Feature.IsActive) into your rule. In the inserted snippet, replacefeaturename with Chamfers, and set the statement to True.

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True ThenFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True

The second part of the rule states that when the value of the chamfersparameter is False, the chamfers are deactivated.

5 Add an Else statement, and use the Copy and Paste commands tocreate the second part of the rule. Complete the rule with an End If

statement.

Create Feature Activation Rule | 287

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True ThenFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = TrueElseFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = FalseEnd If


6 Click OK to accept the rule. If no error messages appear, the rule can betested.

Test the Feature Activation Rule

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters.

2 In the chamfers row, click in the Equation field to enable themulti-value drop-down, then click the arrow and select False. Noticethat all chamfers are deactivated.


3 Now, change your Equation selection to True. The chamfers areactivated.


Create Dimension RuleThe third rule we create controls the dimensions of the bracket. Previously,we created a user parameter labeled mass. Our new rule modifies the widthof the bracket based on the value of this parameter. In the first scenario, thewidth of the bracket changes according to the following values.

Bracket WidthMass

1 in100

2 in200

3 in300

Create Dimension Rule | 289

Bracket WidthMass

4 in400

Add Values

First, we add the set of possible values for the mass parameter. Use the menusin the Filters area to display only the Key parameters in the list. This filtermakes it easier to focus in on the mass parameter.

1 Right-click in any empty cell in the mass row, and select MakeMulti-Value from the context menu.

The Value List Editor opens.

2 In the Add New Item(s) field, add the values 200, 300, and 400 (thevalue of 100 should already be in the Value list).

3 Click Add button to populate the Value list, and then click OK to acceptthe list and return to the Parameters dialog box.

You can click the drop-down menu in the Multivalue field of the massrow in the Parameter Editor to see the list of values.

4 Click Done to complete the modification of the mass parameter.

Add the Rule

Next, we create a rule to control the bracket width.


2 Name the new rule Width_Rule.

The first part of our rule states that if the mass is 100, the bracket widthis 1 inch.

3 In the rule text area of the Edit Rule dialog box, begin the rule with anIf statement.

4 Click the Model Parameters node in the Model tree, then locate theparameter labeled bracket_width under the Parameters tab to theright of the tree.


5 Double-click bracket_width to insert the parameter name into therule text. Although parameter names can be directly typed into the rule,double-clicking from the list eliminates the possibility of spelling errors.

6 Set the bracket_width to 1 inch.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Thenbracket_width = 1

NOTE You can specify units in iLogic numeric expressions (for example, “1in”). However, the examples in this tutorial do not follow this convention.When units are omitted, the units specified in the properties of the modeldocument are assumed.

The second part of our rule states that if the mass is 200, the bracketwidth is 2 inches.

7 Use an ElseIf statement to set the bracket_width to 2 inches whenthe mass is 200.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Thenbracket_width = 1ElseIf mass = 200 Thenbracket_width = 2

8 Add two more ElseIf statements to accommodate the remaining valuesof 300 and 400.

9 End the rule with an End If statement.



Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Thenbracket_width = 1ElseIf mass = 200 Thenbracket_width = 2ElseIf mass = 300 Thenbracket_width = 3ElseIf mass = 400 Thenbracket_width = 4End If

10 Click OK to save this new rule.

Test the Rule

1 Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Set the value of the mass parameter to 100. Notice that bracket_widthis set to 1 inch.


3 Change the mass parameter value to 200, and notice that the bracketwidth changes again.


If you change the mass to 300, the width of the bracket increases to 3inches. A mass of 400 results in a width of 4 inches. Try it!


Test for Range of ValuesWhat if the mass is not limited to exact values, but instead can occur in severalranges of values? Consider the following examples:

WidthMass range

1 inLess than or equal to 100

2 inGreater than 100 but less than or equal to200



WidthMass range


6 inGreater than 400

We can change an existing rule to accommodate these ranges.

1 Open the Rules Browser, and double-click Width_Rule to open the rulein the Edit Rule dialog box.

2 Modify the rule as shown.

Copy Code Block

If mass <= 100 Thenbracket_width = 1ElseIf mass > 100 And mass <= 200 Thenbracket_width = 2ElseIf mass > 200 And mass <= 300 Thenbracket_width = 3ElseIf mass > 300 And mass <= 400 Thenbracket_width = 4Else

Test for Range of Values | 295

bracket_width = 6End If

With these changes, we check for a range of values in each If or ElseIf statement.

3 Click OK to close the Edit Rule dialog box.

Remove the Multi-Value List from the Mass Parameter

As a last step, we modify the User parameter mass, which is currently amulti-value parameter. We can remove the multi-value characteristic associatedwith this parameter by editing the multi-value list.


2 Right-click an empty cell in the mass row, and select Edit Multi-ValueList from the context menu.

3 Select all the values in the Value list, and then click Delete.

4 Click OK to accept the change. Notice that the mass parameter nolonger has a multi-value list to select from.

Test the Modified Rule

1 In the Parameters dialog box, enter a mass value of 75. The width ofthe bracket is set to 1 inch.

2 Change the mass to 150. The bracket width is now 2 inches.


(1) mass=75, width=1 in (2) mass=150, width=2 in

Test for Range of Values | 297

3 Experiment further. By changing the mass to 250, the width changesto 3 inches. When mass is 350, the width of the bracket is 4 inches.Entering a mass value greater than 400 results in bracket width of 6inches. Verify it by setting the mass to 1500.

4 Change the mass back to 150, then click Done.

5 Save and close bracket.ipt.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned the following:

Work with Parameters

■ Create numeric, true/false, and text parameters.

■ Create multi-value parameters.

■ Use Key parameters as search filters.

■ Modify parameters.

Work with Rules

■ Create rules.

■ Construct conditional statements.

■ Activate and deactivate features.

■ Control part dimensions using a rule.

■ Modify an existing rule.

To learn more about iLogic, we suggest that you take time to complete theremaining iLogic tutorials.

Previous (page 294)


The Ribbon

About this tutorialBecome familiar with the ribbon interface.

New UsersCategory


Start a new part file.Tutorial File Used

Perform workflows to draw your attention to key characteristics of the ribboninterface.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,

and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.


As you work through a series of basic exercises to become familiar with theribbon interface, it is not necessary to reproduce the sample geometry accurately.

Navigation Tips■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return

to the previous one.

Next (page 300)

11

299

Interface FundamentalsThe fundamental characteristic of the new interface is that commands formerlylocated on panel bars and toolbars are now located on tabs.

300 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon

Commands formerly found on the various common menus are also locatedon the tabs.

Commands formerly found on the File menu are now located on theApplication menu.

Interface Fundamentals | 301

Though the change to tabs is a fundamental change to the interface, otherinterface structures remain unchanged.

For example, Autodesk Inventor still uses the browser to represent filestructures.

Autodesk Inventor still uses context menus.

In addition, the actual design and behaviors of features and commands remainsunchanged: Extrude is still Extrude, Create Constraint is still Create Constraint,and Project Views is still Project Views.


Set theAs mentioned, this tutorial uses a generalized, theoretical workflow to facilitateyour discovery of the interface. The workflow is only a vehicle for learningand is not meant to be credible from an engineering or design point of view.

This workflow begins with a typical first task: setting the .

If Autodesk Inventor is in a zero-doc state (no files are open), you can accessthe command on the tab:


Create a PartCreate a part file with a default template:

1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the New command on the QuickAccess toolbar.

2 Select the Part template (the actual template standard is not importantfor this tutorial).



Create a Sketch GeometryIf your default template does not open in sketch mode:

1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser.

2 Select the XY Plane browser node.

3 On the ribbon, click .

Create a Sketch Geometry | 303

Next, draw a rectangle:

4 Click .

5 Approximate the rectangle as shown in the following image.

Notice that tabs are subdivided into panels. For example, the sketchcommands you use for drawing geometry are grouped on the Drawpanel; the panel subdivisions group functionally related commands.


Finish the SketchNotice that the Sketch tab contains a prominent command called FinishSketch.


This command provides the same results as the right-click marking menuoption of Finish Sketch, as well as the Return command.

The reason the command is so prominent is to help make it clear at all timeswhen you are in sketch mode.

For example, before you exit the sketch, select the Environments tab.

Notice that the Finish Sketch command persists on the Environmentstab, and the Sketch tab label is also highlighted.

Finish the Sketch | 305

It is possible to select other tabs at any time in your workflow, but thepersistence of Finish Sketch and the tab highlight help make it clear youare still in sketch mode.

Click Finish Sketch.


Extrude the Sketch1 Ensure that the Model tab is the active tab.

2 On the ribbon, click .

3 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box.

4 Click the Undo command, located on the Quick Access toolbar.


5 Press E on the keyboard. Notice that keyboard shortcuts behave the sameas always.

6 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box.


Switch to an Environment1 Select the Environments tab.


Print

Print is located on the Application menu. Click ➤ Print.

There is no need to print the file. Cancel the Print dialog box.


Switch to an Environment | 307

Measure1 Select the Tools tab. The Tools tab contains many of the commands

formerly found on the Tools menu.

2 Select the Distance command, located in the Measure panel.

3 Press Esc to close the command.


Save1 Click the Save command, located on the Quick Access Toolbar.


2 Use the default file name.

Leave the part open.

Create an AssemblyWith many workflows and procedures within Autodesk Inventor, there isoften more than one method available to reach a given result. Thischaracteristic also applies to file creation. As an alternative to the Newcommand on the Quick Access Toolbar, you can access the file templates fromthe Application menu. You can also use the Quick Launch command in theOpen dialog box.

Click to expand the Application menu, then click the arrow nextto New to expand the submenu.

Create an Assembly | 309

Select Assembly to use the default template.

Notice that if you select New directly from the Application menu, the NewFile dialog box opens.


If you click the arrow next to New, the New submenu expands. Alternatively,the New submenu expands automatically after a short delay as you pause thecursor over the New parent menu.


Place Occurrences1 Click the Place command, located in the Component panel of the

Assemble tab.

2 Select the part file you created.

3 Place two occurrences.

Place Occurrences | 311


Add Command to Quick Access ToolbarIn this next exercise, you create a shortcut.

1 Select the Manage tab.

2 Right-click the command, and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.


Use File Tabs and Edit the Part1 Select the Part(#).ipt file tab, located at the bottom of the graphics

window.

2 On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the down arrow to the right of AsMaterial to display the drop-down Color menu. Select a new color forthe part.


Increase Screen SpaceThe ribbon is designed to provide more available graphic space for your models.

1 Click the Minimize button once. The panels reduce to panel buttons.

Use File Tabs and Edit the Part | 313

2 Pause the cursor over a panel to display the commands on that panel.


3 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tab and panel titles.

4 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tabs.

5 Click a tab title to reveal the tab.

Increase Screen Space | 315

6 Click the Minimize button again to restore the full ribbon.

As an alternative to cycling through the ribbon states, select a state from thedrop-down menu.

You can also use the Clean Screen command to maximize model spaceinstantly.

1 Select the View tab.


2 Click Clean Screen.

This command hides the browser and maximizes the graphics area to theapplication window. Tab panels are minimized if they were in a maximizedstate. The command also maximizes the Autodesk Inventor window to yourscreen.

You can also use the keyboard shortcut: press Ctrl 0 (zero) to switch fromClean Screen display. The browser is restored and the tabs are also restored towhatever state they were in previously.

Click the Minimize button, as needed, to restore the tabs to their full display.

Increase Screen Space | 317

Create Constraint1 Select the Assemble tab.

2 Click the Constrain command.


You can create a constraint but is not necessary for the workflow.


Create Drawing Views1 Click the New command.

2 Open the Standard.idw template.

3 Right-click the drawing sheet, and select Base View.

4 Click OK to place the view.

5 When you place the base view the Projected View functionality isautomatically activated. Create one or more projected views.

Create Parts List and Annotation1 Select the Annotate tab.

2 Click the Parts List command.

Create Drawing Views | 319

3 Select the base view, and place the parts list.

4 Click Auto Balloon, located on the Balloon drop-down menu.

5 Place the balloon.

6 Click the Dimension command and place a dimension.



Customize TabsYou can move commands you do not use, or commands you use lessfrequently, to the drop-down portion of the tab panels.

1 Right-click the Bend command and select Move to Expanded Panel.

Customize Tabs | 321

2 Click the panel title to expand the panel and show the moved command.


3 You can also click the pin icon to pin the panel in the expanded state,as needed.

Customize Tabs | 323

Create Your Own Tab PanelsYou can add commands to a tab.

1 Select the Place Views tab.

2 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize UserCommands.


3 In the dialog box, specify Annotate Tab in the Choose commandsfrom drop-down menu.

4 Select the command, and then click Add.

Create Your Own Tab Panels | 325

5 Repeat for the and commands.

6 Click OK in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

A User Commands panel containing the commands you specified is addedto the tab you specified.


Right-click the tab and notice the other customize options. Experiment withthese options to tailor the tab to your preferences.


Export Tab Settings to XMLYou can save your customized tab settings to an XML file. You can also saveto multiple XML files. For example, you can create one custom configurationand export it to XML. Then set up another with a different configuration andexport it to another XML file using a different file name.

1 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize UserCommands.

2 Click Export, located at the bottom of the dialog box.

3 In the Save As dialog box, specify a file name, and then click Save.

The XML file is created in the default Preferences directory.

Click Close in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

To retrieve and apply settings contained in a customization XML file:

1 Click Import in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

2 Select one of the user-defined XML files.

3 Click Open.

If you click Apply or OK the customization file is applied to the ribbon.

Close the Customize User Commands dialog box.


Using Access Points through the BrowserAs noted earlier, to access the various environments in Autodesk Inventor,you use the Environments tab. You also use the Finish command to exitenvironments, as well as to exit sketches.

However, access methods to some functionality are the same as found inreleases previous to the ribbon interface.

You access Construction and Base Solid edit functionality through the browser.

Export Tab Settings to XML | 327

For Construction functionality:

1 Select the part file tab at the bottom of the graphics window to switchto that document.

2 Select the Model tab.

3 Click the Thicken/Offset command.

4 Create an offset surface.

5 Right-click the surface in the browser, and select Copy to Construction.

6 Right-click the newly created Construction node in the browser andselect Edit Construction.

For Base Solid edit functionality:

1 Open a common data format file, such as IGS or STP, that contains solidgeometry.

2 Right-click the Base node in the browser and select Edit Solid.



SummaryThe purpose of this tutorial was to help maximize your productivity withinthe new interface, as quickly as possible. In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Find commands and command groupings within the tab structure.

■ Access and exit environments and sketches.

■ Access commands on the Application menu.

■ Use the Quick Access Toolbar.

■ Increase model space.

■ Customize the ribbon.

Summary | 329

In addition to this tutorial, there are a couple other ribbon-related Help items:■ Ribbon Introduction, a video overview of the ribbon interface.

■ Command Locator, an interactive guide that compares command locationsin previous releases to their new locations in the ribbon.

You can access both items from:■ The Get Started tab.

■ The main Help drop-down menu on the application window.

■ The Help home page.

Previous (page 327)


Content Center

About this tutorialAccess libraries of standard parts in the Content Center.

New UsersCategory


Start a new assembly file (metric)Housing.ipt

Tutorial File Used


Autodesk Inventor Content Center libraries provide thousands of standard parts(fasteners, steel shapes, shaft parts, and so on). These libraries are accessed inContent Center. Explore the Content Center functionality to utilize standardparts in your designs.

The examples in this tutorial use content based on two different standards. Ifyour Content Center configuration does not contain the corresponding standardlibraries, read along without performing the steps. Or use a similar part from adifferent library. For example, if the tutorial calls for a screw from the ANSIstandard and your library contains only ISO parts, substitute a similar screwfrom your ISO library.

12

331



Prerequisites■ Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

■ Understand the interface.

■ Understand projects in Autodesk Inventor.

■ See the Help or “Getting Started” for further information.



Next (page 332)

Review Content Center ConfigurationTo begin, set your active project to tutorial_files. Then verify that ContentCenter libraries are configured correctly in the project.


2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project inthe projects list to set it as the active project.

3 Click Configure Content Center Libraries.

The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Centerlibraries in your library storage location.

4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the projectconfiguration.

NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one (non-empty) Content Centerlibrary must be available for use. A library is available if it has the In Useoption selected and a Read-Only or Read/Write status in the Accesscolumn.

TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. SeeHelp for more details, or contact your CAD Administrator.

5 Click OK in the Configure Libraries dialog box, and then click Done inthe Projects dialog box.


332 | Chapter 12 Content Center

Place from Content Center Dialog Box1 Create a blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template.

2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place

from Content Center.

The Place from Content Center dialog box displays.

3 Switch on the following:■ Search

■ Favorites

■ AutoDrop

■ Tree View

■ Table View

TIP Some buttons may already be selected. Click them to make sure theyare switched on.

The Place from Content Center dialog box is the main interface for aContent Center consumer. You can find, select, and place a standard part orfeature to an assembly. The dialog box presents a merged view of contentcontained in all configured libraries.

Place from Content Center Dialog Box | 333

The Place from Content Center dialog box displays several panels:■ Category View panel on the left displays a tree structure of the current

Content Center database.

■ List View panel on the right displays all items available in a category(folder) selected on the Category View panel.

■ Table View panel displays all members of a part (feature) family selectedon the List View panel.

■ Search panel enables you to find components in libraries.

■ Favorites panel stores your favorite parts.

■ History panel displays previously placed components.



Browse in Content Center LibraryUse the Content Center browser to locate the Forged Socket Head CapScrew - Metric family.

1 In the Category View panel, expand the Fasteners ➤ Bolts category,and click the Socket Head category. A list of part families included inthe Socket Head category displays in the List View panel on the right.Families are sorted alphabetically.

2 In the List View panel, locate and click the Forged Socket Head CapScrew - Metric family. Members of the family are displayed in theTable View panel.


Place Content ManuallyTwo methods are available for placing Content Center components: AutoDropand manual placement. If you select AutoDrop on the toolbar, AutoDrop isthe primary and manual placement is the alternate placement method. Theprimary method is available when you double-click a family in the Place fromContent Center dialog box. Alternatively, you can select a family and clickOK. To use the alternate placement method for the family, hold down theAlt key, and double-click a part family.

Browse in Content Center Library | 335

TIP To use manual placement as the primary method, unselect AutoDrop onthe toolbar.

To place a part manually by using the Table View:

1 In the Table View, click row 95 to select the family member (a screwwith M6 thread type, 30-mm nominal length).

2 Click OK to place the selected part in the assembly. The manualplacement method is automatically used because the family member toplace is already determined.

3 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish thecommand.

4 Review the placed part in the assembly and in the browser.


Create iMatesThe components that are supplied in the Content Center libraries includeiMates to make placement easier. Find the name of the insert iMate for thepreviously placed cap screw. Then open Housing.ipt and edit it to create aniMate with the same name.

1 In the browser, right-click the previously placed cap screw, and thenselect Expand All Children. Make a note of the name of the insertiMate, Insert In1.

2 Right-click the cap screw, and click Delete to delete it from the assembly.

3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place,and place one occurrence of the part Housing.ipt in the assembly.


4 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximatethe following image.

5 Right-click the Housing part in the browser, and click Edit.

6 Click Manage tab ➤ Author panel ➤ iMate to activate the CreateiMate command.

7 In the Create iMate dialog box, click Insert , and then selectthe circular edge, as shown on the following image.

Create iMates | 337

8 Click the More button (>>) to expand the dialog box, and then typeInsert In1 in the Name field.

9 Click OK. The iMate is created in the part.

10 Click the Return command to return to the parent assembly.


Place Content Manually Using iMates1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place

from Content Center.

2 Click History on the toolbar.

The History panel displays. It includes the previously placed ForgedSocket Head Cap Screw - Metric part family.


3 Right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family, andselect Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in theList View.

4 Switch off the Table View panel.

5 Hold down the Alt key, and double-click the Forged Socket HeadCap Screw - Metric family to place a member of the family in theassembly.

6 In the Family dialog box, select the same family member as you placedpreviously: select M6 from the Thread Description list, and thenselect 30 from the Nominal Length list.

7 Select Use iMate, and then click OK.

The selected cap screw previews in place (honoring the specified InsertiMate).

8 Click anywhere in the graphics window to place the cap screw.

Place Content Manually Using iMates | 339

9 Right-click, and select Done.


Use AutoDropAutoDrop enhances placement techniques with functional design automation.It automatically checks geometry for placement and sizing based on thecontent family characteristics.

Place head cap screws to the remaining mounting holes of the Housing partby using AutoDrop.

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Placefrom Content Center.

2 Use Search to find available head cap screws:■ Insert the Head Cap Screw string in the Search For box of the

Quick Search panel.


■ Click Search Now.

3 On the Search Results panel, locate the DIN 6912 cylinder headcap screw. Right-click it, and select Navigate to Category. The familydisplays and selected in the List View.

4 Double-click the DIN 6912 family. The graphics window with theassembly displays.

5 Position your cursor over an empty mounting hole as shown:

6 Click to display the AutoDrop toolbar.

AutoDrop determines that multiple placements of a selected componentwould be desired. Notice that the circular top edge of each of the othermounting holes highlights to indicate where AutoDrop places additionalcomponents.

NOTE The Insert Multiple option on the toolbar controls how multiplecomponents are placed.

Use AutoDrop | 341

7 Drag the red arrow on the screw preview to change the nominal lengthof the screw to 30 mm.

NOTE When you drag the red arrow, a tooltip shows the entire size of thecomponent.

8 Select Apply on the AutoDrop toolbar to place three cylinder head capscrews.

9 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish thecommand.



Resize Standard Content1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click the Forged Socket Head

Cap Screw - Metric part, and then select Change Size. The familydialog box displays.

2 Select 45 from the Nominal Length list, and click OK. The selectedcap screw resizes to the new length.

Resize Standard Content | 343


Replace Standard Content1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click one of the occurrences

of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw, and then select Replacefrom Content Center. The Replace from Content Center dialog boxdisplays, and the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw is selected.

2 On the List View panel, select the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw- Metric located in the same category, and click OK.

3 In the family dialog box, select M6 from the Thread Description list,and select 45 from the Nominal Length list.

4 Select Replace All to replace all occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinderhead cap screw.


5 Click OK on the family dialog box. Then click OK on the message box.

All occurrences of the selected screw are replaced.


Summary

Summary | 345

In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Review the library configuration in the project.

■ Work with the Place from Content Center dialog box.

■ Find a part family by using the Content Center browser, Search, andHistory.

■ Select a family member (part) and place it in an assembly.

■ Use iMates to place a part from Content Center.

■ Place a Content Center part by using AutoDrop.

■ Change the size of a placed Content Center part.

■ Replace a part with another part from the Content Center library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information.

What Next? Use a procedure from this tutorial to place a bearing in theassembly. Read more about Content Center in Help. Continue with theContent Center User Libraries tutorial.

Previous (page 344)


Sketch Blocks

About this tutorial

Define sketch blocks and use them in assemblies.

New UsersCategory


Car Seat Sketch Blocks.iptTutorial File Used

13

347


Define sketch blocks to capture geometric configurations as a fixed set, andplace instances of the set into an assembly layout.

In many assembly designs, geometric configurations are repeated. For example,you can group 2D sketch geometry into a sketch block that represents a carseat screw assembly. You can place instances of the block into your assemblylayout. The instances are defined in the sketch block. Any changes to the blockdesign are automatically reflected by the instances.

You could create nested sketch blocks to represent the car screw assembly andplace flexible instances of these blocks into your layout. These flexible instancesretain specified degrees of freedom that allow them to simulate the kinematicsof the screw assembly.

You start this tutorial in an existing part with 2D sketch geometry.

Objectives■ Create, edit, and format sketch blocks.

■ Demonstrate kinematics with sketch blocks.






Next (page 348)

Get StartedOpen Car Seat Sketch Blocks in Autodesk Inventor.

1 Click ➤ Open.

348 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks



2 Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt.


Create Sketch Blocks

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in theModel browser. Click Sketch1 and you see all geometry in the graphics

Create Sketch Blocks | 349

window highlighted. You can use one 2D sketch to create all your geometrythen group the appropriate geometry into sketch blocks.

1 Use navigation commands, such as View Face and Zoom Window,to position the sketch geometry in the graphics window as shown.

2 Double-click Sketch1 in the Model browser.

3 Window-select the lowermost geometry, and click Create Blockin the Layout Panel on the Sketch tab.

NOTE You can pre-select geometry and activate the Create Block command,or you can activate the command and select geometry.

4 For Block Name, enter Worm Gear Assy. You can also define the insertpoint and add a description. The insert point is where the sketch blockis attached to the cursor when block instances are placed.

5 Click OK. The sketch block is created.

6 Expand Sketch1 in the Model browser. Pause the cursor over the sketch

block instance , Worm Gear Assy:1. The associated sketchgeometry highlights in the graphics window.

Create Block creates a sketch block definition in the Blocks folder

and replaces the original 2D sketch geometry with an instance ofthe block. Expand the Blocks folder to view the Worm Gear Assyblock definition node.


7 You can create multiple sketch blocks without closing the Create Blockdialog box. Click Create Block on the Sketch tab, and select thegeometry shown. Enter Connecting Rod as the Name, and click Apply.The block is created, and the dialog box awaits selection of geometry forthe next block.

8 Select the geometry shown, and create the Link Plate sketch block.

9 Select the geometry shown, and create the Pivot Plate sketch block.

Create Sketch Blocks | 351

10 Exit the sketch, and save your file.


Edit Sketch BlocksYou edit sketch block definitions either in-context or out-of-context. Thebenefit of the in-context edit is the ability to add existing active sketchgeometry or blocks to the block definition. With both methods, you can addnew sketch geometry to the block. Regardless of how the sketch blockdefinition is edited, the changes are propagated to all instances of the block.

NOTE You cannot edit a sketch block instance independent of the block definition.

1 Open Sketch1 for edit.

2 Create a rectangle that intersects the Worm Gear Assy geometry.


3 Exit the sketch.

4 Expand the Blocks folder, and double-click the Worm Gear Assydefinition. The block definition opens for edit in the graphics window,but the newly created rectangle geometry is absent. It is because the editis out-of-context of the sketch. You can make new geometry to add, butgeometry that exists outside the block definition is not available.

5 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block.


7 Double-click block instance Worm Gear Assy:1, or right-click on theinstance and select Edit Block. It opens the Worm Gear Assy blockdefinition for edit in the context of Sketch1. The newly created rectanglegeometry is exposed to the block definition.

8 Select the rectangle geometry you created. Hold down the Ctrl key, andclick the four lines of the rectangle. When all four lines are selected,right-click and select Add To Block.

NOTE If you had created new geometry during the block edit, the newgeometry is automatically added to the block definition.


NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node tofinish editing the block and return to the sketch.

10 To illustrate that the block definition has changed, drag and drop theWorm Gear Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into thegraphics window.

Worm Gear Assy:2, another instance of Worm Gear Assy, is createdshowing the rectangle geometry you added when you edited the blockdefinition in-context.

Edit Sketch Blocks | 353

11 Exit Sketch1.

12 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition under Blocks. Itopens the Worm Gear Assy block definition out-of context.

13 Delete the rectangle geometry you previously added.

14 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. Both instances of WormGear Assy are updated to show the geometry was removed.



Format Sketch BlocksYou can apply specific geometric properties to sketch block definitions andinstances. The geometric properties active in a sketch block definition are thedefault properties for the instances. However, as with other sketch geometry,you can override the default format for the sketch block instances. Use thisfunctionality to differentiate between specific instances in your sketch.

1 Right-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition in the Blocks folder,and select Properties.

2 Select Magenta for Line Color, and click OK. Both Worm Gear Assyinstances turn magenta to reflect the new default format.

Format Sketch Blocks | 355

3 Now, override the default format. Right-click the Worm Gear Assy:1instance, and select Properties.

4 Select Blue for Line Color and click OK, then click in the graphicswindow to clear the selection. The instance is now blue.


5 In a similar manner, change the color of the Worm Gear Assy:2instance to red.

Format Sketch Blocks | 357

6 Open Sketch1.

7 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Sketch

Properties .

8 On the Sketch Properties toolbar, click the Formatting Toggleto switch between the default format associated with the block definitionand the user format you applied. The default format displays when thetoggle is selected.

9 Delete the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance.

10 Reset the geometric properties Line Color for the Worm Gear Assyblock definition and Worm Gear Assy:1 instance to Default.

You can also update your block properties to change the Insert Pointlocation, visibility, block name, and description. As with other blockedits, any changes are made to the block definition and reflected in allblock instances.

11 Double-click the Connecting Rod:1 instance.

12 Click in the graphics window to ensure that no geometry is selected.

13 With no geometry selected, right-click in open space in the graphicswindow, and select Block Properties.

14 Click Select, and redefine the Insert Point. The Insert Point simplydefines the attachment point between the cursor and block instance,when the instance is placed into the sketch.


15 Change the name to Rod.

16 Click OK. The block definition name changes to Rod and the instancename changes to Rod:1.

17 Use the Block Properties to change the name back to ConnectingRod.



19 Exit the sketch and save your file.


Nested Flexible Sketch BlocksWhen you select block instances for inclusion in a new sketch block, youcreate a nested block. You use sketch constraints, within the nested blocks,and the Flexible attribute to simulate kinematic subassemblies.


2 Select the Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 block instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 359

3 Click Create Block.

4 Enter Screw Rod Assy as the block name.

5 Click OK. A new block definition Screw Rod Assy is created. Expandthe block definition to view the nested structure.

6 Expand the Screw Rod Assy:1 block instance in Sketch1. The WormGear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 instances are dependents of theScrew Rod Assy block.

NOTE When the Screw Rod Assy nested block is defined, the originalinstances Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 are deleted. Newinstances Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 are created asdependents in the nested block.

7 Drag and drop the Screw Rod Assy block definition (from the Blocksfolder) into the graphics window. The Screw Rod Assy:2 instance iscreated.


8 Double-click either Screw Rod Assy instance in the Model browser.The block definition is open for in-context edit. All other geometry isshaded to gray.


9 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy:2 block instance, either in the Modelbrowser or in the graphics window.

10 Create a centerline down the axis of the Worm Gear Assy, as shown.Ensure that the centerline endpoints are constrained to the Worm GearAssy geometry. This centerline will participate in a collinear constraintwith the centerline of the Connecting Rod.

NOTE Both instances of the Worm Gear Assy update to show thecenterline.


11 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. You are returned to the editof the Screw Rod Assy block.

NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Screw Rod Assy blockinstance node to finish the edit of the Worm Gear Assy block. This returnsyou to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block.

12 Apply the collinear constraint between the Worm Gear Assy andConnecting Rod centerlines.

13 Right-click, and select Show All Constraints. The collinear constraintglyphs are shown for both Screw Rod Assy instances.


14 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints.

15 Click the Connecting Rod geometry in the graphics window and drag.The sketch block instances begin to demonstrate basic kinematics dueto the collinear constraint.




Use sketch constraints between nested blocks to represent your assembly.

17 Select Screw Rod Assy:2, and use Rotate on the Sketch tab to rotateas shown.


18 Apply the Coincident constraint to the block instances asshown.

19 Click the corner geometry of either block instance in the graphics windowand drag.


Since the block instances are constrained at the sketch level, you canmove the block instances relative to one another. However, the geometrywithin the block instances shows no relative motion. To manipulate theblock instance degrees of freedom outside of the block instances, youtoggle the block instance to Flexible.

20 Right-click each Screw Rod Assy instance, and check Flexible.

21 Click different sections of the block instance geometry, and drag to seethe effect.

22 Experiment with different constraints, both within the block instancesand at the sketch level, and note how you can simulate differentkinematics. You begin to see the power behind nested and flexible sketchblocks.

23 Exit the sketch and drag the geometry. With the block instances toggledto Flexible, the degrees of freedom remain exposed at the part level.

24 Save your part file and exit. The tutorial is complete.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you:■ Created sketch blocks.

■ Edited sketch blocks.

■ Created nested, flexible sketch blocks, and simulated 2D kinematics.

For further use of sketch blocks, visit the Top-down Workflow tutorial.This tutorial demonstrates the use of sketch blocks in the top-down designworkflow. Remember to check Help for further details on sketch blocks.

Summary | 367

Previous (page 359)


Parameters

About this tutorial

Create table-driven models.

Experienced UsersCategory


Start a new Excel spreadsheetnozzle.ipt

Tutorial File Used

14

369


Create an external table of parameters. Then link it to an existing part file tomake the part a parametric table-driven model.

Objectives■ Create a table.

■ Link a table to an existing part.

■ Assign parameters to existing dimensions.

■ Resize the part by changing one value.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the and navigate the model space with the various view

commands.




Next (page 370)

Work with TablesThe table you create in this tutorial is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing11 parameters that control the size and shape of the part.

Ten of the parameters are equations. The radius of the nozzle base is anabsolute value. Changing the radius of the nozzle base updates all otherparameters.

370 | Chapter 14 Parameters



NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete thistutorial.


Create the External Table1 Open Microsoft Excel.

2 Enter these values and equations in the first two columns:

NOTE To enter an equation in a cell, start the entry with the = character.

BA

10base1

=B1*2.7ht2

=B1*0.6lip3

=B1*2.4face4

Create the External Table | 371

=B1tdepth5

=B1*0.6tarc6

=B1*0.6tfix7


Finish the Table1 Add the following values to control your part features:

BA

=B1*0.2chamfer8

=B1*1.2extrude19

=B1*0.6extrude210


=B1*0.6holedia11


Review Parameter Assignment ProcessBefore you link this spreadsheet to an existing part, review the steps you taketo control the part using parameters:

1 Open an existing part file.

2 Link an external table.

3 Assign parameters to existing dimensions.

4 Modify the value of one parameter.

5 Update the part.

Review Parameter Assignment Process | 373


Open a Part1 Switch to the Autodesk Inventor window. (If you have not started a

session yet, do so now.)

2 Click ➤ Open.

3 Open nozzle.ipt.



Work with ParametersNozzle.ipt is just like any other part in that it is defined by parameters.Parameters are values assigned to elements you create. As you sketch and buildfeatures, Autodesk Inventor automatically assigns parameters to the valuescontrolling the elements.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel

➤ Parameters to open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Review the list of model parameters already assigned to the part.

Work with Parameters | 375

■ Whenever you dimension an element or define a feature, Autodesk Inventorassigns a parameter name to that value.

■ Each parameter in your model is prefixed by the letter d. You can edit anyparameter, however, d is reserved for parameter names. To avoid conflicts,do not use this prefix when defining parameters in an external table.


■ To edit a parameter name or equation, click in the cell you want to change.

■ Use the same method to add comments.


Link Your External Table1 Click Link in the Parameters dialog box.

2 Select the nozzle.xls file you created.

3 Click Open.

The program imports the external table into the Parameters dialog box.

Link Your External Table | 377

4 Review your parameter names and values.

5 Click Done when you are ready.



Prepare to Assign ParametersNow you are ready to assign the parameters to your part. First, let’s review thesteps:

1 Assign parameters to the dimensions controlling the sketch.

2 Assign parameters to the values controlling the part features.

NOTE The numbers in the following image correspond to the rows in yourspreadsheet.


Modify Your Sketch DimensionsFirst, modify the sketch dimensions:

1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to switch to Sketch mode.

Prepare to Assign Parameters | 379

2 Right-click in the graphics window, and then select DimensionDisplay ➤ Expression.

3 Double-click the 10-mm horizontal dimension at the base of the sketch.

4 Enter base in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

5 Replace the other dimensions with spreadsheet driven parameters asshown.

NOTE Parameter names are case sensitive. Invalid parameter names aredisplayed in red text.


6 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch.


Modify the Two ExtrusionsModify the values controlling the two extrusions.

1 In the browser, right-click Extrusion1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Two Extrusions | 381

2 In the Extrude dialog box, change 12 mm to extrude1.

3 Click OK to accept your changes.

4 Repeat these steps for Extrusion2, replacing 6 mm with extrude2.



Modify the Chamfer FeatureNext, modify the value controlling the chamfer feature.

1 Right-click Chamfer1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Chamfer Feature | 383

2 In the Chamfer dialog box, change 2 mm to chamfer.


NOTE The size of the part has not changed yet because the parameters inyour spreadsheet have the same values as the original parameters.


Modify the Hole FeatureFinally, modify the value controlling the hole feature.

1 Right-click Hole1, and then select Edit Feature.


2 In the Diameter field of the Holes dialog box, change 6 mm toholedia.


4 Click Save.


Control Your Part with ParametersNow that all the values that define the shape and size of the part have assignedparameters, you are ready to control the size of your part from the externaltable.

1 Return to the Microsoft Excel window.

2 Change the value of base to 20.

3 Save nozzle.xls.

4 Return to the Autodesk Inventor window.

Control Your Part with Parameters | 385


Update Your PartTo view the new part version, update the part file.

1 Click Update.

Autodesk Inventor recalculates the part using the values in the externaltable.

2 Save the part.


SummaryUsing a simple symmetrical part, you learned how to:■ Create an external table.

■ Edit existing dimensions.

■ Modify an external table.

■ Control part versions.


Using these techniques, you can create your own parametric, table-drivenmodels.

Previous (page 386)

Summary | 387

388

iLogic - Part Modeling

About this tutorial

Add rules to models.



15

389

Manifold_Block_no_rules.iptTutorial File Used


This tutorial expands upon the information presented in the iLogic Basicstutorial. iLogic helps you write rules that can drive the parameters, features,attributes, iProperties, and other elements in an Autodesk Inventor model.The rules are stored within the part or assembly document.

iLogic rules are written in a language that is a slightly modified version ofVisual Basic .Net (VB.Net). The language is easy to learn, including the moreadvanced features that are also available.

In the following lessons, you add rules to a parametric part.

Objectives■ Use the parameter interface

■ Add a rule

■ Write a rule

■ Run a rule

■ Edit a rule

■ Use the Rule Browser to reorder rules

■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet

■ Set feature and component activity

Prerequisites■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling

functionality and concepts.

■ Completion of the iLogic Basics tutorial.




Next (page 391)

390 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling



Introduction to the Sample ModelThe model that you work with throughout this tutorial is a simple manifoldblock. The block contains a set of three available ports referenced as A, B, andC. Each port is on a different side of the block. A port consists of a center hole(of variable size), and a set of surrounding threaded bolt holes. The holes areused to mount union caps in a later tutorial.

This manifold block can be either a tee style block, which has all three ports,or an elbow style block with only two ports. Also, the block can be either astandard block or a custom block. On a standard block, which can be orderedoff the shelf, all ports are the same size. A custom block, which must bemanufactured, can feature a different size for each port.

Finally, the part contains an embedded Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, which isused to specify the values for various parameters as the port sizes are changed.

You begin by adding additional parameters to the model to support the rulesyou write later.


Open a Part Document1 Set your active project to iLogic 2011 Tutorials. This setting provides

easier access to the necessary files, and supports the work in the nexttutorial.

2 Open manifold_block_no_rules.ipt. You add model rules to thispart throughout the tutorial.

3 Save this file as manifold_block.ipt.

You now have the manifold_block.ipt file open.

Introduction to the Sample Model | 391


Create Port Size ParametersFirst, we need a set of parameters to control the size of three ports on ourmanifold block.

Most of the parameters have been named in the parameter editor already. Itis good practice to name your parameters for future reference when creatinga parametric design. Parameters with meaningful names make the rules thatdrive or reference them easier to read and understand.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters.

NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Follow the case beingused in the Parameters dialog box, and also when creating rules.


2 Create a new numeric parameter named port_a_size. Set the Unitvalue to in, and enter an initial Equation value of 0.50. Define it as amulti-value parameter with the following values:

0.5

0.75

1.00

1.25

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

NOTE For more details on the exact steps needed to create a parameter,please revisit the iLogic Basics tutorial. Remember that you can cut and pastethe values from the previous table to set the values for the multi-value list.

3 Make port_a_size a Key parameter.

4 Create two more parameters, named port_b_size and port_c_size,with the same settings and multi-value list. Set both as Key parameters.


Create Block and Component Type ParametersNow, we must create two more parameters that control the type of block beingmodeled. One parameter determines whether the block is a tee or elbow design.

Create Block and Component Type Parameters | 393

The other parameter defines whether we are creating a standard or a customblock.

1 Create a text parameter named block, and define it as a multi-valueparameter with the following values:

tee

elbow

2 In the Equation field of this new parameter, set the current value totee, and define it as a Key parameter.

3 Create a second text parameter named component_type, and define ita multi-value parameter with the following values:

standard

custom

4 Set the current value to standard, and define it as a Key parameter.

5 Click Done to exit the Parameters dialog box.

6 Save your document, but do not close it.


Define a Model Rule to Control Port VisibilityIn the iLogic Basics tutorial, you learned that you can use parameter namesfrom a model as variables in a rule. Also, you can select from lists of availableparameters, as well as features and other model entities, for inclusion in a rule.

Now, we define a set of rules that drive the geometry of our model based onthe values of the key parameters we defined previously. In this lesson, weconstruct each rule in segments. The entire text of all the rules can be foundat the end of this tutorial.


The first rule makes model changes to the Port B features, based on whetherthe elbow or tee block is selected. To make this change, suppress or enablethe Port B features based on the type of block.


2 Name the rule block_shape_rule, and click OK to display the EditRule dialog box.

3 In the text area, create the first part of your new rule, which defines whathappens if the block is a tee-style block.

Copy Code Block

If block = “tee” Then

4 Because all three ports are active in the tee-style block, add the steps toensure that Port B is enabled. Activate two features in the part.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = TrueFeature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True

NOTE The Feature.IsActive function is available for selection in theSnippets area of the Edit Rule dialog box. Click the System tab, thenexpand the Features node.

We have now defined the behavior of our model for a tee block.

5 To define the model behavior for an elbow block, begin with an ElseIfstatement.

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility | 395

Copy Code Block

ElseIf block = "elbow" Then

6 To suppress the Port B features when creating an elbow block, use thefeatures we created for the tee block, but with opposite values.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = FalseFeature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False

A simple way to add these lines is to copy and paste the text for the teeblock behavior. Then change True to False in the new lines.

7 Complete the If block of your rule with an End If statement.

That’s it! All the instructions necessary to enable or disable the Port Bfeatures based on the type of block being used are included.

8 Click OK to save the completed rule.


Test the Block Shape RuleTo verify that this rule is really in control of our model:

1 Observe the current state of the model.


2 Open Parameters dialog box.

3 In the block row, change tee to elbow using the multi-value drop-downmenu in the Equation cell. Port B has been suppressed.

4 Change the block parameter back to tee, and close the Parametersdialog box.

Test the Block Shape Rule | 397


Manage Part ConfigurationsWe now cover the last two topics listed in the beginning of this tutorial:■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet.

■ Set feature and component activity.

iLogic provides built-in functions that read information from Excelspreadsheets. These functions are available in the Snippets area, on theSystem tab, by expanding the Excel Data Links node.

In this lesson, we write a rule that uses values from an embedded Excelspreadsheet to set the values for parameters that control the port geometry,based on a specified size. Our rule looks up the port size in the spreadsheet toidentify the row of values. Then it reads fields from that row to get theappropriate parameter values.

A tee-style block includes three ports. Each port is listed in the Parametersdialog box. However, changing the port size in the Parameters dialog box does


not change the port size in our model. We must add rules to drive the differentport sizes.

Our first step is to add a rule that sets the size of the ports and the dimensionsof the screw pattern around each port. The screw pattern is used in theassembly to hold a flange onto the block.

1 In the Autodesk Inventor model browser, expand the 3rd Party nodein the tree.

2 Right-click on Embedding 1, and select Edit to access the embeddedspreadsheet.

3 Add a rule named port_size_rule, and click OK to open the Edit Ruledialog box.

The first thing our rule must do is locate the row in the spreadsheet thatcontains the values to use for Port A. We look up the value matchingthe port_a_size parameter in a column labeled port_size.

4 In the Snippets area of the dialog box, on the System tab, locate thefunction labeled FindRow (embedded) in the Excel Data Linksnode. Double-click the function to insert it into the text area.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow(“3rd Party:Embedding 1”, “Sheet1”,“columnName”, “<=”, 0.2)

5 Once you inserted this function template into your rule, replace the firstoccurrence of columnName with port_size, the first occurrence of“<=” with “=”, and 0.2 with port_a_size.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_a_size)

This code indicates that we want to find the row in the embeddedspreadsheet that has a port_size column that equals the value of theport_a_size parameter.

Manage Part Configurations | 399

6 Add a series of parameters based on the values of cells from this row inthe spreadsheet. These parameters control the port diameter, drill depth,and the distance between the bolt holes. Use the function labeledCurrentRowValue in the Excel Data Links node of the Snippetsarea.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("columnName")

Edit your copies of the snippet as shown here.

Copy Code Block

port_a_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_a_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_A_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")

NOTE Remember that you can select items in the Model tab of the EditRule dialog box to display various sets of Model parameters.

7 To define the thread of the tapped holes, insert the feature labeledThreadDesignation in the Features node of the Snippets area.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("featurename") = “3/8-16 UNC”


Modify the text as shown here.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

We have indicated that we should use the tap_dim cell to get the threaddesignation for the bolt holes.

8 Now that the instructions are complete for the Port A parameters, createthe instructions for Port B and Port C. Copy the rule text you havecreated, and paste it twice. In the first copy you paste, change port_areferences to port_b. In the second copy you paste, change port_areferences to port_c. You should now have three blocks of code, eachrelated to one of the three ports.

Manage Part Configurations | 401

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_a_size)port_a_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_a_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_A_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")


i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_b_size)port_b_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_b_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_b_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_B_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_B_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_c_size)port_c_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_c_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_c_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_C_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_C_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

9 Click OK in the iLogic rule editor to save your port_size_rule. Yourmodel may or may not update depending upon how the iLogic port sizeparameters were initially set.


Test the Port Size RuleTo view how the new rule updates the model when parameter values arechanged:


2 Change port_a_size to 1.50 by selecting that value from the multi-valuelist.

Notice how the model changes when the value equals 1.50.

Test the Port Size Rule | 403

Clearly, we have some more work to do to force other aspects of themodel (its size) to update according to the selected port size.


Create Block Size RuleNow that we can change the size of each port, we must determine which facehas the largest port, so that the block can be sized appropriately. It requiresanother rule.

1 Add a new rule named block_size_rule.

To determine the largest port, we examine the values of the three portsize parameters, and retain the largest value. As with block_shape_rule,the behavior for tee-style blocks must be different than for elbow-styleblocks.

For tee-style blocks, all three ports are used, so we check the sizes for allthem. For elbow-style blocks, we do not check Port B, which issuppressed. We use the MaxOfMany function to get the largest valuefrom a set of input values.


2 Begin block_size_rule as shown, by typing it directly into the text areaor by inserting from the available generic statements on the toolbar. Toinsert the MaxOfMany function, expand the Math node in the Snippetsarea, and double-click MaxOfMany.

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Thenport = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size)ElseIf block = "elbow" Thenport = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size)End If

A new local variable named port holds the size of the largest availableport. Now we have to tell the model what to do with this information.The model obtains its information from an embedded Excel spreadsheet,so we look at the spreadsheet to update the overall sizes of the model.

3 Press Enter twice to add some whitespace in the rule.

4 As with the rule you created previously, insert a copy of the FindRow(embedded) function. Modify it to get the values for other parametersfrom the embedded spreadsheet by locating the appropriate row ofinformation.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port)

We are using the port_size column for the lookup, and the value of theassigned variable as the value to look for.

Create Block Size Rule | 405

5 Set model parameters with information from the embedded Excelspreadsheet, using the found row for the largest port size.

Copy Code Block

block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth")port_c_depth_from_front =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front")block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width")port_a_hor_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")port_b_hor_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue"hor_offset")

We have now determined which port is the largest, and we are sizingthe top of the block accordingly. Now, we determine the height of theblock by examining the tee and elbow to determine which port size isbigger on the Port A / Port B face.

6 Create another statement that uses another local variable porta to holdonto this value. Because Port B is not used for elbow-style blocks, thestatement includes different steps depending on this setting.


Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Thenporta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size)ElseIf block = "elbow"porta = port_a_sizeEnd If

The MaxOfMany function, is not used for elbow-style blocks, sinceonly one value must be considered. We can set the variable from thatvalue.

7 Create another FindRow (embedded) statement to get the heightvalues of the block from the Excel spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", porta)

8 Use the CurrentRowValue function to set the height of the block.

Copy Code Block

port_a_vert_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")port_b_vert_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

9 Finally, set the value for two additional parameters. The first parametersets the block height. The second parameter sets the vertical offset ofPort C.

For this value, we add special logic to insert extra space beyond thevertical offset used for the other ports. This information is obtained fromanother spreadsheet cell. We only do it for elbow-style blocks.

Create Block Size Rule | 407

Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" Thenport_c_vert_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") +(GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4)Elseport_c_vert_offset =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")End Ifblock_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height")

The block_size rule is complete.

10 Click OK in the Edit Rule dialog box.

11 Change any of the port sizes in the Parameters dialog box, and watchthe model update.


Set the Component TypeCreate a rule to ensure that all port sizes are the same. Then, you use this rulein the next section to demonstrate how rules can be reordered.

1 Create a rule named component_type_rule.

2 Set the sizes for Port B and Port C to be the same as Port A.


Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Thenport_b_size = port_a_sizeport_c_size = port_a_sizeEnd If

3 Click OK when you are done to save this rule.


Reorder RulesRules can be reordered after they are created. The order of rule executionsometimes affects the results of these rules. You can alter the order of executionfrom the Rule Browser.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ RuleBrowser. The Rules dialog box displays.

2 Using the left mouse button, drag and drop the component_type rulethat we created above the block_shape_rule.

3 If the Autodesk InventorUpdate icon is active, click it to update themodel.


Reorder Rules | 409

Change Driving Rule Values1 Open the Parameters dialog box.

Note the Driving Rule value for the port_b_size and port_c_sizeparameters. These values indicate that a driving rule(component_type_rule) has been defined for these two parameters.When component_type equals standard, the rule sets these two portsizes equal to port_a_size, and the values cannot be changed. If youchange component_type to custom, you can then choose independentvalues for port_b_size and port_c_size.

2 Change component type from standard to custom.

3 Change port_b_size to 3 inches and port_c_size to 0.75 inch. Noticethat independent port sizes can be specified.

4 Now, change your component type back to standard. All ports areupdated to match port_a_size.


Update iPropertiesWe now add one more rule. This rule updates some of the iProperties for themanifold block.

1 Add a new rule named part_number_rule. This rule set the InventorPart Number iProperty value.

For standard components, we can look up the Part Number in theembedded spreadsheet. Then, we use the value in the model_code cellto set the Part Number property for the part. You use theiProperties.Value function, which is available in the iProperties nodeof the Snippets area.

2 Using the iProperties.Value function, create the first part of the rule.This part locates the row in the embedded spreadsheet from which toread values. Locate the row using port_a_size.


Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Theni = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_a_size)iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code")

3 For custom components, specify a fixed string for the part number. Afixed string eliminates the need to use any information from thespreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

ElseiProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") ="HomeMade"End If


4 Click OK to close this rule.


Test the iProperties RuleVerify that the new rule is working.

1 Click , and then click iProperties.

2 On the iProperties dialog box, click the Project tab. Text is entered nextto the Part Number.

3 Click Close to remove this dialog box.

Test the iProperties Rule | 411

4 Go to the Parameters dialog box, and change the value ofcomponent_type from standard to custom.

5 Click Done, and reopen the Inventor iProperties dialog box. The PartNumber is now HomeMade.

Save your work. We will be using this model in the next tutorial to build anassembly and add logic at the assembly level.


SummaryBy completing this tutorial, you now understand some of the basic iLogicmethods for turning a parametric single model into an intelligent super model!

In this tutorial, you:■ Used the Inventor parameter interface.

■ Added a rule.

■ Wrote a rule.

■ Caused a rule to run.

■ Edited a rule.

■ Used the Rule Browser to manipulate rules.

■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet.

■ Set feature and component activity.

■ Set iProperty values from a rule.

In the next tutorial, you learn how to add rules at an assembly level to affectAutodesk Inventor parts and iParts. During the tutorial, you are provided with3D parametric models to which rules are added.


Rule Text ReferenceThe following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in thistutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in themanifold_block_complete.ipt file, which is included in the tutorials directory.

Block_Shape_Rule


Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" ThenFeature.IsActive("Port_B") = TrueFeature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = TrueElseIf block = "elbow" ThenFeature.IsActive("Port_B") = FalseFeature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = FalseEnd If

Port_Size_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 413

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rdParty:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size)port_a_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_a_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_A_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")


i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_b_size)port_b_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_b_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_b_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_B_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_B_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_c_size)port_c_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")port_c_x_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")port_c_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")Port_C_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_C_Threads") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

Block_Size_Rule



Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Thenport = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size)ElseIf block = "elbow" Thenport = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size)End If

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port)block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth")port_c_depth_from_front =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front")block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width")port_a_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")port_b_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")

If block = "tee" Thenporta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size)ElseIf block = "elbow"porta = port_a_sizeEnd If

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", porta)port_a_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")port_b_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

If block = "elbow" Thenport_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")+ (GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4)Elseport_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")End Ifblock_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height")

Component_Type_Rule


Copy Code Block


Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Theni = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1","port_size", "=", port_a_size)iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code")ElseiProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = "HomeMade"End If

Previous (page 412)


iLogic - Assemblies 16

419

About this tutorial

Build an assembly using the functionality of iLogic.



Manifold_Block.iptTutorial File Used

420 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies


The steps for creating an assembly include the following:■ Determine how to use the design in the present application, and how it

can be used in future applications.

■ Write the rules for your assembly in ordinary “speaking” language. Thesesimply written rules serve as a guide when you create the formal rules inyour design using iLogic Rule language.

■ After you have written the rules in plain language, place the componentsinto the assembly.

■ Constrain the components, and examine the remaining degrees of freedom.

■ Add more constraints as necessary to constrain all parts fully.

In this tutorial, the assembly you build is a simple manifold block with flangefittings that are attached using socket head cap screws.

Objectives■ Pass information from an assembly to its components

■ Drive iPart configurations

■ Change component pattern dimensions

■ Suppress/unsuppress components

■ Suppress/unsuppress constraints

■ Write data to an Excel spreadsheet

■ Update iProperties

Prerequisites■ Knowledge of basic Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling techniques,

such as constraint creation.

■ Completion of the Manifold Block Part tutorial.




Next (page 422)




Start a New Assembly FileThe block is the first part placed into the assembly.

1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files, and make sure that iLogic 2012Tutorials is set as the active project.

2 Create a new assembly using the Standard.iam template.

3 On the ribbon, click Assembly tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place.

4 In the Open dialog box, double-click manifold_block.ipt. It is thepart file you created in the Manifold Block Part tutorial.

A grounded occurrence of the component is placed in the assembly, andthe part origin is aligned with the assembly origin.

5 To cancel placement of further copies of the component, right-click thegraphics window and select Done.

6 Use Orbit to orient the manifold block as shown.


In addition to the block, this assembly includes three union caps andthree sets of screws to attach the caps.

7 Select the Place command again, and double-click union_cap.ipt.

A copy of the component becomes attached to the mouse pointer. andthe Place Standard iPart dialog box is displayed.

8 Click the Table tab, and select iPart member Union-01 (Part NumberU-050).

9 Click in the graphics window to place a copy of the union cap near themanifold block. Click two more times to add a total of three union caps,then click Dismiss to close the dialog box.

Start a New Assembly File | 423

Now you can add the screw components.

10 Select the Place command again, and double-click Screw.ipt.

11 In the Place Standard iPart dialog box, select iPart member Screw-01.Place four Screws in the graphics window, and then click Dismiss toclose the dialog box.


12 Save your assembly as my_manifold_block.iam.

You are ready to begin assembling the components and establishingtheir relationships.


Customize Components Before AssemblyBefore assembling the components, we can make a few changes to identifythem with this project.

Customize Components Before Assembly | 425

Change Assembly Component Appearance

First, we change the appearance of our union cap components to make themmore visible.

1 click the first union cap component.

2 From the Quick Access toolbar, expand the Appearance drop-downmenu, and select Blue.

3 Repeat the appearance selection for the other two union cap components.

Rename Assembly Components

Thus far, the components added to the assembly are listed in the modelbrowser. The components are named the same as the file names they reference.


We must change the names of the components in our assembly to reflect theirpurpose. We also want to remove the iPart member identification.

Renaming our components ensures that future name changes to iPart membersdo not cause our component names to become out of date in the rule. If thenames are out of date, the rule can fail to execute properly.

1 Navigate to the Model browser.

2 For each component listed here, double-click slowly on the name andchange it as indicated.■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:1 with port_a_union.

■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:2 with port_b_union.

■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:3 with port_c_union.

■ Replace Screw-01:1 with port_a_union_screw.

■ Replace Screw-01:2 with port_b_union_screw.

■ Replace Screw-01:3 with port_c_union_screw.


Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly1 Double click manifold_block:1.

2 Open the Parameters dialog box, and verify that the followingparameter values are set as indicated.

ValueParameter

Teeblock

Standardcomponent_type

0.50port_a_size

3 Save the assembly file.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 427

Add Assembly Constraints

Assembly constraints restrict the movement of components relative to eachother. Apply all constraints necessary to constrain each part fully and leaveno degrees of freedom.

1 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_center between Port A andthe manifold block. Use these selections:■ The axis running through the center of Port A of the manifold block.

■ The axis through the center hole of port_a_union.

NOTE If the union cap is hidden within the block after creating the constraint,click and drag the union cap away from the block.

2 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_hole using these selections:■ The axis running through the center of the Port A top left screw

hole on the manifold block.

■ The axis along the center of the top left screw hole of port_a_union.


3 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_face using these selections:■ The Port A face of the manifold block.

■ The back face of port_a_union.


4 Create Insert constraint port_a_cap_screw using these selections:■ The port_a_union_screw

■ The top left screw hole in port_a_union


5 Follow the previous steps for Port B and Port C. Use similar names forthe constraints.

Create Screw Patterns

Each port on the manifold block requires a pattern of four screws to attachthe union cap to the block. Use the screw we inserted into the assembly asthe patterned component.

First, create the screw pattern for Port A.

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Pattern.

2 click port_a_union_screw.

3 Click the Rectangular tab.

4 click the direction arrow in the Column area.

5 click the bottom horizontal edge of the Port A face.

6 Enter 1.50 for the horizontal distance.


7 click the direction arrow in the Row area.

8 click the left vertical side of the Port A face.

9 Enter .69 for the vertical distance.

10 Click OK.

11 Rename Component_Pattern_1 in the Model browser to beport_a_screw_pattern.

Assign Descriptive Names to Pattern Parameters

When you create the screw component pattern, new model parameters arealso created. Rename the parameters for future use in this tutorial.


2 click the name of the parameter containing 0.69 in the Equation cell.


3 Change the parameter name to port_a_y_dist_between_screws.

4 click the name of the parameter containing 1.50 in the Equation cell.

5 Change the parameter name to port_a_x_dist_between_screws.

6 Repeat the previous steps for port_b_union_screw andport_c_union_screw. Remember to rename the patterns when youare done. Your model should look as shown in these front and backviews.


7 Save your assembly file.



Add Control Parameters for AssemblySince we have created an assembly document, we must add some other userparameters.

Create Parameters to Control Port Sizes


2 Create the numeric parameter port_a_size.

3 Set Unit to in.

4 Create a multi-value list with these values..

0.50

0.75

1.00

1.25

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5 Select 0.50 from the new multi-value list.

6 Define port_a_size as a Key parameter.

7 Leave the dialog box open, and repeat the previous steps to create twoadditional parameters named port_b_size and port_c_size.

Add Control Parameters for Assembly | 435

Create Parameters to Control Component Type and Block Style

For component type:

1 Create the text parameter component_type.

2 Create a multi-value list with the values standard and custom.

3 Set the value to standard.

4 Define component_type as a Key parameter.

For block style:

1 Create the text parameter block.

2 Create a multi-value list with the values tee and elbow.

3 Set the Multivalue list to tee.

4 Define block as a Key parameter.

Create Parameters to Control Component Part Numbers

Create the following additional text parameters:■ port_a_union_part_number

■ port_b_union_part_number

■ port_c_union_part_number

■ port_a_screw_part_number

■ port_b_screw_part_number

■ port_c_screw_part_number

For each parameter, set the Equation value to 1.

Save the File

When you have defined all the parameters, Save the assembly file.


Create Rules in the AssemblyIn the next several lessons, you create a series of rules to manage the contentsof the assembly.


Pass Parameters from the Assembly to the Parts

This model includes a part named manifold_block:1, which has iLogic rulesin it. We must pass the assembly level parameter to the part.

1 Create a rule named assembly_to_parts_rule.

This rule sets parameters in the part based on the corresponding valuesof the control parameters in the assembly. Our Parameter functionspecifies the component name as well as the parameter name.

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block") = blockParameter("manifold_block:1", "component_type") =component_typeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_a_size") =port_a_sizeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_b_size") =port_b_sizeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_c_size") =port_c_size

2 Click OK when you have completed this rule.

Edit Part-level Rules in an Assembly

In the Manifold Block Part tutorial, we added a rule to the manifold block partthat controls the tee and elbow styles. We must also add it at the assemblylevel. Rather than rewrite the existing rule, we copy the original.

1 Double-click manifold_block:1 from the Model browser. The othercomponents become transparent.

Create Rules in the Assembly | 437

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ iLogic panel ➤ RuleBrowser.

3 Double-click component_type_rule.

4 Copy the rule text to the clipboard.

5 Click Cancel on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.

6 Double click my_manifold_block.iam in the Model browser.

7 Add a new rule named component_type_rule.

8 Paste the copied rule text from component_type_rule into the ruletext area of the Edit Rule dialog box.

Copy Code Block


9 Click OK to save this assembly-level rule.

Add port_a_rule

When we change the port size of Port A, we must perform several tasks:■ Change the port size.

■ Update the iPart number.

■ If required, change the screw size, screw location, and screw kit partnumber.

We add a rule to do it:

1 Make sure your manifold block assembly is active.


2 Create a rule named port_a_rule.

The first part of this rule adjusts the screw pattern spacing, based oninformation stored iPart table of the union part.

3 Add a code block that looks up the row being used based on theport_a_size parameter. Then assigns values to two different assemblyparameters from two other columns.

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=",port_a_size)port_a_y_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")port_a_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

NOTE The iPart-related statements used here can be found in the Snippetsarea under the iParts node of the System tab.

The next part of the rule selects the appropriate iPart row inside thescrew part based on the selected port size.

4 Use a series of If statements to set the appropriate iPart memberaccording to the current value of the port_a_size parameter.


Copy Code Block

If port_a_size = .50 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-01")ElseIf port_a_size = 0.75 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-02")ElseIf port_a_size = 1.00 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-02")ElseIf port_a_size = 1.25 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-03")ElseIf port_a_size = 1.50 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-04")ElseIf port_a_size = 2.00 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-04")ElseIf port_a_size = 2.50 Then


iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-05")ElseIf port_a_size = 3.00 TheniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

5 For the last part of this rule, add a statement that gets the part numberfor the flare flange and stores it in an assembly parameter, which is usedin another rule later in this tutorial.

Copy Code Block

port_a_union_part_number =iProperties.Value("port_a_union", "Project", "PartNumber")

6 Click OK to save the rule, and save the assembly file.

Add port_b_rule

Port B is different from Port A and Port C, because it does not exist in anelbow manifold block. If the manifold block is an elbow style block, we mustsuppress the union cap and the union screws used for this port. We must alsosuppress the mate constraints associated with the union cap.

Because we are suppressing components, we set a level of detail before wewrite the rule. Rules affecting items related to the level of detail in an assemblyrequire that a custom level of detail be defined and saved before writing therules. If the custom level of detail is not defined, iLogic generates an errormessage.

Set a Level of Detail

1 In the Model browser, expand the Representations node and thenthe Level of Detail node.

2 Right-click the Level of Detail node, and select New Level of Detail.

A new level of detail is added.

3 Slowly double-click LevelofDetail1, then and rename it to iLogic.

Write the Rule


Now, we can write the rule.

1 Create a rule named port_b_rule.

2 For the first part of the rule, determine if we are making a tee-style block,and store that in a separate variable isTee. The isTee variable holds avalue of True or False.

Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" ThenisTee = FalseElseisTee = TrueEnd If

We use this variable later to set other parameters.

3 Add lines to the rule to turn off the constraints that locate the unionand union screw when the manifold block is an elbow style. Turn onthe constraints when the manifold block is a tee style.

Copy Code Block

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTee


Note that we can use the isTee variable to turn these constraints on oroff according to the value of the block parameter.

NOTE The naming convention used for these constraints has made it easierto refer to them in this rule. Remember that you can also use the Model treeinformation in the Edit Rule dialog box to help complete the names of theconstraints.

4 Add two lines that conditionally include the port_b_union part andcorresponding screw pattern:

Copy Code Block

Component.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTeeComponent.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee

These lines use the isTee variable. When the screw pattern is suppressed,the screw component is also suppressed.

5 For instances in which we are using Port B, add a section that sets theport size, screw pattern parameter values, and port_b_union partnumber.

Copy Code Block

if isTee Theni = iPart.FindRow("port_b_union", "port_size", "=",port_b_size)port_b_y_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")


port_b_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")port_b_union_part_number =iProperties.Value("port_b_union", "Project", "PartNumber")End If

We enclosed this entire block in an If isTee statement, so that theselines are only processed for a tee-style manifold block. The statementIf isTee Then is equivalent to If isTee = True Then, but it providesa more concise expression format.

We first choose the appropriate row in the s iPart table of the union part,corresponding to the value of the port_b_size parameter, and thenextract the values to use for the x and y pattern offsets. Then, we extractthe Part Number from the union part, and store its value in anotherparameter for later reference.

6 For the last part of this rule, we choose the member within the s iParttable of the screw part to use for Port B. It is based on the value of theport_b_size parameter. Use a series of If/Then/Else statements tocontrol it.


Copy Code Block

If port_b_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_b_size = .75 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_b_size = 1.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_b_size = 1.25 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-03")elseif port_b_size = 1.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_b_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_b_size = 2.50 then


iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-05")elseif port_b_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

7 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the rule.


Add port_c_rule

The rule for Port C is almost the same as for Port A, except that everythingreferencing Port A must reference Port C instead.

1 Open the Rule Browser.

2 Double click port_a_rule.

3 Use the mouse to highlight the entire rule.

4 Press Ctrl+C to copy the rule text.

5 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.

6 Add a new rule named port_c_rule.

7 In the Edit Rule dialog box, click in the rule text area, and press Ctrl+Vto paste the rule.

8 Click the Search and Replace tab at the top of the dialog box.

9 Enter port_a in Find what.

10 Enter port_c in Replace with.

11 Place a check mark in Match Case.

12 Click Replace All in This Rule.


Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=",port_c_size)port_c_y_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")port_c_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")


If port_c_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_c_size = .75 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_c_size = 1.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_c_size = 1.25 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-03")elseif port_c_size = 1.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_c_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw" "Screw-04")elseif port_c_size = 2.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-05")elseif port_c_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

port_c_union_part_number =iProperties.Value("port_c_union", "Project", "PartNumber")

13 Click OK to close the dialog box.



Calculate Part NumbersWe must determine the part numbers to use for the union screws and elbows.To do this, we create additional rules in our assembly.

The first part of this rule calculates a part number to use for the Port A screw,based on the value of the port_a_size parameter. In this rule, we use a newstatement Select Case to execute one of a group of statements. The statementsexecuted depend on the value of an expression.

1 Add a new rule named screw_part_number_rule.


2 Create the first section of the rule. This section computes a variableportion of the part number, based on the port_a_size parameter value.The value is held in a temporary variable named Screw_num1. Oncethe value is determined, the rule constructs the entire part number string.Use the Keywords drop-down menu on the toolbar above the text areato help you fill in this rule.

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_sizeCase .50

Calculate Part Numbers | 449

Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25Screw_num1 = 125Case 1.50Screw_num1 = 150Case 2.00Screw_num1 = 200Case 2.50Screw_num1 = 250Case 3.00Screw_num1 = 300End Select

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"

In the rule we have created, if port_a_size = 0.50, the part number iscreated as -

UNBRAKO-050-SCREW

We save this value in a parameter for later reference.

3 Copy and paste the rule text you created, and then replace port_a_sizewith port_b_size. Set the parameter to port_b_screw_part_number.


Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_sizeCase .50Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25


Screw_num1 = 125Case 1.50Screw_num1 = 150Case 2.00Screw_num1 = 200Case 2.50Screw_num1 = 250Case 3.00Screw_num1 = 300End Select

port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"

4 Create another copy of the rule text, and then replace port_a_size withport_c_size. Set the parameter to port_c_screw_part_number.


Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_sizeCase .50Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25



port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"

5 Click OK to save the rule and close the dialog box.



Write Information to an Excel SpreadsheetWe have now set all the parameter values necessary to construct the modelcompute the part numbers. The last rule we write passes the part numbersand other parameter values associated with this file to an Excel spreadsheet.Some of these part numbers are in iParts, and this rule generated the screwpart number.

The update_excel_spreadsheet_rule utilizes a set of functions that areavailable from the Excel Data Links category, in the Snippets area of the EditRule dialog box.

1 Add a new rule named update_excel_spreadsheet_rule.

This rule fills in the necessary cells depending upon the state of themodel. In the spreadsheet, all the cells to which data is being passedhave been named to correspond to the information being written.

2 Create the first portion of the rule, which opens the spreadsheet andwrites the first three cell values.


Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1","Block_Type") = component_typeGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = blockGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") =iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "PartNumber")

In this section, we reference the part_number.xls spreadsheet file includedwith this tutorial project. We then set the values for the cellsBlock_Type, Block_Style, and Block_Part_Number. The first twovalues are set from assembly parameters, and the last value is set fromthe block’s Part Number iProperty.

3 Create the next portion of the rule, which writes the values of the threeport sizes to the spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") = port_a_sizeIf block = "tee" ThenGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = port_b_sizeElseGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = "N/A"

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 455

End IfGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size

Note how we use a placeholder value of N/A for an elbow-style manifold.

4 Add another section to the rule which assigns cell values from parameterscontained in the manifold block component.

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth")GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width")GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height")

Note the reference to the manifold_block:1 component in this section.

5 Add a section to the rule which assigns cell values from the part numbersof the union component and the screw parts, as computed byscrew_part_number_rule.


Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") =port_a_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") =port_a_screw_part_numberIf block = "tee" ThenGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") =port_b_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") =port_b_screw_part_numberElseGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") = "N/A"GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") = "N/A"End IfGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") =port_c_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") =port_c_screw_part_number

As with port_b_size in a previous section of the rule, note theconditional handling of the values related to Port B.

6 To end this rule, save the changes to the spreadsheet. Use theGoExcel.Save function, which is available from the Excel Data Linksnode in the Snippets area

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 457

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.Save

7 Click OK to save and close the rule. The spreadsheet updates as the ruleexecutes upon closing. The rule automatically closes the spreadsheetafter executing.

8 Open the part_number.xls spreadsheet with Excel, and verify that itis updated. Close the spreadsheet document before the rule executesagain, because the rule cannot update the spreadsheet if it is alreadyopen from Excel.


Test Your RulesNow that you’ve completed all the rules in your assembly, test them to verifythat they are all working properly and producing the desired results. Test yourrules by changing the current parameter values using the Parameters dialogbox, and then examine the model.


2 Select Key from the Filters drop-down list to view only the Keyparameters defined earlier in this tutorial.

3 Change the block parameter value from tee to elbow. Then click insome other cell or press Tab to apply the change, and note how themodel changes according to the rules.


4 Next, change port_a_size to some other value. Since component_typeis set to standard, the other two port sizes also change, and the entiremanifold size changes.

5 As these changes are made, the part_number.xls spreadsheet is alsoupdated. View the spreadsheet in Excel, and validate that the cell valuesreflect the current state of the model.

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial.


SummaryIn this final iLogic tutorial, you used iLogic to:■ Edit iLogic parts from within an assembly

■ Add parameters to control an assembly

■ Create rules in an assembly

■ Calculate part numbers

■ Write information to an Excel Spreadsheet

Summary | 459


Rule Text ReferenceThe following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in thistutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in themanifold_block_complete.iam file, which is included in the tutorials directory.

Assembly_To_Parts_Rule

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block") = blockParameter("manifold_block:1", "component_type") =component_typeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_a_size") = port_a_sizeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_b_size") = port_b_sizeParameter("manifold_block:1", "port_c_size") = port_c_size

Component_Type_Rule

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Thenport_b_size = port_a_size


port_c_size = port_a_sizeEnd If

Port_A_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=",port_a_size)


port_a_y_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")port_a_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

If port_a_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_a_size = .75 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_a_size = 1.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_a_size = 1.25 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-03")elseif port_a_size = 1.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_a_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_a_size = 2.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-05")elseif port_a_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

port_a_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_a_union","Project", "Part Number")


Port_B_Rule


Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" ThenisTee = FalseElseisTee = TrueEnd If

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTeeComponent.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTeeComponent.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee

If port_b_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_b_size = .75 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_b_size = 1.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_b_size = 1.25 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-03")elseif port_b_size = 1.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_b_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_b_size = 2.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-05")elseif port_b_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-06")end If


Port_C_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=",port_c_size)port_c_y_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")


port_c_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

If port_c_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_c_size = .75 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_c_size = 1.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02")elseif port_c_size = 1.25 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-03")elseif port_c_size = 1.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_c_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_c_size = 2.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-05")elseif port_c_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

port_c_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_c_union","Project", "Part Number")


Screw_Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_sizeCase .50Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00


Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25Screw_num1 = 125Case 1.50Screw_num1 = 150Case 2.00Screw_num1 = 200Case 2.50Screw_num1 = 250Case 3.00Screw_num1 = 300End Select

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"


Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_sizeCase .50Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25



port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"


Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_sizeCase .50Screw_num1 = 050Case .75Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00Screw_num1 = 100Case 1.25Screw_num1 = 125Case 1.50


Screw_num1 = 150Case 2.00Screw_num1 = 200Case 2.50Screw_num1 = 250Case 3.00Screw_num1 = 300End Select

port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &"-SCREW"


Update_Excel_Spreadsheet_Rule


Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1", "Block_Type")= component_typeGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = blockGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") =iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "PartNumber")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") = port_a_sizeIf block = "tee" ThenGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = port_b_sizeElseGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = "N/A"End IfGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth")GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width")GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") =Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") =port_a_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") =port_a_screw_part_numberIf block = "tee" ThenGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") =port_b_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") =port_b_screw_part_numberElseGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") = "N/A"GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") = "N/A"End IfGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") =port_c_union_part_numberGoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") =port_c_screw_part_number

GoExcel.Save


Previous (page 459)


476

Derived Parts

About this tutorial

Create parts from derived geometry.



17

477

Start a new part file.der_001.ipt

Tutorial File Used


Derive the geometry of an existing part and use it to create a part model.

Derived parts offer several distinct advantages:■ Derived part functionality can increase your efficiency by providing

foundational base geometry upon which to build unique design features.

■ The derived part is linked to the source file: any changes to the source filecan be instantly applied to the derived part.

■ The derived part can selectively include various part geometries andcharacteristics, such as bodies, sketches, work features, and parameters.

■ Derived parts can use less memory.

Objectives■ Use a derived part as the base feature of a new part.

■ Add features to a derived part.

■ Modify a base part and update the derived part.

■ Break the link between a derived part and its base part.






Next (page 479)

478 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts



Create a Part File1 Start a new part file.

■ Click the New command on the Quick Access Toolbar. Ensurethat you click the icon, instead of the drop-down arrow next to theicon.

■ In the New File dialog box, click the Metric tab, and then

double-click Standard (mm).ipt.

2 In the graphics window, right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch fromthe marking menu. You add the derived part to the empty part file.


Create a Derived PartSelect the source file and create the derived part:

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ Derive .

2 Double-click der_001.ipt in the Open dialog box.

3 In the Derived Part dialog box, expand the Sketches node.

4 Ensure that the icon appears next to Sketch3 to allow the programto include this sketch in the derived part. If necessary, click the icon toswitch the include status.

5 Click OK on the Derived Part dialog box to create the derived part andclose the dialog box.

The external part is now the base feature of your new part.

6 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximatethe following image.

Create a Part File | 479


Understand Derived PartsThe Model browser now contains the base feature node der_001.ipt. Theapplication takes the name from the file name of the source file.

The derived body and the included sketch appear nested under the base feature.

All model features in the source file—the three extrusions, the hole, thechamfer, and the consumed sketches—are derived into a single body. Thesefeatures are not available for edit in the derived part. The unconsumed sketchyou included is available and editable in the derived part.



Add Features to the Derived PartOne of the benefits of a derived part is that you can use the derived part toprovide base geometry quickly. Then add new features to that base geometry.In effect, you use the source file geometry as a foundational starting point foryour design work. At the same time, you preserve the design state of the sourcefile. There is a one-way associative link between the source file and the derivedpart. Any changes made to the source file can be applied to the derived part.However, changes made to the derived part do not modify the source file.

In this portion of the exercise, you add holes to the derived part.

1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole, or right-click and select Hole from the marking menu.

The sketch points in the included sketch are selected by default for thehole locations.

Add Features to the Derived Part | 481

2 Change the hole diameter to 20 mm.

3 Select Through All in the Termination field.

4 Click OK.

5 Save the file. Use the file name derive_test.


Modify the Parent PartNext, you modify the source file, and then apply those changes to the derivedpart.

1 In the Model browser, right-click der_001.ipt, and then select OpenBase Component.

This command opens the source file for the derived part.


2 On the ribbon, click the Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel

➤ Parameters.

3 For the parameter d2, change the equation from d1 * 5 to d1 * 7.


5 Observe that the length of the part has increased.


Modify the Parent Part | 483

Update the Derived Part1 Switch to derive_test.ipt by clicking the derive_test.ipt tab at the

bottom of the graphics window.

Notice that an Update icon appears next to der_001.ipt in theModel browser. This icon indicates that the source file (the parent part)was modified, and that you can apply the changes to the derived part.The changes are not applied automatically. You decide whether to applythe changes.

2 Click Local Update on the Quick Access Toolbar to apply thechanges to the derived part.


Protect the Derived PartIf useful for your design workflow, you can ensure that changes to the sourcefile are not accidentally applied to the derived part.


■ To sever the link between the derived part and the base part permanently,right-click the derived part in the Model browser, and then select BreakLink with Base Component.

The program breaks the associative link. You cannot restore the link.

Protect the Derived Part | 485

■ To suppress the association to the source file, right-click the derived part,and then select Suppress Link With Base Component.

■ To restore a suppressed link, right-click the derived part, and then selectUnsuppress Link With Base Component.


Restore and close the parent file1 Switch to the der_001.ipt window.

2 Click the Parameters command.

3 Change the equation for d2 back to d1 * 5.


5 The part resumes its original length.

6 Save and close the part file.

7 Also close derive_test.ipt.


SummaryIn an empty part, you learned how to:■ Use an existing part as the base feature of a new derived part.

■ Add features to a derived part.

■ Modify the parent part and update the derived part.

■ Break the link between a derived part and its parent part.

You can explore design alternatives with derived parts and build up librariesof parts for use across your designs. Remember to check Help for furtherinformation.


Previous (page 486)

Summary | 487

488

iFeatures

About this tutorial

Create and reuse iFeatures in part files.



18

489

TSlot-begin.iptTSlot-table.ipt

Tutorial File Used


Save an existing feature to a catalog and make it a reusable, table-driveniFeature, and then reuse it in a part file.

iFeatures minimize mistakes and rework. You capture the correct informationonce and then reuse the known, correct feature set.

To start, you extract and save a T-slot feature to an iFeature catalog. You createan iFeature to utilize a table of parameters, which define sizes. Then, you opena table model file and add a T-slot of a specific size using the iFeature. TheT-slot and table serve as a mounting for the cylinder clamp data set.

Objectives■ Extract an existing feature and save it to an iFeature catalog.

■ Create an iFeature to utilize a table of parameters.

■ Add an iFeature to a part.

■ Save resources through reuse with iFeatures.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.

■ Understand the material covered in the Getting Started PDF and the Helptopic “Getting Started.”

■ Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on theSketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.



Next (page 491)

490 | Chapter 18 iFeatures



Create an iFeature1 OpeniFeatures ➤ TSlot-begin.ipt.

2 Click the + to the left of Extrusion2 in the Model browser to accessSketch2.

3 Double-click Sketch2 (the sketch that created Extrusion2). Use theView Cube or View Face to look at the front of the part, so that thesketch appears as shown:

This sketch contains a fully constrained profile with six dimensions andtwo collinear constraints. One dimension and one collinear constraintposition the T Slot geometry on the face of Extrusion1 and are of no

Create an iFeature | 491

further interest. Two of the dimensions use an equation to position theT Slot width one half of the distance from a vertical construction line.These two equations ensure that any values added will produce asymmetrical slot.

4 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch.

5 Click Manage tab ➤ Author panel ➤ Extract iFeature.

6 In the Model browser, click Extrusion2.

7 In the Selected Features browser of the Extract iFeature dialog box,click over d2 [12 mm].

8 Now, click .

Notice that the d2 parameter is now listed in the Size Parametersportion of the Extract iFeatures dialog box.

9 Repeat the previous steps for parameters d4 [19 mm], d6 [13 mm],and d7 [7 mm].

10 Click Save in the Extract iFeatures dialog box.

11 In the Save As dialog box, double-click the Slots folder.

12 In the File name field, double-click the name iFeature1, and nameyour first iFeature tutorial_TSlot.

13 Click Save in the Save As dialog box.


Insert an iFeature1 Open the supplied file TSlot-table.ipt, which contains a shop table

top.


2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ Insert

iFeature.

3 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click the Browse button.

4 In the Open dialog box, double-click the Slots folder.

5 Click the tutorial_TSlot.ide iFeature file that you created.

6 Click Open.

7 In the graphics window, click the face shown:

8 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click Next.

9 Although in this panel of the dialog box you can alter the parameterspreviously supplied, click Next again for this procedure. We will coverthe creation of a family of related features later in this tutorial.

10 Select Activate Sketch Edit Immediately.

11 Click Finish.


Insert an iFeature | 493

Place an iFeature12 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ View Face,

and select Sketch2 in the Model browser.

13 Adjust your view zoom to see the T Slot sketch and the left edge of thetable.

NOTE Sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If yourecently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you will haveundisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorialdoes not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with thegrid displayed or undisplayed.

NOTE Your sketch may be positioned in a location that differs from theillustration.

14 Place a 40-mm dimension between the left vertical edge of the tableand the vertical construction line in the center of your T Slot sketch.

15 Place a Collinear constraint between the top-most line in your T Slotsketch and the top edge of the table. Your sketch should now match thefollowing illustration:


16 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbbon to exit the sketch and create theT Slot iFeature.

The red arrow indicates the location of the placed T Slot iFeature.


Place an iFeature | 495

Modify the iFeature File

In the next portion of the tutorial, you convert the iFeature that you justcreated to a table-driven iFeature. It will place T Slots of different sizes. Youwill edit the table definition to contain the various size parameters. You willalso add a key to use to select a slot of a certain size during placement.

1 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide.

iFeatures are stored in files with an *.IDE file extension. They containgeometry representing the features they will add (or subtract). Thetutorial_TSlot file contains black surfaces representing the cut extrude.You do not make any edits to model features using the iFeature AuthorTable.


The ribbon tab containing the iFeature panel displays.

2 On the ribbon, click iFeature tab ➤ iFeature panel ➤ iFeature

Author Table.

3 Right-click the 1 in the cell to the left of the 12-mm parameter in thelower portion of the iFeature Author dialog box. Select Insert Row fromthe context menu.

4 Set the values of the new row to d2 = 14 mm, d4 = 22 mm, d6 = 16mm, and d7 = 9 mm.

Modify the iFeature File | 497

5 Add two additional rows. Set the values for the first row to d2 = 18 mm,d4 = 29 mm, d6 = 19 mm, and d7 = 11 mm. Set the values for thesecond row to d2 = 22 mm, d4 = 35 mm, d6 = 25 mm, d7 = 14 mm.

The parameter table portion of your dialog box should appear as shown.

6 Click the Other tab in the iFeature Author dialog box, and then clickon the text Click here to add value.

7 In the Name column, click on New Item0 and change the text to Size.

8 In the Prompt column, click on Enter New Item0 and change thetext to Select size.

9 Click the gray key-shaped icon to the left of Size. Notice that the iconchanges to blue, and a blue key icon displays in the Size column headingwhich is now included in the parameter table portion of the dialog box.

10 Edit the Size key value for each of the rows in your parameter table asfollows:

M10x1.5Value for row 1:




NOTE Metric T Nuts are designated by both the slot dimensions and thethread size of the tapped hole. The Size value entered previously is thethread designation for one T Slot size. Not all slot sizes are covered by thevalues in this tutorial.

11 Click OK to save the added rows and key column to your iFeaturedefinition.

12 Save and close tutorial_TSlot.ide.



Place iFeatures from a FamilyIn this final portion of the tutorial, you place iFeatures that are driven by thekey values that you added to your iFeature definition in the previous steps.

1 In the file TSlot-table.ipt (that should still be open) follow the stepsdescribed in the beginning steps of the tutorial panel “Insert an iFeature.”

2 In the Value column, click M10x1.5 and notice that you can select anyof the four sizes that you specified in your iFeature definition.

3 Select any size, and continue the placement as discussed in the finalsteps of the tutorial panel “Insert an iFeature.” Use a value other than40 mm to place your new slots over a solid portion of the table top.

4 Repeat the previous cycle, and place T Slots using each of the otherthree defined sizes.

NOTE By carefully naming key values of iFeatures defined in a table, you areable to simplify their future use. Remember that you may not be the onlydesigner who will benefit from the efforts made to create a table-drivenfamily of iFeatures!

Next, you will quickly explore the association between an iFeature thathas already been placed, and the IDE file which defines the iFeature.

5 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide again.

6 Following the steps you learned previously, change the d2 value of 12mm in the M10x1.5 row to 2 mm.

7 Click OK to close the iFeature Author dialog box.

8 Save and close the tutorial_TSlot.ide.

9 Inspect the T Slots that have been placed in TSlot-table.ipt (that shouldstill be open).

NOTE No slots have changed size! Once you place an iFeature into a part model,the resulting feature is not associative to the original iFeature definition. Anychanges made to the iFeature definition will not change any part models that werecreated using an earlier version of the iFeature definition.

Congratulations! You have completed the iFeatures tutorial.


Place iFeatures from a Family | 499

Summary

iFeatures save both time and money! By capturing commonly used featuresor groups of features once you are able to minimize the effort required to reusethese features in other design situations. By accurately capturing these featuresone time, you can ensure they can be reused repeatedly and correctly.

In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Extract existing features and save them as an iFeature.

■ Place an iFeature precisely in an active design.

■ Create a table to drive a family of iFeatures.

■ Place iFeatures from a family using a key value.

■ That once placed, iFeatures are no longer associated to the IDE file thatdefines the iFeature.

Previous (page 499)


Content Center User Lib-raries

About this tutorialCreate your own library of customized content from standard libraries.



Start a new assembly file.Brace.ipt

Tutorial File Used


This tutorial is created for a single user environment with libraries stored in aDesktop Content location. If you are a member of a workgroup that shareslibraries on a server, you must be a library administrator and have editorpermissions to perform library editing tasks. Also, the method for creating userlibraries on the server is different than presented in this tutorial.

The examples in this tutorial use content based on several different standards.If your Content Center configuration does not contain the same library, readalong without performing the steps, or use a similar part from a different library.For example, if the tutorial calls for a machine screw from the JIS standard and

19

501



your library contains only ANSI parts, substitute a similar screw from yourANSI library.

Objectives■ Create user libraries to customize content from standard libraries.

■ Add standard parts to Content Center.

Prerequisites■ Know Autodesk Inventor assembly and part fundamentals.

■ Understand the Autodesk Inventor user interface and how it works.

■ Know the fundamentals of Inventor Content Center.

■ Microsoft Excel available on the computer (needed for creating an iPart).




Next (page 502)

Configure Standard and User LibrariesA standard Content Center library and a user read/write library must beavailable to perform this exercise. Review your current Content Centerconfiguration and create a user library.


2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project inthe projects list to set it the active project.

3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure

Content Center Libraries.

The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Centerlibraries in your library storage location.

4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the projectconfiguration.

502 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries

NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one standard Content Centerlibrary must be available for use. A standard library can be identified asavailable if the In Use option is selected and the status in the Access columnis Read Only.

TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. SeeHelp for more details or contact your CAD Administrator.

5 If you work in the Desktop Content environment, click the Create

Library command on the Configure Libraries dialog box.

NOTE If your Content Center libraries are stored on a server, verify that auser read/write library is available and you can use it for this exercise.Alternatively, you can create a library by using the server console and thenadd it to the library configuration in the project. See the Help for more details.

6 Enter Tutorial Library in the Display Name field. The File Nameuses the same string automatically.

7 Click OK. The Tutorial Library is created in the Desktop Content folder.

8 A newly created library is automatically added to the Content Centerconfiguration. Verify that the In Use box is selected for the TutorialLibrary, and the library status is Read/Write.

9 Click OK to close the Configure Libraries dialog box.

10 Click Save in the Projects dialog box, and then click Done.


Enable Edit of a Part FamilyUse the Copy To command to enable editing of a family from a read-onlylibrary. Copy To copies a single family, set of families, or a category. Thecopying process creates a complete category structure in the destinationread/write library. After a “Copy To” family is created, the family is editablein the Merged View or in the view of the user library.

Enable Edit of a Part Family | 503

Locate a part family and copy it to the Tutorial Library:

1 On the ribbon, click Tools tab ➤ Content Center panel ➤ Editor.

2 On the Category View panel, expand the Shaft Parts ➤ Circlipscategory, and select the External category.

3 On the List View panel, locate the R-Ring family.

4 Right-click the R-Ring family, click Copy To, and then click TutorialLibrary on the menu. The copying process starts.

5 After copying is finished, information in the dialog box is automaticallyrefreshed.

The R-Ring family is enabled, and an icon identifies that a read/writecopy of the R-Ring family now exists in a user library. The originalread-only family is still available in the standard library, but it is replacedwith the read/write copy in the presented merged view of availablelibraries.

6 Right click the R-Ring family and select Family Properties. Open theLink tab and review the information about creation method and parentfamily. Then, close the Family Properties dialog box.


Edit the Family Table1 In the List View panel, right-click the thumbnail image for the R-Ring

family, and then select Family Table.

2 In the Family Table dialog box, select Property Columns Only fromthe filter drop-down menu.

3 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Materialcolumn.


4 Click the Material cell in the first row and change Steel, Mild toTitanium by selecting Titanium from the drop-down list of availablematerials.

5 Click the Material cell in the second row and change Steel, Mild toGalvanized Steel.

6 Click Apply to save the changes in the library. Then click OK to closethe message box.

7 Click OK to close the Family Table dialog box.


Verify the ChangesThe Content Center Editor displays Merged View by default. In the MergedView, content from all libraries is merged in the List View panel. If a familyfrom a standard library was copied to a user library and then edited, the editedcopy of the family displays in the Merged View.

1 If needed, select Family Preview in the Content Center Editor dialog

box to display the Family Preview panel.

The Family Preview panel shows the family table of the selected family.Select the R-Ring family, if necessary.

2 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Materialcolumn. Verify that the family table in the Merged View includes youredits.

3 Select Tutorial Library from the Library View list (located near thetop of the dialog box). The view is filtered to show only contentcontained in the Tutorial Library. The Tutorial Library contains theR-Ring circlip family. On the Family Preview panel, verify that the familytable includes your edits.

4 Select the ANSI Library from the Library View list. The view is filteredto show only content contained in the ANSI library.

Verify that the family table of the R-Ring circlip family did not changein the ANSI standard library.

5 Select Merged View from the Library View list.


Verify the Changes | 505

Use Save Copy As to Create a FamilyUse the Save Copy As command to create a copy of an existing family andsave it as a new family in a read/write library. The family created by SaveCopy As appears separate from the parent family in a merged view of thecontent.

You decide if the newly created family maintains a link to the parent familyor is an independent family without any link. A link between parent andcopied families enables you to synchronize copied families with their parents.Families without link are treated the same as families published by using thePublishing Guide.

1 Open the Fasteners ➤ Nuts ➤ Other category.

2 On the List View panel, locate the JIS B 1169 - Metric family.

3 Right-click the JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select Save Copy Asfrom the menu.

4 In the Save Copy As dialog box:■ Select Tutorial Library as the location to which the copied family

is to be saved.

■ Select Independent Family.

■ Leave the Family Name, Family Description, and Family FolderName unchanged.

5 Click the Review command to display the Review dialog box. The firstrow in the table on the Review dialog box displays expressions for FileName, Part Number, and key family table columns of the newlycreated family. The following rows display the first three rows of thefamily table.

Click OK to close the Review dialog box.

NOTE You can edit expressions in the Review dialog box to customize thefamily table for the family copy.

6 Click OK in the Save Copy As dialog box to start the copying process.

After the process ends, the merged view displays the original JIS B 1169 -Metric family and the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family. The Copy ofJIS B 1169 - Metric family is enabled for editing.



Edit Family PropertiesFamily properties, for example the family name, description, mapping, andthumbnail image are displayed and edited in the Family Properties dialog box.

1 Right-click the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select FamilyProperties.

2 On the Link tab, notice that the creation method is Primary andinformation about a family parent or link is not available. It indicatesthe family is independent and treated as a user-published family.

3 On the General tab of the Family Properties dialog box:■ Replace the current Family Name with My JIS B 1169 Nut.

■ Replace the current Family Description with Copy of JIS B 1169- Metric.

■ Replace the current Family Folder Name with My Parts.

4 Click OK to close the Family Properties dialog box.


Verify Your EditsPlace a member of the family in an assembly, and review properties of theplaced standard part.

1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template.


3 On the List View panel of the Place from Content Center dialog box,double-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut family.

Edit Family Properties | 507

4 On the My JIS B 1169 Nut family dialog box, click OK to place the firstfamily member.

5 One occurrence of the nut is placed in the assembly. Right-click in thegraphics window, and click Done to finish the placement.

6 Review the name of your part in the assembly browser.

7 Right-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut part, and click iProperties. Then:■ On the General tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Location

field, notice that the part is saved in the My Parts folder.

■ On the Project tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Descriptionfield, notice that your description string is used.

8 To compare properties of your part and the original part from thestandard library, place a member of the JIS B 1169 - Metric family.Then, open the Properties for the JIS B 1169 - Metric part.


Prepare a Part to Publish to Content CenterIn the following exercise, prepare and publish an iPart to a Content Centeruser library. The published iPart is saved as a part family to a selected category.

NOTE Some of the applications (such as Design Accelerator, Frame Generator,Tube and Pipe) require a special authoring and publish procedure. Please refer tothe application help and tutorial for details. Authoring is not discussed in thefollowing exercise.

1 Open Brace.ipt,located in \Tutorial Files\Weldments.

2 Use Save As to create a copy named Brace_copy.ipt.


3 Before you publish, you will create an iPart factory based on this part.The rows in the factory correspond to the Content Center familymembers (size variations) in the published family.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤ Parameters and take note of d0 (part width), d1 (height), and d2(length).

Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center | 509

4 For clarity, rename the parameters. In the Parameter Name column,click d0 and enter a more descriptive name such as channel_width.

5 Rename d1 to channel_height and d2 to channel_length.

6 Click Done to accept the name changes and close the Parameters dialogbox.

7 Click Manage tab ➤ Author panel ➤ Create iPart.

8 In the lower portion of the dialog box, right-click the existing row 1,and then select Insert Row from the context menu.

9 In the new row 2, change the channel_length value to 200 mm, andclick OK.

10 Save the part.



Publish to Content Center1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Content Center panel ➤

Publish Part.

2 The first page of the Publish Guide displays the list of read/write librariesto which you can publish. Ensure that Tutorial Library is selected.

3 Select a language (as required), and click Next.

The list of available categories displays.

4 Select Channels (located under Structural Shapes) from theCategory list, and then click Next.

The category parameters display.

5 Map the part parameters (length, width, and height) to correspondingcategory parameters that exist in the Structural Shapes Channel category.In the Base Length row, click the down arrow in the Please Selectcell, and select the channel_length part parameter. This maps the partparameter channel_length to the required Content Center categoryparameter Base Length.

6 To map the channel height and width, scroll down the CategoryParameters list. In the Shape Height row, click the down arrow in thePlease Select cell and select the channel_height. In the ShapeWidth row, click the down arrow in the Please Select cell, and selectchannel_width.

7 Click Next.

The Define Family Key Columns panel displays.

8 Set the channel_length to be a key column for the family. To do this,select channel_length in the Table Columns list, and click the rightarrow to move the column to the Key Columns list.

Click Next.

9 Set properties for the published part family.■ In the Family Name field, change the name to Sheet Metal

Channel.

■ In the Family Description field, enter My Published Channel.

■ In the Family Folder Name field, enter My Parts.

■ You can leave the other properties blank in this example.

Click Next.

10 Review the default thumbnail image. You can use it in this example.

Publish to Content Center | 511

11 Click Publish to publish the part to Tutorial Library.

12 Click OK to dismiss the message box.

13 Close the file Brace_copy.ipt.


Verify the Published Part1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template.


3 In the Category View panel, expand the Structural Shapes category,and select the Channels category. Locate the Sheet Metal Channelfamily.

4 Double-click the Sheet Metal Channel family.

5 Select the 125-mm member in the channel_length field, and clickApply. An occurrence of the part is placed in the assembly.


6 Right-click in the graphics window and select Done to finish theplacement of the first family member. The family dialog box displaysagain.

7 Select the 200-mm length member, and click OK.

8 Click in the graphics window to place the longer part.

9 Right-click, and select Done.


Verify the Published Part | 513

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Create a Desktop Content user library.

■ Edit the family table for a family from a standard Content Center library.

■ Create a family in a user library by using Save Copy As.

■ Edit family properties of a read/write family.

■ Publish an iPart in a user library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information.

What Next? Add new rows to the family table of the Sheet Metal Channelto create new family members. Then place the new family members to theassembly. Read more about Content Center Editor or Publishing in the Help.Go through Content Center skill builders on the Autodesk Inventor Services& Support web page.

Previous (page 512)


Top-down Workflow

About this tutorial

Create assemblies and components using top-down design.



Seat Adjust Layout.iptTutorial File Used

20

515


In this tutorial, you explore aspects of top-down design for a power car seat.You use a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components. You also change thelayout to demonstrate associativity.

A layout is a 2D sketch within a part file. The 2D sketch uses sketch geometryto represent your design components and configurations. The layout is theroot document of your design, and allows you to control your designassociatively from the top down.

Once your layout has matured, you use the Make Components and MakePart commands to derive selected sketch blocks into new part and assemblyfiles. Associativity is maintained between your layout and the new files sothat your 3D models are updated with changes to their respective sketchblocks. For Make Components, changes you make to the arrangement ofcomponents do not require updates to your 3D models. This powerful featureeliminates unnecessary revisions to your design documents.

This tutorial opens an existing layout part with 2D sketch geometry.

Objectives■ Place and constrain sketch block instances.

■ Derive sketch blocks to new part and assembly files (Make Components).

■ Offset components from the layout plane.

■ Change the layout to demonstrate associativity.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the active project, navigate the model space with the

various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such assketching and extruding.

■ Knowledge of sketch blocks is beneficial.

■ See the Sketch Blocks tutorial and Help topics.




516 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow



Next (page 517)

Get StartedIn this tutorial, the intent is to demonstrate some of the functionality availableto support your top-down design workflow. As such, the tutorial has youcontinue the layout of a motorized car seat near the end of the layout process.The part file already contains the sketch blocks needed so that you can quicklycomplete your layout and move on to the component creation phase. In amore typical design effort, you would have started by creating the layout partand sketch blocks already present in this file.

1 Click ➤ Open.

2 Set the Project File to Tutorial_Files.ipj.

3 Open Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.

NOTE In this tutorial, you save the changes you make to the source tutorial files.If you need to replace the modified files with the original source files, re-install thesource files from your installation software. Alternatively, back-up the sourceTutorial Files directory to another location and access the back-up files asneeded.


Place and Constrain a Sketch Block InstanceAfter you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in themodel browser. Expand Sketch1 to view the sketch block instances. Pausethe cursor over the different sketch block instances to view the associated

Get Started | 517

geometry. You must add a flexible instance of the Screw Rod Assy_Frontblock to complete the layout.

1 In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to open it for edit.

2 Expand Sketch1.

3 Expand the Blocks folder near the top of the browser. This foldercontains all sketch block definitions.

4 Drag the Screw Rod Assy_Front block from the Blocks folder intothe graphics window. It adds an instance of the block to your layout.

5 Right-click the Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 instance, and select Flexible.It exposes the sketch block degrees of freedom such that kinematics canbe demonstrated. Screw Rod Assy_Rear:1 is already set to Flexible.

6 Place coincident constraints, in the order shown, to position ScrewRod Assy_Front:1 in your layout.


Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance | 519

7 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to exit theCoincident Constraint command.


8 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Show All Constraintsto view the constraints between sketch block instances.

9 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints.

The sketch block instances are constrained in the layout. Select and dragdifferent geometry. Note how the layout moves and demonstratesassembly kinematics. Use the Undo command to return the layout tothe default position.

10 Exit the sketch and save your file.


Make ComponentsOnce your layout and sketch blocks have matured, you derive the sketch blockinstances to part and assembly files. The shape of each component is associatedto the corresponding sketch block. The combination of the layout constraintand layout part controls the position of each component within an assembly.

1 In the browser, ensure that Sketch1 is expanded.

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ MakeComponents.

In the Make Components: Selection dialog box, you select the sketchblock instances to derive, and choose whether to place the newcomponents in a target assembly.

3 Select Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. In the dialog box, refer to the selectionbrowser to ensure that Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 is selected. You shouldsee a hierarchy that shows the Screw Rod Assy_Front block definitionas the parent and Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 as the child.

4 Ensure that Insert components in target assembly is checked, andleave Target assembly name as the default. It creates an assembly(Seat Adjust Layout.iam), into which the new components are placed.

Make Components | 521

5 Click Browse next to the Template control. On the Open Templatedialog box, click the Metric tab. Select the Standard (mm).iamtemplate, and click OK.

6 Accept the defaults for the other dialog box settings, and click Next.

The Make Components: Blocks dialog box displays. Since Screw RodAssy_Front is a nested block, it derives to an assembly and the childblocks derive to parts. Note that block definitions, not instances, areshown in the Selected Blocks column. When you select block instancesto derive, you create a component file from the block definition. Thiscomponent file is then instanced into the target assembly to correspondto your selected block instances.

7 To create the component files in metric units, you select the appropriatemetric template. Click Screw Rod Assy_Front under Selected Blocksto highlight the row. With the row highlighted, click Browse at the topof the Template column. On the Open Template dialog box, click theMetric tab, and select Standard (mm).iam.

8 Click OK to accept the metric template selection.

9 Change to the Standard (mm).ipt template for the Connecting Rodand Worm Gear Assy_Front blocks.

NOTE Rather than changing the templates for each block in the MakeComponents dialog box, you can change the default templates. Under theTools tab, Options panel, click Document Settings. Under theModeling tab, click Options in the Make Component Dialog area.In this dialog box, choose the default part and assembly templates for theMake Components command. Since these options reside underDocument Settings, they only apply to the current layout part file.

10 For the component position options, ensure that both options arechecked.

The Create equivalent assembly constraints option translatessketch constraints between blocks into assembly constraints betweencomponents. The Constrain to layout plane option controls locationof the components along the Z axis of the layout part. You can togglethis setting off and on in your assembly file to achieve the appropriateposition of the components relative to the layout plane.

11 Click OK to execute Make Components and close the dialog box.

The target assembly Seat Adjust Layout.iam is created and openedin a window. The Screw Rod Assy_Front component is created andinstanced in the target assembly as Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.


12 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save the fileSeat Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.

NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirmthat you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.

13 The layout part to which your components are constrained, Seat AdjustLayout:1, has visibility turned off. It avoids unnecessary geometry inthe graphics window. Expand the layout part, and pause over Sketch1to view the layout sketch from which you derived the new components.

14 Expand the layout constraint Layout:1. Pause the cursor over XYFlush:1. This constraint is active because the component position optionfor Make Components was set to Constrain to layout plane. Itconstrains Screw Rod Assy:1 to the layout plane.

15 Expand Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 and the associated Layout:1constraint.

16 Right-click on Screw Rod Assy_Front:1, and select LayoutConstraint. Turn off Constrain to Layout Plane. Under theLayout:1 constraint, XY Flush:1 changes to suppressed and ZAngle:1 to enabled. The component is no longer constrained to thelayout plane and can be dragged along the Z axis.

17 Turn on Constrain to layout plane for Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.Observe how the constraints change once again to lock the componentin its current position, offset from the layout plane.

Make Components | 523

NOTE You can change the offset value by selecting the Layout constraintbrowser entry and typing a new value in the browser edit field. Youdemonstrate this behavior in the next exercise.

18 Pause the cursor over various objects under Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.

A layout part Screw Rod Assy_Front_Layout:1 and layout constraintswere also created in the subassembly. For each assembly that is created,a layout part and layout constraints are required to position the assemblycomponents as described by the layout.

19 Expand the subassembly parts Worm Gear Assy_Front:1 andConnecting Rod:1. Pause the cursor over the Flush:1 constraint. Thisconstraint was created by the translation of the collinear sketch constraintinto the equivalent assembly constraint.

20 Click one of the components in the graphics window and drag. Thekinematics of the components were preserved by creation of the Flush:1constraint.

21 Undo the position changes to return the components to their defaultpositions.

22 Save your file.


Offset Components from the Layout PlaneYou can derive additional components from your layout into the same targetassembly and you can position components at different Z axis locations.

1 Go to Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.

2 Edit Sketch1.

You will utilize Make Components from multiple blocks in the nextsteps. To use metric templates for each component, set the defaulttemplates on the Make Components Options dialog box.


3 On the ribbon, click Tools tab ➤ Options panel ➤ DocumentSettings.

4 Under the Modeling tab, click Options in the Make ComponentsDialog area. In this dialog box, set the default part template toStandard (mm).ipt and the default assembly template to Standard(mm).iam. Use Browse to locate the metric templates.

5 Click OK to exit the Make Components Options dialog box.

6 Click OK to exit the Document Settings dialog box.

7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Make Components.

8 In the model browser, select Link Plate:1, Link Plate:2; Seat Pan:1,and Front Pivot Weldment:1.

9 In the Make Components:Selection dialog box, ensure that the targetassembly remains Seat Adjust Layout.iam, and click Next.

10 Click OK. The graphics window changes to Seat Adjust Layout.iam.

Note the addition of the new components in the browser. Pause thecursor over the new components. Link Plate:1 and Link Plate:2appear to be the same geometry because of their XY position. Insubsequent steps, you differentiate the two components with an offsetalong the Z axis.

11 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save SeatAdjust Layout.iam and associated components.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 525

NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirmthat you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.

12 Click Seat Pan:1 and drag. Again, note that the seat kinematics aredemonstrated.

13 Undo the position changes to return the components to their defaultlocations.

14 Currently, all components are constrained to the layout plane. Assumethat the layout plane is the mid-plane of the seat. You can turn offConstrain to layout plane, move the components along the Z axis,then turn on Constrain to layout plane. The flush constraints willbe re-enabled so that the components can only move parallel to thelayout plane. However, now the constraints have an offset value thatcorresponds to their separation distance from the layout plane.

In the browser, expand Link Plate:1, and expand the Layout:2constraint.

15 Right-click Link Plate:1, and select Layout Constraint. Turn offConstrain to layout plane. The XY Flush:2 constraint is suppressedand Z Angle:2 is enabled.

16 Rotate your sketch to view the geometry off-plane.

17 Click Link Plate:1, in the graphics window, and drag in the positiveZ direction. It offsets the components from the layout plane.


18 Turn Constrain to layout plane back on for Link Plate:1. XYFlush:2 is re-enabled and now shows an offset value.

19 Click XY Flush:2.

20 Enter a value of 120 mm in the entry box below the browser, and clickEnter. The component is repositioned 120 mm from the layout plane,or mid-plane, of the seat.

21 Perform the operations required to offset Link Plate:2 from the layoutplane by 116.5 mm in the negative Z direction.

22 The pivot plate components in the Front Pivot Weldment:1subassembly also must be offset from the layout plane. To access thecomponents and constraints, first activate the assembly for edit.

In the browser, double-click Front Pivot Weldment:1.

23 Offset Pivot Plate:1 from the layout plane by 116.5 mm in the positiveZ direction. This component is offset from Link Plate:1 by 3.5 mm toaccount for the link plate thickness.

NOTE The pivot plates may appear to float freely in the Y axis direction whenthey should be constrained by assembly constraints. It is because the assemblyconstraints are between Front Pivot Weldment:1 and other components.When you finish the edit of the Front Pivot Weldment:1, the pivot platepositions update according to the associated constraints.

24 Offset Pivot Plate:3 from the layout plane by 113 mm in the negativeZ direction.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 527

25 Offset Pivot Plate:2 from the layout plane by 84.25 mm in the positiveZ direction.

26 Finish the edit of Front Pivot Weldment:1.

27 Offset Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 from the layout plane by 82.5 mmin the positive Z direction.

28 Save your files.



Add Features and Demonstrate AssociativityThe component instances you have derived establish the base geometry foryour 3D components. After you have derived your components, your nextstep is to add features and further develop the component models. Here, youget started with a basic workflow.

1 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude.

3 Select the Link Plate:1 sketch geometry as shown.

4 Enter 3.5 mm for the extrude distance, and use the flip direction arrowsto extrude in the negative Z direction.

5 Click OK. Link Plate:2 is also updated to reflect the added feature.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 529

6 Finish your edit of Link Plate:1.

7 Double-click Pivot Plate:1, and repeat the steps necessary to extrudethe pivot plates to a thickness of 3.5 mm.

8 Finish your edit of Pivot Plate:1, and save your file.

9 As an exercise, add features to your other component instances to developyour assembly further.


10 After you create your component instances using Make Components,they remain associated to your layout. Changes to the shape of blockinstances are reflected in the corresponding components.

Activate Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.


12 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser. It opens the Link Platesketch block for in-context edits.

13 Change the dimension shown to 13 mm.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 531

14 Exit the block edit, and exit the sketch.

15 Activate Seat Adjust Layout.iam.

16 Click Update at the top of the window. Both Link Plate:1 andLink Plate:2 are updated to reflect the shape change in the Link Plateblock definition.


17 Practice with other changes to your layout to demonstrate the power ofassociativity.

18 Save your files.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Add a block instance and sketch constraints to your layout.

■ Use Make Components to derive sketch blocks to component files.

■ Move components off the layout plane in your target assembly.

■ Add features to new components.

■ Demonstrate the benefits of associativity between your layout andcomponents.

Use of a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components is effective in thetop-down design of your components. Other features in Autodesk Inventor,such as Make Part and multi-body parts, also assist in top-down designworkflows. Check out these features in the “New Features Workshop,” tutorials,and Help.

Previous (page 529)

Summary | 533

534

Substitute Level of DetailRepresentations 21

535

About this tutorial

536 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations

Create substitute level of detail representations in an assembly.



WormGear.iamTutorial File Used


A substitute representation is a type of level of detail representation thatprovides another way to improve assembly performance through reducedmemory use. Memory savings occur anywhere you use the substituterepresentation, such as in drawings or presentations.

There are two different methods you can use to create a substitute level ofdetail representation:■ Substitute an assembly with a derived part created from that assembly.

The derived part is based on a reduced-part level of detail representationcreated in that assembly.

■ Substitute an assembly with any part. This substitution can be a simplifiedpart that you create manually or any other part file on disk.

For both methods, you substitute an assembly with a part. Both methods canprovide significant memory savings.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the

various view tools.

■ Refer to the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.



Next (page 538)




Open sample fileSet your active project to tutorial_files, and then openWormGear ➤ WormGear.iam.

Assume for this exercise that the only critical functional geometries in thisassembly are the two shaft ends and the mounting holes on the gear box part.For clear visual reference, the general shape and appearance of the assemblyare also important. Other internal parts are not needed with respect to howthis assembly might relate to other components in a hosting assembly.


Workflow OverviewBefore you begin, look at the creation steps for the two methods from a “bigpicture” point-of-view.


Derive in-place part method:

1 In the owning assembly, create a reduced-part level of detailrepresentation.

2 In the owning assembly use the New Substitute ➤ Derive Assemblycommand to create a derived part, without leaving the owning assembly,based on the reduced-part representation.

When the command finishes, the part derived from the assembly is the activerepresentation. The substitute level of detail representation is identified in the

browser with the icon.

Part-on-disk method:

1 Create or open a part to use as a substitute.

2 Designate the part as a substitute.

3 In the owning assembly, use the New Substitute ➤ Select Part Filecommand to specify the substitute part for the representation.

Workflow Overview | 539

From an authoring point of view, the derive in-place part method is quickermost of the time. However, from a memory savings point of view, thesimplified part provides more benefit since you have thorough and explicitcontrol of geometric complexity.


Derived In-place Part MethodThe following pages list the detailed steps for the derive in-place part method.

To begin, you need a reduced-part level of detail representation in the owningassembly. The assembly already contains a reduced-part representation namedAll Internals Off.

1 Set the graphics display to Wireframe to see the changes to internalgeometry. For the following image, other adjustments were made torefine the display characteristics using the Application Options dialogbox. It is not necessary to match those adjustments.


2 Expand Representations ➤ Level of Detail, then double-click AllInternals Off to make it the active level of detail representation.

Derived In-place Part Method | 541

3 Right-click the Level of Detail node, then select NewSubstitute ➤ Derive Assembly.


Create the Derived PartNext, you create the derived part in-place.

1 In the New Derived Substitute Part dialog box, enter DerivedSubstitute in the New Component Name field.

2 Use the default part template.

3 Use the default file location, which is the project workspace.

4 Click OK to open the Derived Assembly dialog box.

By default, the derived assembly uses the active level of detailrepresentation to determine the included components and features.Select the Representations tab and notice that All Internals Off is specifiedin the Level of Detail menu. In your regular workflow, you could alsomake further adjustments in the Derived Assembly dialog box, as needed.


5 Click OK.

The derived part is created, and the new substitute level of detailrepresentation is automatically set as Active.


The Substitute Representation1 Change the name of the substitute representation to Derived

Substitute.

The assembly browser shows only the derived part while the substituterepresentation is active. In addition, the name of the subassembly withthe active substitute level of detail representation is listed next to theowning assembly browser node.

2 Save and close the assembly.


The Substitute Representation | 543

Use the Substitute RepresentationUse the new substitute level of detail representation in an assembly.

1 Create an assembly document.

2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Place.

3 Select (but do not open yet) WormGear.iam.

4 Click Options.

5 Ensure that Derived Substitute is selected in the Level of DetailRepresentation menu.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Open, and place one occurrence of WormGear.iam in theassembly. The substitute level of detail representation is active in theWormGear subassembly.

8 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate thefollowing image. Set the graphics to Wireframe Display.

9 Save the assembly using the default file name.


When you save, the program prompts you to save a user-named level ofdetail representation for the top-level assembly (the consuming assembly).

10 Use the default name for the representation.

The consuming assembly is Assembly(#).iam. A consuming assembly is anassembly that contains a subassembly that owns an active substitute level ofdetail representation.

The owning assembly is WormGear:1. The owning assembly is the assemblywhere the substitute level of detail representation is defined and active. Noticethat the active level of detail representation is listed next to the browser node.


Compare Memory UsageThis sample assembly is small. If it was larger, you would notice a time savingsplacing the component with a substitute level of detail representation active,compared to a representation with all components active, or even a level ofdetail representation with some components suppressed. Notice the CapacityMeter lists only three documents open: the top-level assembly, the WormGear,and the Derived Substitute derived part.

1 Expand WormGear ➤ Representations ➤ Level of Detail, anddouble-click the All Internals Off representation. With thisrepresentation active, eight documents are open.

2 Double-click the Master representation. With this representation, 25documents are open. Beyond the reduced document count, because thederived part has a smaller file size than the sum of its parts, you realizefurther memory savings.


Part-on-disk MethodIn the following steps, you create a substitute level of detail representationusing a supplied, manually created substitute part. The derived part you createdearlier created a significant savings in relative memory consumption. The

Compare Memory Usage | 545

simplified substitute can consume less memory than the derived part,depending on the number of features of the part.

1 In the assembly document, right-click the WormGear subassembly inthe browser, and then select Open.

2 Save the assembly.

3 Expand the Representations folder, right-click the Level of Detailnode, and then select New Substitute ➤ Select Part File.

4 Select single_part.ipt.

5 Click Open.

A message states the part will be designated as a substitute, and that alllinks to external references for the part will be disabled.

6 Click Yes.

The substitute level of detail representation is created and automaticallyset as the active level of detail representation.

7 Rename this representation Simple Part Substitute.

8 Save and close the WormGear.iam assembly.



Create the Substitute RepresentationIn the assembly you created, under the WormGear subassembly, double-clickSimple Part Substitute to set it as the active substitute level of detailrepresentation.

This simplified representation contains only geometry necessary to interfacewith assembly constraints, and enough geometry to visually approximate theactual assembly.

This is the end of the workflow portion of the tutorial.


Guidelines for Creating a Substitute PartAny part that you use for a substitute level of detail representation must bedesignated (tagged) as a substitute part. A part tagged as a substitute uses the

icon at the top-level node in the part file. (The icon is also used torepresent a substitute part in Vault.) In the preceding workflow, single_part.ipt

Create the Substitute Representation | 547

was automatically designated as a substitute when you selected and openedthe part for the substitute level of detail representation.

To mark a part as a substitute while you are in the part file, right-click thetop-level part node, and select Substitute. As in the preceding workflow, amessage states the part will be designated as a substitute. All links to externalreferences for the part will be disabled.

You can also specify that a substitute part is no longer a substitute, as long asthe part is not currently used in an active substitute level of detailrepresentation. Right-click the top-level part node, and remove the checkmark next to Substitute. The program restores links to any externalreferences.

When you create a simplified substitute part, it is good practice to structurethe part geometry such that the part origin and coordinates match the originand coordinates of the assembly it substitutes. It ensures that the substitutepart is oriented like the assembly when you create the substitute representation.



SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a part derived

from the owning assembly.

■ Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a manuallycreated simplified part.

■ Specify and activate a substitute level of detail representation as you placea subassembly into an assembly.

■ Activate a substitute level of detail representation in an assembly.

This tutorial demonstrated the workflow steps to create and use substitutelevel of detail representations. There are various other behaviors and items ofinterest to note with this functionality. Consult Help for further detailedinformation.

Summary | 549

Previous (page 547)


Presentations

About this tutorial

22

551

Create exploded views in Autodesk Inventor drawings with presentation files.



Cylinder Clamp.iamCylinder Clamp.idw

Tutorial File Used


The assembly explosions you create within Inventor Studio cannot be placedas drawing views in IDW or DWG drawing files. Use presentations instead.

To begin, you open the supplied Cylinder Clamp dataset, and create apresentation file from the default (mm) template.

Objectives■ Place a view.

■ Manually explode the assembly.

■ Place the exploded view on a drawing sheet.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Parts 2, Assemblies, and Drawings tutorials.




Next (page 552)

Get Started1 Set your project to tutorial_files.

552 | Chapter 22 Presentations



2 Click ➤ Open.

3 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤ Cylinder Clamp.iam in the Open dialogbox, and click Open.

4 Click ➤ New.

5 Select Standard(mm).ipn from the Metric tab, and click OK. Anempty Presentation file is opened, and the Presentation tab displaysin the ribbon.

6 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create

View , or right-click and select Create View from the markingmenu.

The Select Assembly dialog box displays with the previously openedCylinder Clamp assembly selected.

Notice in the Explosion Method area of the dialog box that Manualis selected by default. This method is probably the method you will usemost often. An Automatic explode option can also be selected. TheAutomatic method requires that you supply a distance value. Allcomponents within the selected assembly will be exploded that distanceusing any previously defined assembly constraints.

Get Started | 553

This automatic explode technique is useful in a limited number of casesor as a beginning point for subsequent manual edits. This tutorial usesthe Manual explode method.

7 Click OK in the Select Assembly dialog box. The cylinder clamp assemblyis placed in the Presentation file.

Manually exploding an assembly requires the application of “Tweaks” tocomponents or groups of components. Creating Tweaks is covered followinga brief discussion about color.


A Word about Color

Autodesk Inventor is delivered with an abundance of predefined materials.Each material definition consists of a physical asset which includes propertiessuch as Density, Yield Strength, Tensile Strength, and so on. A materialdefinition also includes an Appearance asset. Appearance assets come in avariety of types, each type having properties relative to the type. You cancreate new or duplicate existing appearances and modify these to meet yourneeds.


Each part that you model with Inventor inherits a material from the templateyou use when you begin your design.

During the design process, you can elect to assign specific appearances to apart and you can elect to override the appearance of the part within anassembly. These options can aid in the design process by highlighting areasof focus. All hydraulic components might have a blue appearance in oneassembly representation while all components purchased from a specificvendor might have a green appearance in another.

The appearances used during the design process may not represent the actualappearance of the completed design. For the purposes of presentations andrenderings intended for customers or marketing, alternative appearances maybe explored.

The images used in this tutorial are based on an alternative appearance schemefor the Cylinder Clamp assembly.

The appearances have no impact on the results you will achieve in this tutorial.


A Word about Color | 555

Create TweaksYour view should appear oriented as shown in the following image. Use Orbitto adjust your view as required.

A tweak can be a straight move along a single direction axis, or it can be acombination of straight moves along the X, Y, and Z direction axes. Tweakscan optionally leave a visible “Trail”.

1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Tweak

Components , or right-click and select Tweak Componentsfrom the marking menu.

The Tweak Component dialog box displays. To create a tweak, you mustdefine a direction, select components to move, and provide a distance.When the Tweak Component dialog box is first displayed, the Directionbutton is active.


2 In the graphics window, move your cursor over various components(without clicking) within the assembly and notice the direction axistriad. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base as shown.

Notice that the Z axis points outwards (away from the face). The Y axispoints upwards. The X axis points in what would be the positivehorizontal direction.

3 Click to select this direction orientation. Notice that the direction axistriad changes color after you select the face. Also, the Z axis button inthe Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box isselected.

NOTE The direction axes depend upon the selected geometry. By selectingan angled edge of (any) component, you can manually explode using theselected edge as the Z axis of the direction triad. Notice how the X, Y andZ axes differ in the illustration based on the selection of: 1) face, 2) edge or3) edge.

Create Tweaks | 557

You will now move the purchased air cylinder upwards as your firsttweak.

4 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the TweakComponent dialog box. Notice that the Y axis of the direction triadchanges color in the graphics window.

By default, the Z axis is active, and you must move the cylinder upwardsalong the Y axis. Your first step is to change the transformation direction.

5 Select the Cylinder Body subassembly in the Model browser. To do so,first click the + next to the Explosion1 node located directly under thetop Cylinder Clamp node.

6 Next, click the + to the left of the Cylinder Clamp.iam assembly nodeto see the components of the assembly.

7 In the Model browser, move your cursor over the component nameCylinder Body Sub_Assy. Notice the red rectangle that highlights thetext. When the text highlights, click to select the subassembly.

8 Move your cursor over an empty space in the graphics window, thenclick and drag your cursor up (towards the top edge of the window).


Notice that:

■ The selected subassembly moves along the selected Y direction axiswhile you are dragging.

■ A graphical “trail” appears between the original position of thecomponent and its current position.

■ The transformation distance value in the Tweak Component dialogbox also increments as you drag.

9 Stop dragging (release the mouse button), and move your cursor overthe transformation value field in the Tweak Component dialog box.

10 Double-click on the field to edit the value. Type 100, and press the Enterkey on your keyboard to move the subassembly precisely 100 mm alongthe Y axis from its original position.

11 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box.

The dialog box is then reset for a new tweak.

You will next move the clamp in the X direction.


Create Tweaks | 559

Tweak Clamp.ipt1 After completing the previous exercise, the Direction button is again

active. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base previouslyselected, and click to select it.

2 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the TweakComponent dialog box. Notice that the X axis of the direction triadchanges color in the graphics window.

3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over Clamp.ipt. (shown assolid in the illustration for identification purposes only. The othercomponents will not change to translucent).


4 When the part highlights, click and drag it towards the left side of thegraphics window.

You will next move the retaining ring outwards along the axis of the pin.


Tweak the Retaining Ring1 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box. The Direction button

is again active.

Tweak the Retaining Ring | 561

2 Move your cursor over the pin that was exposed when you moved theclamp.

3 When the pin highlights, click to define the direction axis.

4 In this case, you want to move the retaining ring along the Z axis (thedefault active transformation axis). Click both retaining rings to select,and then drag both to the left side of the view.

5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box.


Notice that the trail for the retaining ring that was farthest away doesnot perfectly overlap the longer trail.

6 Click the + next to the Model browser node for ANSI B 27.7M3AMI-7:1.

7 Right-mouse click the Tweak entry in the Model browser, and selectVisibility. The check mark is removed, the browser entry displays asunavailable, and the displayed trail in the graphics window is no longervisible.

8 Click ➤ Save. By default, the Presentation file created hasthe same name as the assembly that was placed initially. Presentationfiles have the IPN file type extension. Your file is named CylinderClamp.ipn.

Next, you will place the exploded view that you just created onto a new sheet.You will create the sheet in the assembly drawing you edited in the Drawingstutorial.


Place an Exploded View on a Drawing

1 Click ➤ Open.

2 Select the Cylinder Clamp.idw drawing that was saved during theDrawings tutorial.

3 Right-mouse click on the Cylinder Clamp.idw node at the top of theModel browser, and click New Sheet on the pop-up context menu.

4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base, orright-click and select Base View from the marking menu. The DrawingView dialog box displays.

5 By default, Cylinder Clamp.iam displays in the File name field. Clickthe down arrow at the right side of the field and select CylinderClamp.ipn from the drop-down list.

6 Next, click Current in the Orientation area of the Drawing Viewdialog box.

7 Click the drawing sheet to place the exploded view.

Place an Exploded View on a Drawing | 563

8 Right-click and select Done [Esc] to finish placing additional views.

9 Click ➤ Save.


Edit the Explosion1 Activate Cylinder Clamp.ipn for edit.

Since Cylinder Clamp.ipn is still open, there are several methods thatcan be used to return to the file for edit:

■ If individual windows are open within Autodesk Inventor, click thewindow border of the IPN file.

■ Click the Cylinder Clamp.ipn tab along the lower edge of theapplication.

■ Click the Open Documents up arrow along the lower edge of theapplication, and select Cylinder Clamp.ipn from the list of opendocuments.

You will now add a Tweak to your Presentation that contains somedirection changes.


2 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ TweakComponents, or right-click and select Tweak Components from themarking menu.

3 Click the face previously used to define direction.

4 Click the Lock Pin instance that appears closest to you in the view.

Edit the Explosion | 565

5 Drag the pin out (towards the left) some distance.

6 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the first segmentof the trail.

7 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the TweakComponent dialog box.

8 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag the cursor down towardsthe bottom of the view some distance.

9 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the secondsegment of the trail.

10 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the TweakComponent dialog box.

11 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag down towards thebottom right side of the view some distance.

12 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the thirdsegment of the trail.

13 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box. Your view shouldappear like the following image:


14 Click ➤ Save.


Edit the Explosion | 567

Associative Drawing View1 Return to the open drawing file using the steps discussed in the beginning

of the previous exercise.

Notice that the latest tweak is reflected in the exploded drawing view.

You will next apply a rotational tweak to a component in thePresentation file.

2 Return to the open Presentation file using the steps you have learned.


Rotational Tweaks1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Tweak

Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from themarking menu.

2 Define your Direction axes by clicking the vertical edge of Clamp.iptas shown:


3 Select Rotate Axis in the Transformations area of the TweakComponent dialog box.

4 Click and drag in the graphics window to rotate the clamp. Alternatively,enter a precise angle value in the field to the right of Rotate Axis, andpress Enter to rotate the clamp by the entered value.

Rotational Tweaks | 569

5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box.

6 It is possible to delete individual tweaks. In the Model browser, click the+ to the left of Clamp.ipt to display the two tweaks that have beenapplied to the clamp.

7 Right-mouse click the second tweak, and select Delete from the pop-upcontext menu. The rotational tweak that you just created is deleted fromyour Presentation, and Clamp.ipt returns to the position it occupiedbefore the application of the tweak.

8 Save and close each of the three open files.



Summary

Exploded views of assemblies are often required. Autodesk Inventor utilizesPresentation files to create exploded views that can be placed into Inventordrawings.■ Exploded views can be created automatically using a supplied value.

However, they most often require subsequent manipulation. Creatingexploded views manually is usually more efficient.

■ Components are exploded by applying “tweaks.” They can be a simpletransformation along a single axis or a combination of moves in variousdirections.

■ Tweaks can leave visible “trails.” They can be displayed or not displayed.

■ Tweaks also provide rotate capabilities.

Summary | 571

■ Tweaks can be deleted which returns the component to the positionoccupied before the application of the tweak.

What Next? Exploded assembly views can be output as animations from thePresentation file. Explore the animation capabilities by clicking Animate onthe Create panel of the Presentation tab. Animations created by this methodcannot be rendered or manipulated with as much control as is possible usingInventor Studio. Explore the animation capabilities offered by Inventor Studioby completing the Studio - Animations tutorial.

Previous (page 568)


Plastic Parts and Fea-tures

About this tutorial

Create a plastic component to explore multi-bodies and plastic features.



PFTutorial.iptControl_Button_Solid.ipt

Tutorial File Used

23

573

PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.iptPFTutorial_Complete.ipt (finished version)


Create a plastic case for a hand-held music device using the basics ofmulti-body and plastic feature functionality in Inventor. Automate the creationand editing of common plastic part features.

A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiplesolid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially usefulin the design of plastic parts.

A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships andprojected edges between parts. All editing takes place in a single file. At anytime, you can generate unique part files for each body. The generated files arederived parts that are associative to the master design in the original part file.

If you do not want to learn how to use the plastic features commands, use thefile PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt as a start point. Begin the tutorial at thesection titled Insert a toolbody using Derive.

Before you begin, open and review the supplied plastic part. To simplify theprocess of body and feature creation, the tutorial part sketches, work planes,and surfaces are named to help you identify them.

574 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features



You can complete the tutorial in segments if you save your work before youexit.

Objectives■ Create new bodies using Split.

■ Create grills, rule fillets, rests, and lip features.

■ Create snap fits and bosses.

■ Create a body in place using feature commands.

■ Insert a toolbody using Derive.

■ Use Move Bodies to position a toolbody.

■ Use Combine to perform a Boolean operation.

Prerequisites■ Intermediate level of understanding part modeling.


■ Activate the Tutorials.ipj project file.




Next (page 576)

Split the SolidTo begin:

1 Open Tutorial Files ➤ Plastic Parts and Features ➤ PFTutorial.ipt, and orient the view to match the following image.

2 In the browser, expand the folders for the solid and surface bodies.Note that there is only one solid body present and four surface bodies.One of the surface bodies is visible, and all the others are not visible.


3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Shell. Do notremove any faces. For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm. Click OK to create.

The following cutaway image shows the results of the shell operation.The cut is not part of the model.

4 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Split. In the dialog box,choose the Split Solid option. Select the surface namedPartingSurface as the Split Tool. Click OK to finish.

Notice that the part icon in the browser changed to represent amulti-body part. The Solid Bodies folder contains two bodies. You canright-click each body and select Properties from the context menu toset visibility or appearance.

Split the Solid | 577

NOTE We recommend that you assign a unique appearance to each bodyin a multi-body part to keep them visually separate. Select each body in theSolid Bodies folder in the browser, and then right-click and selectProperties from the context menu. You can also select a body and thenchoose an appearance override in the Quick Access toolbar dropdown toset the appearance.

Before proceeding, expand the Surface Bodies folder. and turn off thevisible surface.

Save the file as PFTutorial_1.


Create the GrillIn the next section, we will create the plastic grill feature.

1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of GrillSketch.


2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Plastic Part panel ➤ Grill.

3 Activate the Boundary tab and then select the outer closed profile inthe graphics window as shown in the following image. Select the targetsolid if the application did not select the body closest to the sketch.

■ Thickness = 0 mm

■ Height = 2 mm

Create the Grill | 579

■ Outside Height = 0 mm

We will skip the Island tab. This sketch does not contain a closedboundary for an island. The following image shows an example of anisland.

4 Activate the Rib tab and then select the lines.


■ Thickness = 2.5 mm

■ Height = 1.3 mm

■ Top Offset = 0.2 mm

5 Activate the Spar tab and then select the arcs.

Create the Grill | 581

■ Top Offset = 0.5 mm

■ Thickness = 5 mm

■ Bottom Offset = 0 mm

6 Click OK to create the grill.



Create a Rule FilletWe now want to fillet all the vertical edges of the grill like the one indicatedin the following image.

The Rule Fillet feature is designed to fillet an entire feature based onpre-determined rules. It means we can fillet the entire grill without having topick individual edges.

Create a Rule Fillet | 583

In the following sequence, we will define the rules which allows the entiregrill to be filleted in a few picks.

1 In the browser, turn off the Visibility of the bottom solid without thegrill. Rotate the part with the grill feature to the inside face of the solid.

TIP The context menu contains three commands to control body display:Visibility, Show All, and Hide Others.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Plastic Part panel ➤ RuleFillet.■ Use the Source drop-down to set the source to Face.

■ Select the inside curved face of the grill as shown in the followingimage.

■ Set the Radius to 0.5 mm.

■ Set the Rule to Incident Edges.

■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder to specify the direction.

■ Set the Tolerance to 1 deg.


3 Click OK. You created 128 fillets using rules and a couple of picks.

NOTE The Rule Fillet can be used on any feature in a part file. It is not exclusivelyfor use with plastic parts.


Create a Rule Fillet | 585

Create a RestWe now want to build a flat area for some control buttons.

1 Orient the view to the outside of the part as shown in the followingimage.

2 Turn on the visibility of RestSketch in the browser.

3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Plastic Part panel ➤ Rest.

4 On the Shape tab:■ Select the RestSketch as the profile. If it is the only visible sketch

it is automatically selected.

■ If required, select the top solid as the Solid.

■ For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm and specify Inside.

■ In the drop-down, select Through All.

5 On the More tab:■ For Landing Options, select Distance and enter 0 mm.

■ For Landing Taper, enter 0 deg.

■ For Clearance Taper, enter 0 deg.

6 Click OK to create the Rest feature.



Create a LipWe will now build a lip-groove combination to facilitate placing the matingparts in a physical assembly. Orient the view to the inside of the part like thefollowing image.

1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Plastic Part panel ➤ Lip.

2 Make sure the Lip button is selected in the dialog box.

3 On the Shape tab:■ Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

■ Leave the Path Extents unchecked.

■ Click the Pull Direction check box.

■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder as the pulling direction.

Create a Lip | 587

4 On the Lip tab:■ For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

■ For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg.

■ For Height, enter 1 mm.

■ For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm.

■ For Width, enter 0.75 mm.

■ For Clearance, enter 0.5 mm.

5 Click OK to create the lip.


6 In the Solid Bodies folder in the browser, use the context menu to turnoff the Visibility of the top body. Turn on the visibility for the bottombody. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the following image.

Next, we will use the Lip command to create the mating groove.

7 Click the Lip command.

Create a Lip | 589

8 On the Shape tab:■ Make sure the Groove button is selected.

■ Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

■

Leave the Path Extents unchecked.

■ Click the Pull Direction check box.

■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder.


9 On the Groove tab:■ For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.


■ For Height, enter 1 mm.



■ For Clearance, enter 0 mm.

Create a Lip | 591

10 Click OK to create the groove.

The mating lip and groove features are shown in the following cutawayview.



Create a Body Using SplitWe will now build a sliding cover for the battery compartment. If it is visible,turn off the visibility for the top body.

1 In the Surface Bodies folder, turn on the Visibility of Srf2. Notethat enabling this surface also turned on the visibility of the stitchedBatterySplitSurface in the browser. You can also enable the surfacevisibility by selecting BatterySplitSurface in the browser.

Create a Body Using Split | 593

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Split.

3 Choose the Split Solid option in the dialog box.

4 Choose Srf2 as the Split Tool, and the bottom body as the Solid tosplit.

5 Click OK to finish.

6 A new body is created. Turn off the Visibility of the bottom bodyand Srf2 (BatterySplitSurface) before proceeding.



Create a Segmented LipOrient the view to match the following image. We will use the Lip commandto create a lip-groove combination on one side of the battery cover limitedby two planes.

1 Create two work planes parallel to the planar side faces of the batterycover offset -15 mm to the inside.

2 Click the Lip command.

3 On the Shape tab, make sure the Lip button is selected.■ Select the internal edges on the far side of the curve as the Path

Edges.

■ Select the Guide Face option, and pick the planar face next to theselected edge.

■ Leave the Pull Direction unchecked.

■ Check the Path Extents box, and select the two planes.

The preview shows the portions of the Lip that are selected (first andlast). If the preview matches the following image, the selection iscorrect. If it does not match the preview, click the green and yellowdots to change the selection.

Create a Segmented Lip | 595

4 On the Lip tab:■ For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.


■ For Height, enter 0.8 mm.




5 Click OK to create the lip.


The work planes are not shown in the following image. Leave thevisibility of the work planes on to create the mating lip feature on thebottom body.

6 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover, and turn on the Visibilityof the bottom body.

We will now create the mating groove for the battery cover on the bottombody.

7 Click the Lip command.■ On the Shape tab, click Groove.

■ Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

■ Select the Guide Face, and pick the planar face next to the edge.

■ Leave the Pull Direction box blank.

■ Click the Path Extents check box and select the two limiting planes.The default selection of the two outer groove segments is correct.


8 On the Groove tab:■ For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.


■ For Height, enter 0.8 mm.





9 Click OK to create the groove feature. Turn off the Visibility of thework planes.

The following image shows the lip and groove features in a cutaway viewof the battery cover and the lower body.



Create a Snap FitWe will now build a retention mechanism on the battery cover with the SnapFit feature. Turn off the Visibility for the lower body and turn on theVisibility for the battery cover.

First, we will create the two positioning points for the snap feature.

1 Start a 2D sketch on the flat wall of the narrow face, as indicated inthe following image. Make sure that the internal edge is projected so thesketch points are able to be coincident with the edge.

2 Place two sketch points on the internal projected edge, and usedimensions to locate them 7.5 mm from the sides. In the followingimage, the second dimension is linked to the first dimension. You canalso place two independent dimensions (no fx on the dimension).


4 Click the Snap Fit command.

5 Select the Cantilever Snap Fit Loop style.

6 On the Shape tab:■ Select the battery cover as the Solid. If it is the only visible solid, it

is automatically selected.

■ Select From Sketch as the Placement type.


■ Select the two sketch points as the Centers. If they are the onlysketch points displayed, they are automatically selected.

■ Click the Flip direction arrow and the Catch direction manipulatorarrows in the graphics area until the clips are oriented as shown inthe following image.

7 On the Clip tab.■ For Clip length, enter 4 mm.

■ For Clip width, enter 5 mm.

■ For Clip thickness at wall, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Clip thickness at top, enter 0.3 mm.

Create a Snap Fit | 601

8 On the Catch tab:■ For Catch width on both sides, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Catch opening length, enter 2 mm.

■ For Catch width at top, enter 0.5 mm.

■


9 Click OK to create clips.

A trap mechanism on the bottom solid can be modeled by creating a 2Dsketch on the inside face of the bottom body and using the projectededges of the catch features to create an extrusion. Fillets are added to theextrusion in this image to facilitate cover insertion and removal.

The steps to create the trap feature are not covered in this exercise.

Create a Snap Fit | 603



Add a Rule Fillet to a FeatureWe now want to fillet the edges at the intersection between the Snap Fit andthe battery cover solid. A Rule Fillet can do the job.

1 Click the Rule Fillet command.■ For Source, select Feature.

■ Select the Snap Fit feature.

■ For Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For Rule, select Against Part.

Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature | 605

We do not want the fillet around the top edges (red arrows). The edgesare included because they share the curved face of the Snap Fit thatcoincides with the curved face of the battery body. They are called"merged faces." We can skip such merged faces (and all the edges theyshare) by doing the following:

2 Click More to expand the dialog box.

3 Check the Remove Merged Faces box to enable the option.

4 Click OK to create the rule fillet. Both clips are filleted since they bothbelong to the same feature.

5 Save the file.



Create a BossThis exercise consists of two procedures: creating screw mounting bosses onthe top and bottom bodies, and then creating mating bosses for the threadportion of the fasteners.

Create a Boss | 607

First, we use work points to model the screw mounting bosses on the top andbottom bodies.

1 Turn on the Visibility of the bottom body and Work Points 1-4. Thework points are located at the termination position of each boss.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Plastic Part panel ➤ Boss.

3 Make sure that the Head button is selected.

4 On the Shape tab:■ In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

■ Select the four work points as the Centers.

■ For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrowsdo not point towards the body.

■ For the target Solid, select the bottom solid.

■ For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.


5 On the Head tab:■ For Wall Thickness, enter 1.5 mm.

■ For Shank Height, enter 1.5 mm.

■ For Clamp Height, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Shank Diameter, enter 3 mm.

■ For Clamp Diameter, enter 7 mm.

■ For Head Diameter, enter 8 mm.

■ For Draft Options, enter 2.5 deg in each field.

Create a Boss | 609

■ Select the Counterbore type.

6 Skip the Ribs tab.

7 Click OK to create the four bosses.


8 Rotate the body to see the recess for the screw head.

Create a Boss | 611

Next, we build the mating bosses for the thread portion of the fasteners.

1 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover and the bottom solid, andturn on the Visibility of the top solid.

2 Click the Boss command.


3 Make sure that the Thread button is selected.

4 On the Shape tab:■ In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

■ Select the four work points as the Centers.

■ For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrowsdo not point towards the body.

■ For the target Solid, select the top.

■ For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.

5 On the Thread tab:■ Ensure that Hole is selected, and select Full Depth from the

drop-down menu.

■ For Thread Diameter, enter 8 mm.

■ For Thread Hole Diameter, enter 3 mm.

■ For Inner Draft Angle, enter 1 deg.

■ For Outer Draft Angle, enter 2 deg.

6 On the Ribs tab:■ Ensure that Stiffening Ribs is selected, and select 2 ul from the

drop-down menu.

■ Fro Rib Thickness, enter 1.5 mm.

■ For Rib Draft, enter 1.5 deg.

■ For Shoulder Length, enter 6 mm.

Create a Boss | 613

■ For Top Offset, enter 2 mm.

■ For Shoulder Radius, enter 1 mm.

■ For Shoulder Flare Angle, enter 10 deg.

7 Expand Fillet Options on the Ribs tab:■ For Rib Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For Blend Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For the Ribs Start Direction Angle, enter 0.

■ For Direction, select the X Axis in the Origin folder.


8 Click OK to create the four bosses with stiffening ribs.

Create a Boss | 615

The following image shows a cutaway view of a boss.

9 If you didn’t change the body appearances earlier in the exercise,right-click each body in the browser, and then select Properties fromthe context menu. Assign a unique body appearance in the BodyAppearance drop-down menu.

10 Save the file.

The plastic features portion of this tutorial is complete.



Add Holes to a Single BodyIn the next section, we create new holes in a single body using the Holecommand.

1 Turn off the Visibility of all solid bodies except the top cover.

2 Create two 10-mm holes with a depth of 2 mm on the ends of the restfeature.

3 Create one 20-mm hole with a depth of 2 mm at the center of the restfeature.

Notice Autodesk Inventor selects the body being referenced as the defaultparticipant.

NOTE To add participants to the Hole operation, use the Solids selectorand pick additional bodies. An example of this could be if you want multiplebodies to participate in a “Through All” operation.


Insert a Toolbody Using DeriveYou can create solid bodies within a part file and use them as toolbodies inthe Combine command for a cut, join, or intersect operation. You can alsouse another component placed in the part file using the Derive command.

Add Holes to a Single Body | 617

We will now use the Derive command to import another part file to use asa cutting tool later in the exercise.

NOTE If you skipped the plastic features sections, you can open the filePFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt and begin the tutorial here.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ Derive.

2 In the file open dialog box, select the file Control_Button_Solid.ipt.

3 In the Derived Part dialog box, you can select any of the solid bodyoptions, but do not select the surface feature option.

NOTE If the component you are inserting is an assembly, and you chooseto maintain each solid as a solid body, the result is multiple bodies in theSolid Bodies folder.

4 Click OK to finish.

5 The new body is inserted in the part. Rotate the part to view the newbody.


Moving BodiesIn this section, we will use the Move Bodies command to position thetoolbody accurately we imported.


The drop-down menu in the Move Bodies dialog box offers three methods formoving a body:■ Free drag (default) - Use to drag the selection in any direction or specify

precise x,y,z values.

■ Move along ray - Axial move only. Use to drag or specify a precise valuealong an axis.

■ Rotate about line - Use to drag the selection or specify a precise anglearound a central axis.

1 View the part from the side to expose the toolbody.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move Bodies.

3 Select the imported body as the body to move.

4 The body shows a 10 mm offset in the preview. Do not drag the preview.

5 Input the following values:■ For X Offset, enter 35 mm.

■ For Y Offset, enter 0 mm.

■ For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

6 Select Click to add, and input the following values:■ For X Offset, enter 0 mm.

■ For Y Offset, enter 24 mm.

■ For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

7 Click OK to move the body and exit the command.

Moving Bodies | 619

NOTE Move Body appears in the browser as a feature, and the move wascalculated as a single feature. Using Click to add consumes the leastamount of resources as opposed to doing multiple moves as individualfeatures. You can edit, delete, or suppress individual body moves.


Use the Combine CommandThe Combine command provides a means to perform Boolean operationswithin a part file. In this exercise, we will use the imported toolbody to cutout a portion of the upper body.

1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Combine.

2 Select the upper body as the Base.

3 Select the imported body as the Toolbody. Make sure that KeepToolbody is unchecked.

NOTE You can select more than one body to use as toolbodies. The numberin parentheses indicates the total number of selected toolbodies. If KeepToolbody is unchecked, the toolbody is consumed and cannot be usedfor further operations. If it is checked, the toolbody is available for furtheroperations.

4 Select the Cut operation.

5 Click OK to cut the toolbody from the top cover and finish thecommand.



Create a Body Using RevolveIn this exercise, we use the Revolve command to create a body in the partfile.

1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of the Revolve_NewBody sketch.

2 Start the Revolve command, and select the profile and axis if necessary.

3 Select New Solid as the modeling operation to perform.

4 Click OK to finish the command and create the solid.

5 Select the new body in the browser, and change the body appearance.


Create a Body Using Revolve | 621

Export the Design as Individual PartsA multi-body part is a single part file. While it is a great way to control adesign, you cannot create a parts list for the bodies in a multi-body part. Youcan use the Make Part or the Make Components command to exportbodies as part files.

In this final segment, we will use the Make Components command to exportall the bodies as derived parts into an assembly.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ MakeComponents.

2 Select all four of the solid bodies for export. You can select the bodiesin the graphics area or in the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. Makesure that all bodies to be exported are visible.

NOTE Pay attention to which body highlights as you add selections. It helpsyou to assign the proper part names when you export them.

3 Assign the target assembly a unique name. Leave all the other selectionsat the default settings and select Next to continue.

4 Assign each body a new part name.

5 If you completed the tutorial in sequence:

■ The first body is the top cover

■ The second body is the battery cover

■ The third body is the bottom cover

■ The fourth body is the revolved control button.

6 Click OK to create the assembly.

The assembly opens in a new window. All the bodies are present in thebrowser as grounded part files.


The part file controls the master design. If changes are made to a bodyin the originating part file, the part will update in the assembly.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you:■ Used Split to create new bodies.

Summary | 623

■ Created plastic features using the Plastic Part commands.

■ Used the Hole command to modify a single body.

■ Inserted a toolbody using the Derive command.

■ Used the Move Bodies command to position a body.

■ Used the Combine command to perform a cut operation on a body.

■ Created a body in place using the Revolve command.

■ Used Make Components to export bodies into an assembly as individualpart files.

Previous (page 622)


Studio - Renderings

About this tutorialRender models in Studio.



Tutorial File Used


Objectives

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,





Next (page 626)

24

625



Get StartedPrevious (page 625) | Next (page 626)

Activate StudioOn the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤ Begin panel ➤ Inventor

Studio.


Render1 On the ribbon, click Render tab ➤ Render panel ➤ Render Image.

2 Ensure that Current View is selected on the Camera menu.

NOTE Because the aspect ratio of your current window may not agree withthe aspect ratio defined for your rendering, Autodesk Inventor draws arectangle in the graphics window showing the area to be rendered. You canadjust your view before creating your rendering.

3 Ensure Table Top is selected on the Lighting Style menu.

4 Click Render. The program renders the model according to the chosenstyles and the size of the model relative to the render area.

When rendering finishes, close the Render Output window.


626 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings

Change Styles

1 In the Render Image dialog box, click Select Output Sizeand then select 640 x 480 from the Resolution menu. You can adjustthe size and view of the model to fit within the render rectangle, asneeded.

2 Select Desktop from the Lighting Style drop-down menu.

3 On the Output tab, select High Antialiasing, and click Render.

The Render process takes some time. If you do not want to wait for themodel to complete the rendering process, click Cancel Rendering.

You can specify different cameras, lighting, and scene styles for renderingfrom the Render dialog box. It is not necessary to activate them.

4 Close the Render Output and Render Image dialog boxes when finished.


Change AppearanceNext, you change the appearance of the arbor press frame.

1 Select the Arbor_Frame component in the graphics window or browser,and then select Aluminum (Cast) from the Appearance Overridepulldown list. The list is located at the top of the Autodesk Inventorwindow in the Quick Access Toolbar and shows the current appearanceselection.

2 Click Render Image.

3 Select 320 x 240 from the Resolution menu.

4 Select the Output tab, and then change the Antialiasing to LowAntialiasing.

5 Click Render.


Change Styles | 627

Save Image

1 Click Save Rendered Image.

2 Browse to an appropriate directory, and assign a file name.

3 Select a file type from the Save as type menu, and then click Save.

The rendered image is now available for direct use in your documentationfiles, or you can edit the image further in a graphics editing softwareapplication.

4 Close the Render Output window.


Image ExtentsNotice that the program renders the image within the space defined by therectangle in the graphics window. In this example, the reflection is cut off atthe bottom edge of the graphics window. Experiment with different resolutionsand adjust the model view to allow space for reflection and shadow effects,as needed.

For example:

1 Select the General tab in the Render Image dialog box.

2 Enter 300 in the Width field, and enter 600 in the Height field.

3 Ensure that Lock Aspect Ratio is not selected.

4 View your results.


SummaryPrevious (page 628)

628 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings

Studio - Animations

About this tutorialAnimate an assembly in Inventor Studio.



Tutorial File Used


Objectives

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,





25

629



Activate Studio1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤ Begin panel ➤ Inventor

Studio .

2 In the browser, right-click the node named Lighting (Table Top), andthen remove the check mark next to Visibility. This change removesthe lighting symbols from the graphics window.

3 Activate a scene style for the best rendering. Several scene styles areprovided and you can create new ones.

Prepare

Start at the Beginning

Click Go to Start on the animation timeline window to set the animationslider to the beginning of the timeline.

Watch Your Animation1 Click Play Animation.

630 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations

2 Click the following image to play an animation.

3 When the slider moves past 3 seconds, click Stop Animation.

Configure the AnimationBefore you continue, change the overall length of the animation so you donot need to continue to press Stop.

1 To the right of the camera selection field in the Animation Timeline,click Animation Options.

2 On the upper-right side of the Animation Options dialog box, click Fitto Current Animation.

Configure the Animation | 631

3 Click OK to recalibrate the timeline.

Notice that the scale on the animation timeline changes from the default30 seconds to 3 seconds.

NOTE This value is the total time available for all animation actions. Toincrease (or decrease) the time, click Configure and specify the duration.

Animate Camera Viewpoint1 In the browser, right-click the Cameras node, and then select Create

Camera from View from the context menu.

NOTE You can also right-click in the graphics window, and then selectCreate Camera from View.

2 The camera also appears in the graphics window. By default, theline-of-sight vector is normal to the screen. Orbit the model and zoomout to see the camera symbol and vector.

The camera consists of three parts: the camera, the line-of-sight vector,and the target.

632 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)1 Use the ViewCube or the Orbit command to adjust the viewpoint to

approximate the following image.


Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)1 Click Add Camera Action on the animation timeline.

2 Click Go to Start, and then click Play.

The program animates the movement of the ram, the fade, and thechange in camera viewpoint simultaneously.

Summary■ Set the active animation.

■ Animate a camera position change.

■ Add a new camera from the graphics window.

■ Change the camera from the drop-down list.

■ Change the animation length option to match the existing event duration.

■ Expand and collapse the animation timeline.

■ Hide graphic objects representing lights and cameras.

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) | 633

634

Studio - Positional Rep-resentations

About this tutorialCreate and animate positional representations in the assembly environment.



Arbor_Press.iamTutorial File Used


In Autodesk Inventor, you can evaluate various component positions in amoving assembly by creating positional representations in the assemblyenvironment. You can use the positional representations within Inventor Studioas keyframes in your assembly animations.

Objectives■ Create and animate the positional representations of an assembly using

Inventor Studio.

■ Create positional representations in the assembly environment.

■ Activate Inventor Studio.

■ Animate the positional representations for an assembly.

26

635



Prerequisites■ Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

■ Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with thevarious view tools.




Next (page 636)

Open Sample File1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, navigate to the Arbor Press

folder, and then open Arbor_Press.iam.

2 Click , and then select Save As. UseArbor_Press_Rep_Anim.iam for the file name.

636 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations


Create Three Positional Representations1 Expand the Representations folder.

Create Three Positional Representations | 637

2 Right-click the Position folder, and select New to create a new positionalrepresentation. The program creates the positional representationPosition 1 and sets it as the active positional representation.

3 Rename Position1 to Rest Position (0 deg).

4 Repeat the previous process to create two additional positionalrepresentations named Middle Position (-45 deg) and ClosedPosition (-160 deg).

NOTE To rename a browser node, slowly double-click the node to enter editingmode, and then enter the name.

Currently, these three positional representations are identical. In the followingsteps, you adjust them so that they contain different representations of theassembly. You then use Inventor Studio to animate between these savedpositions.


Define the First Positional Representation1 Double-click the Master positional representation to make it active.

2 Expand the PINION SHAFT:1 component node to see the constraintsfor this part.

3 Right-click the constraint Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) and clearthe Suppress box to activate the constraint.

4 Next, double-click the Rest Position (0 deg) positional representationto make this representation active.

5 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint and selectOverride.

6 Select the Suppression option.

7 Ensure that Enable appears in the menu.

8 Select the Value option.

9 Set the value to 0 deg.


10 Click OK to apply the override and close the dialog box.


Define the First Positional Representation | 639

Define the Second Positional RepresentationNext, you use the same process to define the other two representations.

1 Double-click the Middle Position (-45 deg) representation to makethis representation active.

2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, andselect Override.




6 Set the value to -45 deg.


7 Click OK.


Define the Second Positional Representation | 641

Define the Third Positional Representation1 Double-click the Closed Position (-160 deg) representation to make

this representation active.

2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, andselect Override.




6 Set the value to -160 deg.

7 Click OK.


Activate Studio1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤ Begin panel ➤

Inventor Studio .

Studio commands are located on the Render tab.

2 In the browser, right-click Lighting (Table Top), and then removethe check mark next to Visibility. It removes the lighting symbols fromthe graphics window.

3 Right-click the Animations node, and select New Animation. Expandthe Animations node, and double-click Animation2 (the animationnode you created).

The program activates the new animation and opens the Studio timeline.



Reduce the Timeline LengthBefore you start, change the overall timeline of the animation to 7 secondsso you do not have to press Stop after the animation.

1 On the right side of the animation timeline, click Animation Options.

2 In the Length section of the dialog box, double-click in the Secondsfield on the right and enter 7 as the new value. Click OK. The timelineadjusts to 7 seconds.


Create the First Animation1 Click Render tab ➤ Animate panel ➤ Pos Reps.

2 In the dialog box, ensure Master is selected in the Start field.

Reduce the Timeline Length | 643

3 Select the positional representation named Rest position (0 deg) fromthe list of representations under the End field.

In the next steps, you set the length of this animation event before youclose the dialog box.

4 In the Time section of the dialog box, click Specify .

5 Enter a value of 2 in the End field located on the right.

6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.


View the KeyframesTo view the keyframes, click the Expand/Collapse Action Editor commandon the right of the animation timeline.

NOTE In the Animation Timeline editor, the blue keyframes (parent) are actionsegments that have child keyframes displayed in gray. You can adjust both theparent and child keyframes. Child keyframes always fall within the parent keyframes.

NOTE To edit a segment with the Animate Positional Representation dialog box,right-click the segment in the timeline and select Edit. Alternatively, double-clickthe segment.



Create the Second Animation1 Click the Animate PR command again.

2

This time, select the positional representation named Rest position (0deg) from the Start field.

3 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the End field.

4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter a value of 2 in the Start field and a value of 4 in the End field.

6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.


Create the Third AnimationRepeat these steps to create the third positional representation animation:

1 Click the Animate PR command again.

Create the Second Animation | 645

2 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the Start field.

3 Select Closed position (-160 deg) for the End field.

4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter 4 in the Start field and 7 in the End field.

6 Click OK. Your timeline should match the following image.


Play the Animation1 In the Animation Timeline editor, click the Go to Start command.

2 Click Play to play the positional representation animations.

3 Click the following image to view an animation.



Edit the AnimationNext, you change the length of the animation segments.

1 In the animation timeline, drag the beginning node for PRAnim3 tothe 5.5 second position on the timeline.

2 Drag the end node for PRAnim2 to 5 seconds.

3 Drag the begin node for PRAnim2 to 3 seconds.

4 Click the following image to view an animation.

TIP To move an animation segment, select and drag the segment.

Play the animation back to see the effect of the changes.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned to:■ Create named positional representations within an assembly by overriding

the value of a constraint.

Edit the Animation | 647

■ Create a sequence of related positional representations.

■ Use Inventor Studio to animate between positional representations.

■ Edit the start and end positions of animation events by dragging on thetimeline.

Previous (page 647)


Skeletal Modeling

About this tutorialBuild skeletal model frames.



SkeletonBase.iptTutorial File Used


Build a skeletal model frame that supports a spherical tank. The frame isassociatively tied to the spherical tank. Adjust the size of the tank, and thecompleted frame automatically adjusts to match the change.






27

649



Next (page 650)

Open the Sample ModelYou use a supplied sample model, which is the completed skeleton part, toderive the required frame parts. Examine this part before you create theassembly.

TIP Keep the skeleton model open as you build the assembly. In a complicatedskeleton model, consider hiding sketches and other geometry to reduce the filteringrequired when deriving the skeleton model into the assembly components.

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files.

2 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt.

The part contains sketches, work features, and construction surfaces thatdefine the basic geometry of a support frame for a spherical container.Skeleton models are suitable for static models, such as frames and otherfabricated assemblies. The initial jumble of geometry may look a bitconfusing, so we will look at the individual sketches and other geometryin the part.

650 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling

3 In the Model browser, drag the End of Part marker and drop it justbelow the STRAP SURFACE node.

4 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ View Face,and then click CIRC STRAP SKETCH in the Model browser.

Open the Sample Model | 651

1 - Strap Surface Profile

2 - Strap Surface

3 - Strap Body Profile

The spherical construction surface is the key feature in the part. Thediameter of the sphere drives the other geometry in this skeleton, andconsequently drives the size of parts derived from this skeleton.

The shared strap sketch contains two related profiles:

■ A body profile that you will use to revolve a strap encircling thesphere.

■ A surface profile used to create the strap surface feature. This featureis used as a termination surface for supports between the strap andthe external frame surrounding the sphere. Further information isprovided when the supports are created later in this tutorial.

NOTE The two sketch profiles are linked by parameter values.

5 Drag the End of Part marker below the Work Plane-BOTT of Framenode in the Model browser, and examine the location of the three workplanes.

The three work planes below STRAP SURFACE define the verticalextents of the exterior frame. The BOTT of Frame work plane is usedas the termination face for the vertical legs of the frame. The sketch forthe vertical leg is on the TOP of Frame work plane.


6 Drag the End of Part marker below the VERTICAL LEGS SKETCHnode in the Model browser. Use the View Face command to reorientyour view like the following image.

The sketch contains a profile for the square tubing leg. The 2240-mmdimension is related to the diameter of the sphere. The size and thicknessof the tubing is controlled with user-defined parameters. The followingimage shows the size of the tubing controlled by the TubeSize userparameter. The user-defined parameters are exported, and thus can bereferenced by any of the parts derived from the skeleton part.

Open the Sample Model | 653

7 Drag the End of Part marker to the bottom of the Model browser.Examine the remaining sketches. Note that all sketches are relatedthrough projected geometry, work feature definition, or parameters. Thesphere diameter drives all the critical dimensions of the frame.


Create an AssemblyNow you build a new assembly based on the skeleton part.

1 Start an assembly based on the Standard(mm).iam template.

2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create.In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:■ Enter Strap as the name of the new component.


■ If your standard part template is inch-based, click the BrowseTemplates button to the right of the Template list. Click theMetric tab of the Open Template dialog box, and then select theStandard(mm).ipt template. Click OK to return to the CreateIn-Place Component dialog box.

■ Click OK to create the Strap part in the assembly.

■ Expand the Origin folder in the Model browser, and place thecomponent on the XY Plane of the assembly origin.

3 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon to exit the sketch environment.

4 Delete Sketch1 in the Strap part to tidy up the Model browser.

5 Click Manage tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ Derive. From the TutorialFiles folder, select the SkeletonBase.ipt file and open it. The DerivedPart dialog box opens.

6 The Strap part requires only the CIRC STRAP SKETCH. Expand Sketchesin the Derived Part dialog box. Select the CIRC STRAP SKETCH node,and click the Add button (+) at the top of the dialog box. Alternatively,

you can click the Exclude icon on the node itself to switch itsstatus.

You may receive a warning that the base component will be modified.It is fine. Click OK to allow the sketch to be exported.

7 If the Work Geometry icon is in a hybrid state (half yellow and half

gray), click the icon to change it to an Exclude state .

NOTE Sketches, surfaces, and work geometry must be visible in theoriginating part to derive into the new part. You can turn off the visibility ofitems before using the Derived Component command. It reduces thenumber of items you must clear in the dialog box.

8 Ensure the icons next to Surfaces Bodies and Parameters are set tothe Exclude state.


9 Click OK and reposition the geometry in the graphics window. ClickReturn. The part should match the following image.

10 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Revolve. Select the closedprofile of the strap.

11 Click Axis in the Revolve dialog box, and then select the line highlightedin the following image.

12 Click OK to create the Strap part.


TIP You can add features to the part as you can with any part created fromscratch. The derived sketch controls the size and position of the base featurein this example. You can use Derived Component at any point in themodeling process, not just as the first feature in a part. For example, a secondfeature derived from the component might bring in a second sketch, It isthen used to add or subtract geometry from the first feature based on thederived component.

13 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the assemblylevel.

14 Save the assembly. Use Skeleton.iam for the file name.



Create a Frame LegNext, create a leg from the skeleton part and then ground it in the assembly.

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create.

2 Enter Leg as the part name, and base the part on theStandard(mm).ipt template.

3 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

4 Expand the Origin folder under Skeleton.iam in the browser. Clickthe XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the assembly origin.

NOTE This step is critical to aligning all parts based on the skeleton model.

5 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up theModel browser.

6 Use the Derive command to derive the SkeletonBase.ipt part intothe Leg part.

7 Exclude all sketches other than VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH.

8 Expand Work Geometry in the Derived Part dialog box, and excludeall work features other than Work Plane-BOTT of Frame.

9 Exclude Surface Bodies and Parameters from the derived component.

10 Click OK.

11 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude. Extrude the tubeprofile highlighted in the following illustration.■ Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar,

and select To selected face/point. Then, click the derived workplane in the graphics window.

■ Click the green Ok button to complete the feature.


1 - Extrude to workplane

2 - Profile

12 Expand SkeletonBase.ipt in the Model browser. Right-click WorkPlane - BOTT of Frame, and remove the checkmark next toVisibility.

13 Finally, return to the assembly environment. Right-click Leg in theModel browser and select Grounded from the pop-up context menu.



Create a Frame SubassemblyNext, you create the three tubes that form one side of the frame. Two of thetubes are identical, so creating them as separate parts might not be the bestsolution for a parts list or BOM.

You use a subassembly in a slight variation of the preceding workflows. Inthis workflow:■ First, you create a subassembly in-place in the assembly. In the subassembly,

you first create a frame layout from a derived sketch. This sketch is notused to create solid geometry.

■ Next, create the two different tube parts in the subassembly, using thesame skeleton technique you used previously.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 659

■ Finally, place a second instance of one frame tube, and assemble it usingassembly constraints. The second instance of the tube is constrained tothe derived sketch in the layout part.

NOTE You incorporate the vertical leg in the subassembly later in this topic.

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create.In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:■ Enter Frame as the assembly name.

■ Base the assembly on the Standard(mm).iam template.

2 Click OK.

3 Click the assembly origin XY Plane in the Model browser to align thesubassembly to the top-level assembly. The Frame subassembly is theactive component in the assembly.

4 Click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create. In the CreateIn-Place Component dialog box:■ Enter FrameLayout as the part name.

■ Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template.

5 Click OK.

6 Align the part to the XY plane of the Frame subassembly origin. Becauseit is the first part in the subassembly, it is grounded and aligned to thesubassembly origin.


8 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part. Exclude all geometry otherthan the FRAME SKETCH sketch. Your part should match the followingimage.

NOTE Other geometry may be visible in your graphics window. You cannavigate the Model browser and turn visibility off for other geometry toreplicate the image as shown. However, this action is not necessary tocontinue the tutorial.


9 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to thesubassembly environment. The FrameLayout part should be grounded.

10 Click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create. In the CreateIn-Place Component dialog box:■ Enter HorTube as the part name.


11 Click OK.

12 Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam in the Model browser.Click the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the subassemblyorigin.


14 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part:■ Exclude all sketches other than the FRAME SKETCH sketch.

■ Exclude Work Geometry and Surface Bodies from the derivedpart.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 661

■ Include Parameters. You use one of the parameters from theskeleton part to control the extrusion distance of the base feature inthe new part.

NOTE Reference Parameters and External Parameters cannotbe included.

15 Click OK.

16 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude. Select the profilehighlighted in the following illustration.

1 - Profile to select

17 In the Extrude mini-toolbar, click the arrow next to the value input boxcontaining the 10 mm default extrusion distance. Select ListParameters from the pop-up context menu. Click TubeSize in theParameters list.

18 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature.

19 Add a 5 mm fillet to the four long edges of the new part.

20 Click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Shell. Select the two endfaces of the extrusion.

21 Click the arrow next to the Thickness edit box in the Shell dialog box,and select List Parameters from the pop-up context menu.


22 Click TubeThickness in the Parameters list.

23 Click OK.

Your part should match the one shown in the following image.

NOTE With some additional work geometry in the skeleton model, you cancreate the end profile for the horizontal tube, like the vertical leg tube. Iteliminates the need to add additional features to the part, but the additionalcomplexity of the skeleton model may outweigh that advantage.

24 Return to the Frame subassembly.


Create a Diagonal TubeFollowing the same steps used to create the horizontal tube, create a diagonaltube in the frame subassembly.

1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create.In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:■ Enter DiagTube as the part name.


■ Click OK.

Create a Diagonal Tube | 663

2 Expand the Origin folder of the Frame subassembly. Click the XYPlane in the Model browser to align the part to the subassembly origin.

3 Exit the initial sketch and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Modelbrowser.

4 Derive the FRAME SKETCH sketch and User Parameters fromSkeletonBase.ipt into the new part.

5 Extrude the profile highlighted in the following image by first linkingthe extrusion distance to the derived TubeSize parameter.

6 Add a 5 mm fillet to the long edges of the part.

7 Shell the part and link the shell thickness to the derived TubeThicknessparameter.

1 - Profile

8 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and ground the DiagTube.iptpart.



Add a Second Horizontal TubeTo complete the frame subassembly, you add a second occurrence of theHorTube part. You then constrain this occurrence to the other frame membersand the frame layout sketch.

1 With the Frame subassembly active, drag HorTube:1 from the Modelbrowser and drop it in the graphics window.

2 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Position panel ➤ Constrain.Click the Flush solution in the Place Constraint dialog box.

3 Add a Flush constraint between the two faces highlighted in thefollowing image.

Add a Second Horizontal Tube | 665

4 Add a second Flush constraint between the end faces of the two tubesas highlighted in the following image.

5 Click the Mate solution in the Place Constraint dialog box.

6 Click the face highlighted in the following image, and then click thevisible sketch edge, which is also highlighted. The edge is geometry inthe derived sketch in the FrameLayout part.

7 Apply the constraint, and then click Cancel to close the Place Constraintdialog box.


1 - Sketch Line

8 Turn off the Visibility of the FrameLayout part in the subassembly.

9 Save your work.


Derived Surface from SkeletonFinally, you create a left-hand and right-hand support to connect the frameto the strap. The supports use a derived construction surface as the terminationsurface for an extrusion.

1 With the Frame subassembly active, create a component namedSupportLeft in-place in the subassembly. Base the part on theStandard(mm).ipt template. Select the subassembly origin XY Planeas the initial sketch plane. Exit the initial sketch and delete Sketch1 totidy up the browser.

2 Derive the SkeletonBase part into the new part:■ Exclude all sketches other than SUPPORTS SKETCH from the

derived part.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 667

■ Exclude Work Geometry and Parameters from the derived part.

■ Expand Surface Bodies in the Derived Part dialog box.

■ Exclude all surfaces other than Srf2 from the derived part.

3 Click OK to complete the feature. Your assembly should match the onein the following image.

You might be asking why the separate strap surface is required. Why notcreate a solid body of the strap in the skeleton, and then derive the solidbody as a solid or surface body into the support part?

Notice that the strap surface feature is a single 180-degree revolved surfacethat matches the outer surface of the strap. The support tube profile willbe extruded to this surface. If the termination surface provides morethan one solution, the maximum termination is always the result. Seethe following image for an example.

You can choose a minimum or maximum solution for an extrusiontermination.


1 - Extrude to 360 degree extrude strap

2 - Extrude to 180 degree extrude strap

4 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude.Select the profile highlighted in the following image.

5 Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar, andselect To selected face/point.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 669

6 Click the derived surface highlighted in the following image.

7 Click the More tab in the Extrude dialog box, and then select theMinimum Solution option.

8 Click OK to complete the feature and close the Extrude dialog box.

1 - Extrude

2 - Profile

9 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and then ground theSupportLeft part.

10 Repeat the previous steps to create a right-hand support namedSupportRight. Derive the same sketch and surface into the new part,and then extrude the other tube profile in the sketch to the terminationsurface. The Frame subassembly should match the one in the followingimage.

11 Expand the derived SkeletonBase feature under the SupportLeft andSupportRight parts, and turn off the visibility of Srf2 to tidy up theModel browser.



Complete the Frame SubassemblyThe vertical leg belongs in the Frame subassembly. Because there are noassembly constraints, you can freely drag components between subassemblylevels without fear of breaking the assembly structure.

1 Return to the top-level assembly (Skeleton.iam).

2 Drag Leg:1 in the Model browser, and drop it belowFrameLayout.ipt:1.

3 Right-click the Frame subassembly in the Model browser and selectEdit.

4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤

Pattern. In the Model browser or graphics window, select all parts inthe subassembly except FrameLayout.ipt.

Complete the Frame Subassembly | 671

5 In the Pattern Component dialog box:■ Click the Circular tab.

■ Click the Axis Direction button.

■ Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and click Y Axis.

■ Enter 4 in the Count edit box.

■ Enter 90 in the Angle edit box.

■ Click OK.

6 Return to the top-level assembly. Ground Frame.iam if you have notalready done so. The assembly should match the one in the followingimage.


NOTE Component appearances have been changed for clarity in the followingimage.



Assembly UpdateThe skeleton part controls all changes to the assembly components. In thisexercise, you change the sphere diameter in the skeleton part and examinethe changes in the assembly.

1 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt, or activate its window if the file is alreadyopen.

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel ➤

Parameters. Scroll down to the User Parameters area in theParameters dialog box.

3 Enter 900 in the Equation cell of the SphereDiameter user parameter.

4 Click Done.

5 Return to the assembly file.

6 Click Local Update on the Quick Access toolbar. The assemblychanges to reflect the smaller sphere diameter. Your assembly shouldmatch the one shown in the following image.


Assembly Update | 673

SummarySkeletal modeling is an efficient and versatile technique for building assemblieswith Autodesk Inventor software. The application of this technique is limitedonly by your imagination. The lack of assembly constraints and absence ofadaptive relationships can improve the performance and robustness of assemblyupdates. Setting up a skeleton or master model takes some planning, but theability to control an assembly easily from a single source can be worth theeffort.

Previous (page 673)


iCopy: Creating 28

675

Use iCopy

Place iCopy results in a target assembly. Constrain the copies and determinewhich components to copy or reuse.


15-30 minutesTime Required

676 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating

Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.iptTutorial FilesUsed


Learn how to■ Place iCopy results

■ Constrain iCopy content

■ Constrain an iCopy pattern

■ Copy/Reuse iCopy

Prerequisites■ Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and

perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and selectinggeometry.

■ Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts andassemblies.

■ Understand the basics of skeleton modeling.

■ Read the iCopy concept to understand the terms that are associated withiCopy commands.

The iCopy command automates the process of copying and positioning similarcomponents in the main assembly. TheiCopy command creates one ormultiple copies of an iCopy template and adds each copy to the targetassembly. Each iCopy result can vary slightly from other iCopy results in thepattern depending on the adaptivity that was defined in the iCopy template.Creating an iCopy template is discussed in the Create iCopy Template tutorial.



Next (page 678)

Use iCopy | 677



Open Target AssemblyThe target assembly is host to the iCopy results and contains the geometrynecessary to position the iCopy results. The target assembly geometry needsto correspond to the iCopy template. Thus, it is a good idea to understandwhat the iCopy template expects as inputs. This image shows the iCopytemplate and highlights the points that are used by the target assemblygeometry.


To place a single iCopy result, you need a work point that corresponds witheach point defined in the iCopy template. To place multiple iCopy results,you need a work point for each point in the iCopy definition. You also needa rail to define the path for each work point, a work plane to define theposition of the iCopy results, and a path for the pattern.

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. Open Target.iam located in\Tutorial Files\iCopy.

Open Target Assembly | 679

2 The assembly contains a single part. The part contains sketch geometryand work points. You use the work points to position iCopy results.


iCopyUse the iCopy command to position iCopy results. First, select the iCopytemplate to use. Then select geometry to position, size and pattern the iCopyresults, and control the copy or reuse of components.

1 On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ iCopy command.

2 Select Frame-start.iam and click Open. This assembly has beenauthored using the iCopy Author command. The Constrain iCopydialog box displays.


Constrain iCopyIn the Constrain iCopy dialog box, position the iCopy result in the targetassembly. Select work points to position the geometry. You can modify valuesfor any parameters included in the iCopy definition.

1 Select the Path pattern tab on the Constrain iCopy dialog box.

2 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for theLower left point.


3 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower rightpoint.

Constrain iCopy | 681

4 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper leftpoint.


5 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upperright point.

Constrain iCopy | 683

6 In the FrameH (Frame Height) field, enter 125 mm.

7 In the FrameW (Frame Width) field, enter 125 mm. Press ENTER toaccept the new value. The preview updates for the first instance of theiCopy pattern.



Constrain iCopy - Path PatternIn the Constrain iCopy dialog box, pattern the iCopy results in the targetassembly. Rails are automatically selected based on the work points used toposition the iCopy. The rails control the positioning of work points foradditional iCopy results. You select a path to determine the direction of theiCopy results pattern. A work plane is used to determine the position of theiCopy results. This work plane is selected automatically.

1 Select Path in the Constrain iCopy dialog box.

2 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern.

Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 685

The Work Plane is selected automatically, based on the selected path.

3 Enter 8 in the Instance number field.

4 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.


5 Click Next.


Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 687

Copy and Reuse iCopy ComponentsIn the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box, copy or reuse componentsin the iCopy definition. Components that are reused are referenced by alliCopy results. Select Reuse for components that do not change between iCopyresults. Select Copy for components that change between iCopy results.

1 Click Next. The plates reference the same part file for each iCopy result(reuse). All other components are copied for each iCopy result (copy).


iCopy: File NamesIn the iCopy: File Names dialog box, modify file names and the location pathfor parts and assemblies that the iCopy command creates. You can modifynames individually, or add a prefix or suffix to all file names automatically.

1 Check the Prefix box in the Naming Scheme area of the iCopy: FileNames dialog box.

2 Enter My- in the Prefix field and click Apply in the Naming Schemearea of the dialog box. All file names update with the prefix.

3 Click OK in the iCopy: File Names dialog box to create the files.

NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image,

click the Local Update button on the Manage tab to update theiCopy results.


4 Review the relationship between the template points and target pointsand rail to see the effect these had on the results.Close the file. Do notsave changes. The Target.iam assembly is used later for the authoringexercise.


iCopy: File Names | 689

SummaryCongratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you:■ Place iCopy results in a target assembly.

■ Constrain an iCopy result.

■ Constrain an iCopy patterned result.

■ Use Copy/Reuse to manage the placed components.

What Next? Now that you know what iCopy can do when placing results,follow the Create an iCopy Template tutorial and learn how to build thetemplate for this powerful command.

Previous (page 688)


Use iCopy

About this tutorialComplete a skeleton assembly and author the assembly to use with iCopy.


45-60 minutesTime Required

Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.iptTutorial Files Used


Learn how to■ Create a skeleton assembly

■ Prepare an assembly for the iCopy Author

■ Test the assembly

■ Author an iCopy template

Prerequisites■ Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform

common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting geometry.

■ Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts andassemblies.

29

691



■ Understand the basics of skeleton modeling.

■ Review the iCopy Help Concept and familiarize yourself with iCopy terms.

iCopy combines skeletal modeling and adaptivity to allow the subassemblyto change shape to fit its position in the model. The iCopy Author commandcreates an iCopy template from an adaptive skeleton assembly. TheiCopycommand creates one or multiple copies of the iCopy template and adds eachcopy to the target assembly. Each assembly (iCopy result) can vary slightlyfrom other iCopy results in the pattern depending on the adaptivity that wasused in the iCopy template.



Next (page 692)

Open the Template Layout PartNow you examine the files that compose the iCopy template, then author aniCopy template. The template layout part is the base part for the skeletonassembly that is the iCopy template. The template layout part contains thegeometry that is derived into the skeleton components.

1 OpenSkeleton-frame.ipt.

692 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy

2 This file contains several sketches, work geometry, and surface features.■ Sketch1 contains the layout geometry for the skeleton model.

■ Sketch2 through Sketch7 contain the profiles used to create the framemembers.

■ The work planes are used to position the sketches.

■ Sketch8 is used to create ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18.

Open the Template Layout Part | 693

■ ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18 are used to terminate theextrusions for the frames.

3 Right-click Sketch1 and select Adaptive.



Create the iCopy Template AssemblyThe iCopy template assembly contains the skeleton geometry that is used tocreate an iCopy definition. You create an assembly, place theSkeleton-frame.ipt component, and then constrain it.

1 Begin a new assembly based on the Standard (mm).iam template.

2 Use the Place Component command to place one instance ofSkeleton-frame.ipt located in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder.


3 Right-click Skeleton-frame:1 in the Model browser and selectAdaptive.

4 Save the assembly as Frame.iam in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder..


Create the iCopy Template Assembly | 695

Constrain the Template Layout PartFor the iCopy results to update properly, the origin of the template layoutpart must be constrained to the origin of the assembly. The template layoutpart can remain grounded.

1 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1and Frame.iam.

2 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box,■ Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush

option.

■ In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane.

■ In the Origin folder of Frame.iam, select the XY Plane.

■ Click Apply.

3 Repeat to create flush constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZplanes.

4 Close the Place Constraint dialog box.


iCopy Author - Layout tabThe iCopy Author prepares an assembly for the iCopy command. To use anassembly as an iCopy template, the assembly must contain a skeleton partthat drives the other parts in the assembly. The skeleton part must containan adaptive sketch. You select points in the sketch to use as the control pointsfor placing the iCopy. The parameters in the skeleton part can be added tothe iCopy template. These parameters give greater control over the size andshape of the assembly and its components.

1 On the ribbon, click the Manage tab ➤ Author panel ➤ iCopyAuthor command.

2 In the Model browser, select Skeleton-frame:1. After the layout partis selected, the Geometry, Parameter, and Document tabs becomeavailable.



iCopy Author - Geometry tabOn the Geometry tab, select and name the control points in the layout part.The control points are used to position the iCopy result when it is placed inan assembly. These points must be geometry points (endpoints of lines, centerpoints of circles, but not sketch points).

1 Select the Geometry tab.

2 In the Geometry column, click Click to add.

3 Select the point in the lower-left corner of the frame.

4 In the Label field, enter Lower left.


6 Select the point in the lower-right corner of the frame.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 697

7 In the Label field, enter Lower right.


9 Select the point at the left end of the upper middle frame member.


10 In the Label field, enter Upper left.


12 Select the point at the right end of the upper middle frame member.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 699

13 In the Label field, enter Upper right. Press ENTER to accept the input.

NOTE To remove a work point from the list, highlight the Geometry and Labelfields then press Delete.


iCopy Author - Parameter tabOn the Parameter tab, include parameters from the layout part in the iCopytemplate. You can modify the parameter values when placing the iCopy inthe target assembly.

1 Select the Parameter tab. There are two parameters in the list on theright. These parameters are user parameters defined in Skeleton-frame.


2 Select the Label field for FrameH and enter Frame Height.

3 Select the Label field for FrameW and enter Frame Width. Press ENTERto accept the value.

4 Click OK.

5 Save the file. Click Yes to all if prompted.

6 CloseFrame.iam.


Test the iCopy DefinitionWhen creating an iCopy definition, test the iCopy with just the skeleton. Testagain after you create all the derived parts. Then finally test after placing anyother components. You test the iCopy definition by using it with the iCopycommand to verify it updates as expected.

1 OpenTarget.iam.

Test the iCopy Definition | 701


3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open.The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays.









8 Select the Path pattern tab to specify path information.

9 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (thePath button is selected automatically). The Work Plane is selectedautomatically based on the selected path.





12 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy /Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there areno components to reuse in the iCopy definition.

13 Click OK to complete the command. The iCopy results are created asshown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template andreview the steps to create it.


14 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for furthertesting.



Create a Frame PartNow that the skeleton assembly has been successfully tested, you continuebuilding the assembly. Next, create a frame part by deriving geometry fromthe Skeleton-frame part.

1 OpenFrame.iam.

2 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame. It prevents you fromaccidentally selecting the surfaces in this file in later steps.

3 Click Create to create a component within the assembly.■ Enter Frame1 in the New Component Name field.

■ Click and select Standard (mm).ipt from the Metric tab.

■ Verify that the New File Location is set to the \Tutorial Files\iCopydirectory.

■ Verify that Constrain sketch plane to selected face or planeis not selected.

■ Click OK.

4 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam andselect the XY Plane.

5 Exit the sketch and delete Sketch1. It is not needed for this component.

6 Click the Manage tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ Derive command.

7 In the Open dialog box, select Skeleton-frame.ipt and click Open.

8 Expand the Surface Bodies node. Set Srf1 and Srf6 to and all

other surfaces to .

9 Expand the Sketches node. Set Sketch2 to and all other sketches

to .

10 Expand the Work Geometry node. Set Work Plane5 to and

all other work planes to .


11 In the Derive dialog box, click OK. The surfaces and sketch fromSkeleton-frame are added to the part. Using the Derive command toadd these surfaces maintains a link between the two files. The visibilityof Skeleton-frame.ipt is turned off for clarity in the following image.

12 Start the Extrude command.■ Sketch2 is selected automatically. It is the only closed profile in the

part.

■ In the Extents drop-down menu, select Between.

■ Select Srf1 and Srf6 as the Between planes. The order does notmatter.

■ Click OK.

Create a Frame Part | 711

13 Turn off the visibility of the surfaces from the derived part (Srf1 andSrf6). It prevents you from accidentally selecting them in later steps.

14 Return to the main assembly (Frame.iam).



Complete the AssemblyRepeat the previous procedure to create the rest of the assembly. The tablecontains a list of file names with the surfaces, sketches, and work planes touse with the Derive command.

1 Repeat the procedure to create the five frame parts according to thefollowing table. Be sure to turn off the visibility of derived surfaces aftercreating the extrusion.

Work GeometrySketchSurfacesFile Name

Work Plane6Sketch3Srf1 and Srf2Frame2





Complete the Assembly | 713

2 When all part files are complete, save Frame.iam and all dependents.


Constrain the Frame PartFor adaptivity and skeletal modeling to work together, the assembly must beconstrained using a particular workflow. Constrain the origin planes of the


components to the origin planes of the iCopy template layout part. Thisprocedure provides the most consistent results.

1 In the model window, click and drag any frame part. The part is notconstrained and is free to move.

2 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1and Frame1:1.

3 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box,■ Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush

option.

■ In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane.

■ In the Origin folder of Frame1:1, select the XY Plane.

■ Click Apply.

4 Repeat to create constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZ planes.

5 Repeat the process for the three origin planes of the remaining frames(Frame2 through Frame6).

Constrain the Frame Part | 715




Test the iCopy DefinitionTest the iCopy definition again. The frames are the only parts that are derivedfrom the skeleton part. There are other components that are independent ofthe skeleton part. These components are placed later.

1 OpenTarget.iam.










8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm.

9 In the Frame Width field, enter 125 mm.



11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (thePath button is selected automatically).


12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.




15 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy /Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there areno components to reuse in the iCopy definition.


16 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that youentered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.

17 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.




18 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for furthertesting.



Place the Support PlatesThe last step in building the iCopy template is to place any components thatare independent of the skeleton layout part. Support plates are placed andconstrained in the assembly.

1 OpenFrame.iam.

2 Place four occurrences of Plate1.ipt.

3 Use one mate and two flush constraints to position each plate at thefour lower corners of the frame as shown. Use the vertical frame partswith the mate constraint to position the plates. This procedure providesmore consistent results because the horizontal frame changes whenplacing iCopy results.


4 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame:1.

5 Save Frame.iam and all its dependents. Close the file.


Place the Support Plates | 727

Test the iCopy DefinitionNow that all the parts are placed in the iCopy template, test a final time toverify that everything works as expected.

1 OpenTarget.iam.










8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm.

9 In the Frame Width field, and enter 125 mm.


11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (thePath button is selected automatically).


12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.




15 Click Next to continue the command. The Copy / Reuse iCopyComponents dialog box displays because there are components that canbe reused in the iCopy definition.

16 Click Next in the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box. Theplates reference the same part file for each iCopy result (reuse). All othercomponents are copied for each iCopy result (copy). The iCopy: FileNames dialog box is displayed.


17 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that youentered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.

The frame parts are copied for each iCopy result. Each iCopy result usesthe plate part.

18 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.




19 Save Target.iam and its dependents.



Summary


Summary | 737

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you:■ Authored an iCopy template.

■ Created iCopy results in a target assembly.

What Next? Now that you know how to author and place iCopy components,you can create your own. The Skeletal Modeling tutorial helps youunderstand how to set up a skeleton assembly to use with the iCopycommand.

Previous (page 728)


Splines and Surfaces

About this tutorial

Perform advanced modeling with splines and surfaces.



30

739

spline_1_start.iptspline_1_complete.ipt

Tutorial FilesUsed


This tutorial explores the tools available for creating and controlling the shapeof splines. Surfaces are used to shape the part and to define the body splitcontours.

Objectives

In this tutorial, you learn how to:■ Create and define splines.

■ Loft with a rail.

■ Create surfaces.

■ Replace a face.

■ Extend surface edges.

■ Split the part into multiple bodies.

■ Use the Emboss command.

Prerequisites■ Understand how to open, create and save part files in your active project.

■ Understand the fundamentals of solid modeling.

System Settings

On the Application Options, Sketch tab enable the following settings:■ Edit dimension when created.

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit.

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create.

The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment imagesin this tutorial.

740 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces



NOTE You can specify the icon color scheme in Application Options. Theappearance of the icons presented in this tutorial may differ if you are not usingthe color scheme noted in the following image.



Next (page 741)

Create Spline Cross SectionsIn the first section of this exercise, we will create two spline cross sections andone spline rail to use in a Loft operation.

1 Start a 2D sketch on the face indicated.

2 Start the Spline command. Refer to the following image forplacement. Place a fit point at the mid-point (green dot) of the verticalline on the left (1), another directly above the origin (2). Double-clickto place the final point (3) at the mid-point of the vertical line on theright. This action creates the spline. You can also right-click and chooseCreate to finish the spline segment.

3 Right-click and select Done or press the Escape key to exit the command.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 741

NOTE Fit points at the end of a spline are square. Fit points along the curveare diamond shaped so you can identify the start and end of joined splinesegments.

When you create a spline, handles appear at each fit point in a passivestate. Handles are shape manipulators. You can drag or dimension to afit point without activating a handle. If the handles are not visible, selecta spline in the sketch to display the active and passive handles.

4 Activate the handle on all fit points. To activate a handle use one of thefollowing methods:■ Press and drag anywhere on the handle.

■ Right-click a fit point and choose Activate Handle in the contextmenu.


TIP Handle manipulation changes the shape of a spline. It is sometimesnecessary to "undo" a spline handle manipulation. Depending on how manyhandles were manipulated, a normal Undo command might not producethe required results. When a spline is selected, there are two context menucommands available for reversing handle manipulations:■ Reset All Handles Reverses all handle edits and restores the spline

to the natural solve state. Active handles remain active.

■ Reset Handle Reverses a handle edit on a selected fit point orhandle, or the handle nearest the cursor. The reset uses the currentspline shape. If other handles were modified, the reset may not returnthe handle to the original solve state. The handle remains active

5 Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature in thecontext menu.

TIP Enabling Curvature also activates the linear handle. Enabling the linearhandle does not activate Curvature.

6 Place a horizontal constraint on all handles.

7 Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point (not thehandle) and the part origin.

8 Place a dimension on each handle with a value of 1. A linearhandle dimension is unitless and indicates the distance the spline istangent to the handle.

9 Place a radial dimension of 110-mm on the middle fit point curvaturehandle. A radial dimension is not a unitless dimension.

10 Place a 9-mm vertical dimension from the projected Origin point to themiddle fit point.

The following image shows the completed sketch.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 743

11 Finish the sketch. The 9-mm dimension persists; the handlesand all handle dimensions are visible only when the spline is active.

12 Start the Save As command and save the file as Spline_Skills1.ipt.

To create an exact duplicate of the spline on the other side of the part performthe following steps.

1 Orient the part to match the view in the following image andstart a new sketch on the indicated face.

2 Start the Project Geometry command and project the spline tothe new sketch.




Create a Spline RailIn the next portion of the exercise, we create the rail or "guide curve" to usein the lofting operation.

1 Orient the part so the narrow end is facing you as shown in the followingimage.

Create a Spline Rail | 745

2 Start a new sketch on the narrow end of the part on the faceindicated.

3 Start the Spline command and sketch a spline from the midpointof the projected vertical line to a point above the midpoint of the part.Place the final point at the midpoint of the opposite projected verticalline. Double-click the last point to create the spline.

4 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finishthe spline command.

5 Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point and themidpoint of the projected line.

6 Place a 7-mm dimension from the midpoint of the top edge to themiddle fit point.

7 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finishthe dimension command.


8 Right-click the middle fit point and choose Flat from thecontext menu. The mid-section of the spline now has zero curvature.Although not required for this exercise, a unitless dimension can beapplied to the handle to extend the length of the flat segment.


10 Save the file.


Create a Lofted SurfaceIn the next section, we create a lofted surface using the two parallel splinesas cross sections, and the front spline as the drive rail.

1 Start the Loft command.

2 In the dialog box, choose Surface for the Output.

Create a Lofted Surface | 747

3 Select the two parallel splines to satisfy the cross sections.

4 Change the selection type to Rails using one of the following methods,and then select the spline you created as the drive rail:

■ Right-click and choose Select Rails in the context menu.

■ Select Click to add in the dialog box in the Rails pane.


5 Click OK to create the surface.

The new surface appears in the browser as a lofted feature and also in theSurface Bodies folder.

NOTE A Surface is initially translucent and a single color for appearance. To changethe appearance of a surface to opaque, select the surface (in the bodies folder orthe browser). Use the context menu to cancel the Translucent selection. SelectProperties in the context menu to assign a new surface appearance if required.


Change the Top of the Object Using Replace FaceIn this section, you use Replace Face to change the top of the object to matchthe shape of the new surface.

1 On the 3D Model tab, Surfaces panel, choose the drop-down arrow toexpose all available commands from the expanded panel.

2 Select Replace Face.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 749

3 Select the top planar face to satisfy the Existing Faces selection. Changethe selection to New Faces and select the lofted surface to satisfy theNew Faces selection.


4 Click OK to replace the planar face with the lofted surface.

5 In the browser, select the lofted surface and turn off the visibility in thecontext menu.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 751

The top of the part now conforms to the shape of the surface.

6 Start the Shell command.

7 Specify a 2-mm thickness. Do not remove any faces. Use the defaultInside shell option.

8 Select OK to complete the operation.

9 Save the file.


Split the Part into Two Solid BodiesThe interior of the part is now hollow. In the next section of the exercise, weuse a top-down workflow to split the part into multiple solid bodies.

1 On the Surface panel, select the Thicken/Offset command.

2 In the graphics window, select the top of the part to satisfy the selection.

3 In the dialog box, select Surface for the Output. Enter a distance valueof 3-mm. Use the flip direction arrow to offset the surface towards theinterior of the part.


4 Select OK to create the offset surface and finish the command.

5 Highlight the new surface in the browser to view.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 753

6 On the Surface panel, click the drop-down arrow to expose all availablecommands.

7 Select the Extend command in the drop-down.

8 Select the two outside edges of the offset surface to satisfy the Edgesselection. Specify an offset value of 7.5 mm. Click OK to finish thecommand.


9 On the Modify panel, click the Split command.

10 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option.

11 Select the offset surface as the Split Tool.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 755

12 Click OK to split the part into two solid bodies and finish the command.

13 In the browser, turn off the visibility of the offset surface. Because theextended edges are dependent on the offset surface, the originatingsurface controls the feature visibility.

14 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. There are now two solidbodies present in the file. You can control the visibility and color of eachbody individually.


15 Save the file.


Create Another Split ToolIn the next section, we create a spline profile and surface for another splittool.

1 Start a new sketch on the bottom of the part.

2 Orient the part view as shown in the following image with the wide endof the part on the right.

Create Another Split Tool | 757

3 Create a spline with five fit points as shown in the following image.Double-click the last point to create the spline. It is of no consequenceif the handles on your spline do not match the image.


4 Place a vertical constraint between the following fit points:

a 1 and 5

b 2 and 4

5 Place a horizontal constraint between fit point 3 and the projectedorigin point.


6 Enable all linear handles on the spline using one of the followingmethods:

a Right-click and select Activate Handle in the context menu.

b Press and drag anywhere on a handle.

7 Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature.

8 Place a vertical constraint on the handle at the midpoint and the twoendpoints.


9 Place a unitless dimension of 1 on each linear handle.

10 Place a 12-mm radial dimension on the curvature handle at the middlefit point. It is of no consequence if your spline differs slightly from thefollowing image.


11 Add an angular dimension of 34 degrees between the linear handles andthe edges of the part as shown in the following image.

12 Dimension the fit points as shown in the following image.



14 Start the Extrude command. Set the Output to Surface andselect the spline to satisfy the Profile selection. Set the Distance to40-mm. Reverse the direction of the extrusion so the profile intersectsthe existing bodies. Click OK to create the surface.


15 Save the file.



Split the Part to Create a Third Solid BodyIn the next section, we use the new surface to split the part and create a thirdbody.

1 On the Modify panel, choose the Split command.

2 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option.

3 Select the extruded surface as the Split Tool.

4 If only one body is visible in a multi-body part, Inventor selects thevisible body as the solid to include. Because more than one solid bodyis visible, select the upper body to satisfy the Solid selection.

Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body | 765

5 Click OK to create the body.

Notice there are now three bodies in the Solid Bodies folder in thebrowser.

6 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser.

7 Right-click each body in the folder and select Properties in the contextmenu. Change the Body Appearance Style for each body to a uniqueappearance

8 Save the file.


Isolate the Body1 Expand the Solid Bodies folder and select the new body.

2 With the body highlighted, right-click and select Hide Othersin the context menu. It isolates the body you want to work on.


Notice that the context menu also contains the Show All command tounhide all bodies.


Create an Offset Surface and TrimIn the next section, we create an offset surface to use as a trimming tool.

Create an Offset Surface and Trim | 767

1 On the 3D Model tab, Surface panel, start the Thicken/Offsetcommand.

2 In the dialog box, set the Output to Surface and pick the extrudedsurface to satisfy the selection. Set the direction of the new surface tothe interior of the body. Set the Distance to 2-mm. Click OK to createthe surface.


3 Turn off the visibility of the extruded surface.


4 Start the Split command.

5 Select the Trim Solid option; select the surface as the Split Tool. Makesure the side to remove is pointing away from the material.

NOTE Rotate the model to verify the side to remove arrow is pointing awayfrom the solid. You can also select the second Remove direction and not theone indicated in the following image. It is acceptable as long as the outputis correct.


6 Choose OK to remove the material.

7 Turn off the visibility of the surface.

8 Turn on the visibility of all solid bodies. Notice the 2-mm gap betweenthe bodies.


9 Save the file.

This completes the spline and surfacing portion of the tutorial. To completethe part you can continue the tutorial.


Create an Embossed FeatureIn the next section, we create the embossed feature.

1 Turn on the visibility of the Emboss Sketch in the browser.

2 Turn off the visibility of the bottom solid and the large upper solid.

NOTE Turn off the visibility of the non-participating solids to allow Inventorto choose the body to be operated on automatically.

3 Start the Emboss command.

4 Set the Depth to 3-mm.

5 Select the Emboss from Face option.


6 Click OK to create the embossed feature.

7 Start the Fillet command.

8 In the Fillet dialog box, enter 2-mm for the Radius value.

9 Select the drop-down and set the fillet type to Smooth (G2).

Click the pencil icon to change to a selection mode.

Create an Embossed Feature | 773

10 Pick the upper and lower edges of the emboss feature, and then clickOK to create the fillets.


11 Save the file.

Create a Vented Opening Using GrillIn the next section, we create a vented opening called a Grill.

1 In the Solid Bodies folder, make sure the visibility of the bottom solidand the embossed solid is off. Make the large top solid visible.

NOTE If you turn off the visibility of bodies, Inventor does not include themin a feature operation.

2 Turn on the visibility of the Grill Sketch in the browser.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill | 775

3 On the 3D Model tab, Plastic Part panel, click the Grill command.

4 On the grill sketch, select the large outer ellipse to satisfy the Profileselection in the Boundary tab. Accept the default settings for size.


5 Select the Island tab and then select the small center ellipse to satisfythe Profile selection. Accept the default of 0-mm.


6 Select the Rib tab and then select all the remaining line geometry tosatisfy the rib selection. Accept the size defaults.


7 Click OK to create the grill.


8 Turn on the visibility of all bodies.

9 Save the file.

Congratulations, you have completed the Spline and Surfaces tutorial.



SummaryIn this tutorial you:■ Created and dimensioned splines.

■ Manipulated spline handles.

■ Created lofted and extruded surfaces.

■ Created multiple bodies in a part file.

■ Used Replace Face to change a part contour.

■ Extended surface edges.

■ Used the Emboss command.

Summary | 781

782

Bolted Connections

About this tutorial

Design bolted connections.

Mechanical DesignCategory

31

783


Bolted_connection.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used


Objectives■ Create and edit bolted connections with the Design Accelerator Bolted

Connection generator.

■ Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that savesextensive assembly and part modeling time.

Prerequisites■ Install and connect to the Content Center.

■ Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space withthe various view tools.




Next (page 784)

Start the Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Bolted

Connection ➤ Bolted_connection.iam.

2 Click ➤ Save As.

3 For the file name, enter Bolted_connection_tutorial.iam.

784 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections



4 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Fasten panel ➤ Bolted

Connection .

5 In the Bolted Connection Component Generator dialog box, select theThrough All hole type.

6 Select Concentric from the drop-down menu in the Placement box.

The Start Plane command enables.

Start the Generator | 785


Place the Holes1 Select the start plane.

The Circular references command is enabled.

2 Select the circular edge.


The Termination command is enabled.


Place the Holes (continued)1 Orbit the assembly, and select the termination plane.

Place the Holes (continued) | 787

The holes preview.


2 Verify that 6.00 mm is selected in the Diameter menu.


Place the Holes (continued)In the hole and fastener list box, notice that the program shows the holethumbnails and descriptions. Two holes are shown, because that is the numberrequired to pass through both components, as determined by the start andtermination selections.

If another component or part feature are included in the selection, three holesare required.

Place the Holes (continued) | 789


Add the Fasteners1 Above the hole thumbnails and descriptions, select the Click to add

a fastener text. The available bolts display.

2 Select ISO from the Standard menu to filter the selection.

3 Select ISO 4016. The selected bolt previews in the graphics window.

Notice also that the program selects a length long enough to pass throughthe chosen components automatically.


NOTE If your Content Center library does not contain the ISO standard, orthis particular bolt, select All from the Standard menu, and then selecta similar bolt.

4 Select the Click to add a fastener text, located directly under the boltthumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.

Add the Fasteners | 791

The generator logically filters the available selections. For example, whenyou add fastener hardware between the bolt and the top hole, theprogram presents only washers for selection.

5 Select the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower holethumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.


6 Click the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower washerthumbnail, and then select ISO 4032. The fastener stack is complete.

Add the Fasteners | 793

7 Click Apply.

The File Naming dialog box opens where you can specify the Displayname of the bolted connection and the File name settings.

8 Remove the checkmark next to Always prompt for filename option,and click OK.



Use Existing HoleNext, you add another bolted connection using an existing hole.

1 Select the Blind connection type option.

Use Existing Hole | 795

2 Select By hole from the drop-down menu in the Placement box.

3 Select the start plane.

The Existing Hole command is enabled.

4 Select the countersunk hole.


The Blind Start Plane command is enabled.

5 Select the start plane for the blind hole, which in this case is the top faceof the spindle component.


The hole previews.


6 Select the Click to add a fastener text, and then select acountersink-type cap screw, for example, ISO 10642.


7 Click OK.


Edit Bolted Connection1 In the browser, double-click the Spindle component to edit it.

2 Click the Parameters command located on the Manage tab, and thenchange the value for d4 to 20 mm.

3 Click Done in the Parameters dialog box.

4 On the Quick Access toolbar, click Return to return to the assembly.

Notice that an update icon appears in the browser next to BoltedConnection:1. The bolt is not long enough to make the connection andrequires an update.


5 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Editusing Design Accelerator.

The bolted connection generator automatically previews the nextavailable size contained in the Content Center. The preview lasts longenough to pass through the bolted components, the nut, and washers.

Edit Bolted Connection | 801

6 Click OK.

7 In the graphics window, right-click the cap screw contained in BoltedConnection:2, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator.

Both the cap screw and the blind hole have grip handles. You can zoomin to see the grips.


8 Drag the upper grip handle to change the length of the cap screw.

Notice that the cap screw preview snaps to the next available lengthcontained in the available Content Center libraries. In this example, thenext available length is 20 mm.

Edit Bolted Connection | 803

Notice also that the description text for the cap screw in the generatordialog box updates immediately as you resize the cap screw.



Modify Hole Depth1 Next, drag the grip for the hole to increase the hole depth, approximating

the depth shown in the illustration.

2 Click OK.

Modify Hole Depth | 805

In addition to modifying the hole depth with a grip free-drag, you canprecisely define the hole depth.

3 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:2, and then select Editusing Design Accelerator.

4 Select the lower hole thumbnail, and then click the access button nextto the hole thumbnail.


5 In the Modify Hole dialog box, enter 16 mm in the Hole Depth fieldand 14 mm in the Thread Depth field.

6 Click the check mark to close the dialog box, and click OK in thegenerator dialog box.

Modify Hole Depth | 807



Change Bolted Connection DirectionAssume the direction for Bolted Connection:1 must be reversed. In otherwords, the nut must be next to the basic_plate component.

1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using DesignAccelerator.

2 Click Start Plane, and then select the new start plane.

3 Click Circular references, and then select the circular edge.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 809

4 Click Termination.

5 Select the termination plane.


6 Click OK.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 811


Change Configuration of Bolted ConnectionNext, we change the configuration of a bolted connection.

1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using DesignAccelerator.

Before you continue, look at the relationship between the hardware stackin the dialog box and the direction of the connection in the graphicswindow.

Notice that the direction indicator in the graphics window alwayscorresponds to the insert direction of the screw.


Though you can change the connection direction on the model, thegeneral top-to-bottom stack order of the hardware in the dialog boxremains the same. The screw is always the top-most item.

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection | 813

2 Select the thumbnail for the nut, and then click Delete to remove thenut from the connection.

3 Use the same method to delete the two washers.

4 Select the thumbnail for the hole closest to the cap screw, and then clickthe menu button.

5 Select ISO-Socket Head Cap Screw ISO 4762.


6 Next, change the type of the screw. Select the thumbnail for the capscrew, and then select the menu button.

7 Select Socket Head Bolts from the Category filter menu.

8 Select ISO 4762.

9 Drag the grip for the cap screw to shorten the length to 20 mm.


10 Click OK.




Summary

Using the Bolted Connection Generator, you have learned how to:■ Start a Bolted Connection.

■ Place holes.

■ Add fasteners.

■ Use an existing hole.

■ Edit a bolted connection.

You can check the Help files for further information.

Previous (page 812)


Shafts

About this tutorial

Design shafts.



32

819

Start a new assembly file (metric)Tutorial File Used

In this tutorial, you create and edit a shaft with the Shaft ComponentGenerator and Design Accelerator.

Objectives■ Design a shaft.

■ Check a shaft.

■ Set loads and supports.

■ Set file names.

■ Insert a shaft.

■ Redesign a shaft.


■ Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with thevarious view tools.




Next (page 820)

OverviewTo create a shaft, you complete the following steps:■ Start the Shaft Component Generator.

■ Add and remove sections to the designed shaft.

■ Set parameters of shaft sections.

■ Add shaft features.

■ Specify supports, force, and moment.

■ Edit the shaft using Design Accelerator.

820 | Chapter 32 Shafts

NOTE In this tutorial, you will insert components from the Content Center. Makesure that you have Content Center installed before you start designing the shaft.


Create an Assembly FileTo begin:

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files.

Autodesk Inventor uses template files to determine default settings forpart, assembly, and drawing files. As you become familiar with theprogram, you can define your own templates.

2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar.

3 Double-click Standard (mm).iam in the Metric tab.

4 On the Quick Access toolbar, click Save, and save a copy of thefile as shaft.iam.


Start the Shaft Generator1 On the ribbon, click on the Design tab before starting the Shaft

Generator to become familiar with the Design Accelerator commands.

Create an Assembly File | 821

2 To start the generator, on the ribbon click Design tab ➤ Power

Transmission panel ➤ Shaft .

The Shaft Component Generator opens on the Design tab, by default.

3 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft.

The shaft is ready to be configured.


2D and 3D Dynamic PreviewWhile using the Shaft Generator to design a shaft, you can preview the shaftin both the dialog box and the graphics window. The previews are dynamicand adjust automatically to show your chosen profiles and their relative sizesand positions on the shaft.

1 To display the shaft preview on the Design tab, click Options.

NOTE On the Design tab, the Options command is on the toolbar in theSections region. On the Calculation tab, the Options command is onthe toolbar in the Loads & Supports region.

2 In the 2D Preview region, select Always Show, and click OK.

This creates a dynamic preview of the shaft on the Design tab.

The 2D preview includes only sections, and displays by default on theCalculation tab.


The shaft also dynamically previews within the graphics window, accordingto the shaft features and values you specify in the dialog box. You can designa shaft by adding or deleting sections and features, or by adding loads andsupports. When you add loads and supports using commands on theCalculation tab, the preview of loads and supports appears.


Add Shaft ElementWhen you first start the Shaft Generator, the shaft contains some sections bydefault. You design the shaft by modifying, deleting, and adding shaft sections.

You can select the shaft sections with the 2D preview in the dialog box, thegraphics window, or with the tree control.

1 In the Sections area, select Sections from the drop-down list.

2 Select the tree control for the Cylinder 50 x 100 section.

Add Shaft Element | 823

NOTE You can select only one section at a time.

Notice that this section highlights in the 2D preview and in the graphicswindow.

3 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. The program addsa plain shaft section to the right of the selected element.

The first Cylinder section becomes red in the tree control. The ShaftGenerator recognizes that you have a fillet between two sections of thesame width next to each other, which is not supported. The programchanges the section back to the default color when you change the widthof one of the shaft sections.



Specify ParametersTo change the size parameters for the shaft section, you can use one of thefollowing editing methods.

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the shaft section.■

■ In the 2D Preview area of the Design tab, double-click the shaftsection or right-click and select Sections ➤ Edit from the contextmenu.

■ In the tree control of the Design tab, click , or double-click thesection or feature.

For this tutorial, we will use the first method.

1 Double-click the shaft section in the Autodesk Inventor window.

2 In the Cylinder dialog box, leave the Main Diameter value of 50 mmunchanged, but change the Section Length field to 50 mm.

3 Click OK.


Specify Parameters | 825

Specify Shaft Element TypeNow, add a retaining ring to the selected shaft section.

1 In the tree control, click the arrow next to to expand the list ofavailable features for this shaft section, and select Add Retaining Ring.

The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section.

2 To edit the retaining ring, select it in the tree control, and click .

The Retaining Ring Groove dialog box opens.

3 From the first drop-down list in the Position group box, select Measurefrom first edge.

4 Use the second drop-down list to select a retaining ring from the ContentCenter. Select ISO 464.

5 In the Dimensions box, change the Distance field to 23 mm.

6 Click OK.


Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section1 Select the first shaft section from the left.

2 To open the Cylinder dialog box, double-click the section in the 2DPreview area of the Design tab.


3 In the Cylinder dialog box, change the Main Diameter to 40 mm andSection Length to 50 mm.

4 Click OK.


Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, select the third shaft element from

the left.

2 In this step, use 3D grips to edit section parameters. For this shaftsection, two 3D grips are available. Use both of them to edit thedimensions.

Double-click the length 3D grip as shown in the image.

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 827

3 In the Edit dialog box, enter a new length value of 50 mm, and then

click . The length of the section changes.

4 Double-click the diameter 3D grip as shown on the image.


5 In the Edit dialog box, enter new length value of 65 mm, and then click

. The diameter of the section changes.

6

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 829

7 Now, add a through hole to the selected shaft section. In the tree control,

the third shaft section is activated. Click the arrow next to toexpand the list of available features for this shaft section, and select AddThrough Hole.

The default hole is added to the selected section. To edit the hole, select

it in the tree control, and click the .

8 In the Through Hole dialog box, change the Hole Diameter value to12 mm. Ensure that you change the value for the Hole Diameterparameter, not the Main Diameter parameter.

9 Click OK.


Change Dimensions of Cone Section1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the cone section. The

Cone dialog box opens.

2 Change the First Diameter value to 80 mm.

3 Click OK.



Change Dimensions of the Next SectionIn the next step, we use the 2D preview within the Design tab to edit sectionparameters.

1 In the 2D Preview area, select the cylinder as shown on the image.

2 Right-click to display the context menu, and click Sections ➤ Edit.The Cylinder dialog box opens.

3 Change the Section Length field to 40 mm, and click OK.

4 Now, add a locknut groove on the right edge of the section to the selectedshaft section. In the tree control, the appropriate shaft section is activated.

Change Dimensions of the Next Section | 831

Click the arrow next to to expand list of available right-edgefeatures, and select Lock Nut Groove from the list.

The default locknut groove is added to the selected section, and theLocknut Groove dialog box opens.

5 Change the Thread Length to 13 mm, and click OK.


Add and Edit the Last Shaft SectionTo complete the shaft shape, add one more section.

1 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. A plain shaft sectionis added to the right of the selected section.


2 In the tree control, click to display the Cylinder dialog box.

3 Change the Main Diameter field to 40 mm, and click OK.

4 Add a retaining ring feature to the selected shaft section. Click the arrow

next to to expand list of available features for this shaft section,and select Add Retaining Ring from the list.

The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section.

5 Click to display the Retaining Ring Groove dialog box to edit theparameters.

6 In the drop-down menu, select Measure from second edge to insertthe retaining ring on the right side of the cylinder section.

Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section | 833

7 Use the second drop-down list to select DIN 471 from the ContentCenter.

8 Set the Distance to 2 mm, and click OK.


Insert Cylindrical BoreYou can also insert cylindrical and conical bores. In this tutorial, you willinsert a cylindrical bore.

1 Select Bore on the left from the drop-down menu in the Sectionsarea.

2 Select Insert Cylindrical Bore from the toolbar.

3 Click to display the edit dialog box.

4 Change the Section Length field to 140 mm, and click OK.



Add Shaft to Templates LibraryNow save the designed shaft to the Templates Library.

1 To display the Templates Library area, click the More Optionscommand in the lower-right corner of the Design tab.

2 Click Add to add a newly designed shaft to the template library.

3 In the Template Description dialog box, specify the name of the templateas shaft_tutorial.

4 Click OK. This new template is added to the Templates Library.

NOTE To open the template, click Set.

TIP■ When you double-click a template, you can change the template

description.

■ You can use the drag method to reorder templates within the library.


Add Shaft to Templates Library | 835

The Calculation TabSelect the Calculation tab, which contains:■ A 2D Preview of the shaft, based on the configuration you chose on the

Design tab.

■ Loads and Supports graphical indicators.

■ A toolbar for entering loads and supports.

■ Areas for setting shaft material and additional calculation properties.

NOTE The 2D preview is on by default. To hide the 2D Preview, select the AlwaysHide option within the 2D Preview box of the Options dialog box, and clickOK.


Specify SupportsWhen you switch to the Calculation tab, notice how the 2D and 3D Previewschange. Not only the graphical representations of loads and supports aredisplayed, but there are also green and blue position markers.

For each section, the program shows three position markers: one at each endof a section, and one position marker in the middle of each section. A blueposition marker means that load or support is positioned on such a positionmarker.

NOTE Supports are represented by triangles. Loads are represented by arrows.

1 Select Supports from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supportsregion.

2 Press and hold the Alt key. In the Autodesk Inventor window, drag thesupport to the second shaft section from the left as shown on the image.


The nearest blue position marker indicates that the support is positionedtowards it.

NOTE The position marker can be half-blue and half-green if it is betweentwo sections.

3 Double-click the support to display the Free Support dialog box, andchange the Distance from middle of section field to 1.5 mm, whichis the distance from the currently active position marker to the support.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Autodesk Inventor window, press and hold the Alt key, and thendrag the second support indicator to the shaft section located on theright end of the shaft, as shown.

Specify Supports | 837


Specify Loads and Perform Calculation1 Select Loads from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports

region.

A radial force is inserted by default; however, we must change it to torque.

2 In the tree control, select Radial Force, and click the arrow next to theicon.


3 Select Torque from the displayed list. The Torque dialog box opens.Enter 200 N m in the Torque field, and click OK.

4 In the toolbar, click Torque to add a second torque. In the Torquedialog box, ensure that -200 N m is entered in the Torque field, andclick OK.

NOTE The sum of all torques must equal 0.

5 You can also change positions of the torques. In the dialog box preview,drag the torque arrows to the shaft sections as shown in the image.

6 Click the Calculate command. Expand the Results area on the rightside of the Calculation tab to see the calculated results of the loads,supports, and values.

7 Switch to the Graphs tab to view the diagrams of individual shaftloadings.

TIP Click the Result icon to display the HTML report.


File Name Settings1 Before you finish the shaft, click the Design tab.

File Name Settings | 839

2 Click the File Naming command, located at the top-right cornerof the dialog box.

If the Always Prompt for Filename option is selected, when you placethe completed shaft in the graphics window, the File Naming dialog boxappears. You use this dialog box to specify the display name and File namefor Design Accelerator components and features. For this exercise, do notselect this option.


Insert the ShaftNow, insert the completed shaft into the assembly.

1 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box.

2 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft.



Edit the ShaftYou can edit the inserted shaft.

1 Select the shaft in the browser or graphics window, then right-click, and

select Edit Using Design Accelerator.

2 Ensure that the Design tab is activated, and then select the cone section,as shown.

3 In the 2D Preview area, double-click the selected cone section to displaythe Cone box dialog box.

4 Change First Diameter to 100 mm and Section Length to 90 mm.Click OK to close the Cone dialog box.

5 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box. The edit isapplied to the shaft.

Edit the Shaft | 841


SummaryUsing the Shaft Component Generator, you learned how to:■ Start a Shaft Generator.

■ Configure a shaft.

■ Specify loads and supports.

■ Specify load values.


■ Insert a shaft.

■ Edit a shaft.

Previous (page 841)

Summary | 843

844

Spur Gears Connections

About this tutorial

33

845

Design spur gear connections.


15 - 20 minutesEmphasis

SpurGear.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used


Design a spur gears connection using the Design Accelerator Spur GearsGenerator. Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion thatsaves extensive assembly and part modeling.

Objectives■ Specify placement of gears.

■ Set the method of design.

■ Set file names.

■ Insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.


various view tools.




Next (page 846)

Open Sample File and Start Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files.

2 Open Spur Gears ➤ SpurGear.iam.

846 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections



3 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Power Transmission panel ➤

Spur Gear.

Design Accelerator generators open in the last valid state a componentwas inserted into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Spur Gear command to loadthe Spur Gears Generator with the default installation data.


Spur Gears Dialog BoxWhen you start the Spur Gears Component Generator, it opens on the Designtab. You can enter specific parameters, define spur gears placement, and selectmethods of calculation.

The Design tab is divided into several group boxes with options:

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 847

Common

This area includes parameters common for both gears, such as module or helixangle.

The Design Guide drop-down menu contains five possible options of designand calculation. Based on your selection of the design guide, the edit fieldswithin the Design tab are enabled. Every method requires different inputparameters.

Gear 1, Gear 2

This area includes parameters that can vary for Gear 1 and Gear 2 such asnumber of teeth or face width. Also, commands for placement specificationof Gear 1 and Gear 2 are located here.

Use the drop-down menu to select the type of gear to insert: component,feature, or no model.


More Options

When you click the More options command, located in the lower-rightcorner of the Design tab, the area with other options for spur gears designopens. For example, if you select Number of Teeth in the Input Typegroup box, it indicates that number of teeth is a known value.

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 849

Results

Double-click the double line on the right, or click the chevron to display theResults pane with the list of calculated values. The values in gray indicate thatresults do not match the inserted values in the Design tab. Click Calculateto get results for current inputs.



Select Gear Options1 Within the Common area of the Design tab, select the Module option

from the Design Guide drop-down menu. The selected option indicateswhat the design and calculation is based on. In this tutorial, we selectthe Module option.

Select Gear Options | 851

2 Click the More Options command located in the lower-rightcorner of the Design tab for additional options for spur gears.

3 On the Size Type group box, select Module.

If you design spur gears in a metric assembly, the generator selects theModule option by default. If you design spur gears using English units,the generator selects the Diametral Pitch option.

4 In the Input Type area, select the Number of Teeth option. In thiscase, the number of teeth is an input parameter.

5 In this tutorial, you insert one feature and one component. SelectFeature from the drop-down menu in the Gear 1 group box. The firstgear is inserted as a feature of the shaft in the assembly.

6 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Gear 2 groupbox. The second gear is inserted as a new part.


NOTE Alternatively, you can select the No Model option to insert acalculation without a component or feature.

NOTE If you insert features, you cannot use Motion for your gears to rotatethem. It is possible only if you insert two components.


Place the Gear1 To specify the placement for Gear 1, click Cylindrical Face in the Gear

1 group box.

2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face as shown in thefollowing image.

Place the Gear | 853

NOTE The diameter of section on the shaft must be equal or greater thanoutside diameter of the gear.

3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within theassembly.

4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the followingimage.


A preview shows Gear 1 in the specified position.

Place the Gear | 855


Place the Second GearNow, you can specify the position for the second gear.

1 In the Gear 2 group box, click Cylindrical Face.

2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face to place the secondgear as shown in the following image.


3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within theassembly.

4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the followingimage.

Place the Second Gear | 857

A preview shows Gear 2 in the specified position.



Enter ParametersNow, you can enter parameters into the Common, Gear 1, and Gear 2 groupboxes.

1 Set Pressure Angle value to 20 degrees.

2 Set Helix Angle value to 12 degrees.

3 Enter the correct number of teeth. Your gear design is based on theseknown parameters. Enter 29 into the Number of Teeth edit field inthe Gear 1 area.

4 Enter 57 into the Number of Teeth edit field in the Gear 2 area.

5 Set both Facewidth values in Gear 1 and Gear 2 to 30 mm.

6 Set Unit Correction in Gear 1 area box to 0.


Enter Parameters | 859

Perform the Calculation and Set File Names1 To perform the calculation, click Calculate. The preview updates, and

the message in the Summary of messages area reports that thecalculation completed successfully.

2 To open the Summary of messages area located at the bottom of theCalculation and Design tabs, double-click the double line at thebottom of the tabs, or click the chevron at the bottom of the tabs.

In the graphics window, the preview of the spur gears connection reflectsall inserted values, such as numbers of teeth.

3 Click OK. The File Naming dialog box opens.

In the File Naming dialog box, you can specify the Display name andFile name for Design Accelerator components and features. When theAlways prompt for filename box is checked, the dialog box opensevery time you insert the Design Accelerator component or feature.

4 Click OK to insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.



Perform the Calculation and Set File Names | 861

Summary

Using the Spur Gears Generator, you learned how to:■ Start a Spur Gears connection.

■ Set calculation options.

■ Place components.

■ Perform the calculation.

■ Set file names.

Check the Help for further information about generators.

Previous (page 860)


V-Belts Connections

About this tutorial

Design V-belts connections.



VBelts.iamTutorial File Used

34

863


Create and edit a V-belts drive using the Design Accelerator V-Belts generator.Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that savesextensive assembly and part modeling

Objectives■ Design V-belts driven with two pulleys.

■ Design a belt.

■ Set pulley properties.

■ Set file names and display names.

■ Insert V-belts connection.


various view tools.




Next (page 864)

Start the Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open

V-Belts ➤ VBelts.iam.

864 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections



2 Click Design tab ➤ Power Transmission panel ➤ V-Belts.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the V-Belts command to load theV-Belts Component Generator with the default installation data.


Select the Belt Plane1 First, select a work plane or planar face as the midplane of the belt.

The Belt Mid Plane command activates.

2 Select the visible work plane as shown in the following image.

Select the Belt Plane | 865

When you select the work plane, the grips display. The number of displayedgrips depends on the number of pulleys.


NOTE The V-belts Generator opens with the last valid settings.


Select Belt Type1 In the Belt section of the V-belts Generator, click the down arrow to

display the available V-belts.

2 Select the A - ANSI/RMA IP-20 Classical Wrapped V-belt.

Select Belt Type | 867

NOTE In this Autodesk Inventor version, the V-belts Generator is not connectedto the Content Center.


Select First Pulley Type1 In the Pulleys region, click the down arrow of the first pulley.

2 Select Grooved Pulley A,AX - ANSI/RMA IP20.

NOTE When you start the V-belts Generator, there are always two pulleys displayed.To add other pulleys, click the Click to add pulley text.


Set First Pulley Position1 In the Pulleys region, select the first pulley. Click the arrow to display

options for geometry placement of the first pulley.

2 Select the Fixed position by selected geometry option.

The pulley preview activates.


3 Select the cylindrical face of the shaft to position the first pulleyautomatically.

Set First Pulley Position | 869


Select Second Pulley Type1 In the Pulleys box, click the row with the second pulley.

2 Click the down arrow, and select Grooved Pulley A,AX ANSI/RMAIP20.



Set Second Pulley Position1 In the Pulleys box, click the arrow to display options for geometry

placement for the second pulley.

2 Select the Direction driven sliding position option.

3 Select the sliding work plane for the holder.


Set Second Pulley Position | 871

Change Pulley Properties1 Click the Edit command of the second pulley to open the Groove Pulley

Properties dialog box.

2 Select Transmission Ratio from the Design Guide drop-down menu.

3 Enter 2 in the Ratio edit field in the Dimensions area, and click OK.


Specify the Second Pulley Final Position1 In the assembly, drag the center grip and place the second pulley to the

appropriate position.


The sliding is available along the selected sliding work plane. The programdetermines the final pulley position according to available belt length.

2 To perform strength analysis, switch to the Calculation page of theV-belt generator.


File Name Settings1 In the upper-right corner of the V-Belts Component Generator, click

File Naming.

The File Naming dialog box specifies the Display name of V-beltconnection components and the Filename settings.

2 In the File Naming dialog box, select the Always prompt for filenamebox. By making this selection, you are prompted for the newly insertedDesign Accelerator file name and display name of the component everytime you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the V-belts transmission to the assembly.

File Name Settings | 873


Place Constraints1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Position panel ➤ Constrain.

2 Constrain the second pulley axis to the shaft axis using the Mateconstraint.

The following image shows the correct selection of the constraint forthe second pulley axis.




Place Constraints | 875

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Design V-belts connection with two pulleys.

■ Design a belt.

■ Set pulley properties.


■ Insert a V-belts connection.

Remember to check Help for further information.

Previous (page 874)


Bearings

About this tutorial



35

877

bearing.iam (ANSI standard)Tutorial File Used


Create and edit a bearing connection using the Design Accelerator Bearinggenerator.

Objectives■ Select bearings from Content Center according to specific criteria.

■ Set bearing parameters.

■ Set criteria parameters for bearing selection.

■ Insert a bearing.


■ Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space withthe various view tools.




Next (page 878)

Start the Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open

Bearings ➤ bearing.iam.

878 | Chapter 35 Bearings




Bearing.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Bearing command to loadthe Bearing Generator with the default installation data.


Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start PlaneSpecify the position of the first bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face , and select the shaft face in theassembly.

Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 879

2 Click Start Plane. Select the plane in the shaft where thebearing will be mated.


3 Click the Orientation option to change the orientation of thebearing.

The program automatically inserts the Bearing Inside Diameter (ShaftDiameter) value into the filter dimension edit fields on the right side ofthe Design tab.

NOTE The beginning workflow can vary. You can first select the type of bearingfrom Content Center, and then specify ranges for outside bearing diameter, shaftdiameter, and bearing width. Selecting the shaft cylindrical face is a logical firststep, because the program then inserts the values for shaft diameter automaticallyinto the Bearing Generator.


Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 881

Select Type of BearingSelect the type of Bearing from Content Center.

1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the topmost edit fieldin the dialog box.

2 Click the icon to select Angular Contact Ball Bearings.

The bearing that matches the inserted criteria appears in the lower partof the Design tab.

Tips

■ For bearing selection, Family is recommended.

■ To narrow your selection, you can select Standard when you choosebearings from Content Center.


Set Filter Parameters


To narrow bearing selection, you can enter filter values for bearing dimensions.It is not necessary to do so in this tutorial, because previously you selectedthe cylindrical face in the assembly, and the appropriate Inside BearingDiameter (Shaft Diameter) range values were inserted into the second rowof filter edit fields. These filter edit fields appear on the right side of the Designtab.

In this tutorial, we use the ANSI Standard, which usually offers one bearingfor one Inside bearing diameter. In the lower part of the Design tab, onlyone bearing appears.

To narrow the selection:

1 In the first row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearingoutside diameter.

2 In the third row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearingwidth.

NOTE You must enter both filter values. They can be identical.


Update the Bearing List1 Change the type of bearing or the filter values, as described previously,

to activate the Update command.

2 Click the Update command to update the list of bearings that matchthe filter criteria.


Select BearingWhen the bearing list is updated, a list of bearings that match the criteriaappears in the lower part of the Design tab. In this tutorial, only the SKF ALS15 bearing displays in the list; however, you must still select it.

1 Move your cursor over the row containing the bearing.

Update the Bearing List | 883

2 Click the row to select the bearing.

When you select the bearing, it displays in the field above the list, and theOK command is enabled.


Perform the Calculation1 Click the Calculation tab to perform a calculation and strength check.

2 Select the type of calculation. In this tutorial, select the Checkcalculation option.

3 Enter 100 lbforce for the Radial Load.

4 Set 3000 lbforce for Basic Dynamic Load Rating in the BearingProperties group box.

5 Click Calculate to perform the calculation. Results appear on the rightside of the Calculation tab.

NOTE The values of the bearing selected in the Design tab are inserted into theedit fields automatically.


Insert First BearingAfter you have performed the calculation and strength check described in theprevious lesson, you can insert the first bearing.

1 Click OK to display the File Naming dialog box.

2 Clear the Always prompt for filename check box to preventprompting for a new Design Accelerator file name and component displayname every time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the bearing into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.


In the next several lessons, we insert a second bearing.


Start the Generator and Specify Bearing FilterValue

Set the filter to find the appropriate bearing according to the Inside bearingdiameter dimension.


Bearing.

2 In the right side of the Design tab, click the arrow next to thesecond From field.

3 Select Measure from the menu.

4 In the assembly, click the shaft element to measure the dimension.

Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value | 885

The program inserts the Inside bearing diameter value (2 in) into theFrom field.

5 To insert the end value, enter 2 in the To field.



Select Bearing TypeSelect the type of Bearing from the Content Center.

1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the first edit field.

2 Click the icon to select the Angular Contact Ball Bearings category.

A list of the bearings matching the inserted criteria are displayed in thelower part of the Design tab.

3 Select the ALS 16 bearing.

The name of the selected bearing displays in the field above the list.


Place and Insert Second BearingNow, we specify placement of the second bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face , and select the shaft face in theassembly.

Select Bearing Type | 887

2 Ensure the Start Plane command is selected, and select theplane in the shaft where the bearing will be mated.


3 Click the Orientation option to change the orientation of thebearing.

4 Select the bearing from the list near the bottom of the dialog box.

5 Click OK to insert the second bearing into assembly.



Place and Insert Second Bearing | 889

Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Select bearings from the Content Center according to specific criteria.

■ Set bearing parameters.

■ Insert bearings.

Previous (page 887)


Disc Cams

About this tutorial

36

891

Design disc cams.



Cam_Spring.iamTutorial File Used


In this tutorial, you design and edit cams using the Design Accelerator DiscCam Generator.

Objectives■ Design a disc cam.

■ Position the disc cam within the assembly.

■ Set disc cam properties.

■ Add your own motion file.

■ Set a file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Acceleratorcomponent.

■ Insert the disc cam into the assembly.


various view tools.




Next (page 893)

892 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams



Start the Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams

and Compression Springs ➤ Cam_Spring.iam.


Disc Cam .

The Disc Cam Generator opens in the Design tab by default.

NOTE To load the Disc Cam Component Generator with the defaultinstallation data, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Disc Camcommand.



Specify Disc Cam PlacementTo insert a model of the disc cam into the assembly:

1 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Cam region ofthe dialog box.

NOTE If you select the No Model option from the drop-down list, theprogram inserts only the calculation into the assembly.

2 Click Cylindrical Face, and then select the cylindrical face.

3 Click Start plane, and then select the start plane.



Specify Disc Cam ParametersIn the Cam region, enter the parameters for the cam:

1 In the Basic Radius field, enter 22 mm.

2 In the Cam Width field, enter 10 mm.

3 Click More Options in the lower right corner of the Design tab.

4 In the Follower Type region, select Swinging Arm.

5 In the Follower Shape region, select Cylinder.

6 In the Follower region (in the upper portion of the dialog box), enter16 mm in the Roller Radius field.

7 In the Pivot Distance field, enter 60 mm.

8 In the Arm Length field, enter 60 mm.

9 In the Reaction Arm field, enter 60 mm.

Specify Disc Cam Parameters | 895


Set Segment Values1 In the Actual Segment region, select 1 from the drop-down menu.

■ You can also select a segment by clicking the segment in the graph.

■ You can set segment length by dragging the segment end in the grapharea.

2 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select Double

Harmonic - Part 1.

3 Set Motion End Position to 90 degrees.

4 Set Lift at End to 5 mm.

5 In the Actual Segment region, select 2 from the drop-down menu.

6 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select DoubleHarmonic - Part 2.

7 Set Motion End Position to 180 degrees.



Adding SegmentsThough you do not add or delete segments in this tutorial, this page describeshow to do so.■ Click Add After in the Actual Segment area to add a new segment after

the currently selected segment.

■ Click Add Before to add new segment before the currently selectedsegment.

■ Click Delete to delete the currently selected segment.

■ The Zoom command switches on or off the zoom to the cam elementgraphs only.

■ The Save graph data to file command saves all graph data anddata about cam profile and follower path to the tab-delimited text file.


Adding Segments | 897

Create Your Own Motion FileThe following page is not required to complete this tutorial.

The Disc Cam Generator offers a list of motions available within the drop-downmenu in the Actual Segment region. You can also define your own type ofmotion, as well as remove any user-defined motion from the menu.

Create and define a motion.

1 Create a text file, and enter the following values for a Polynomial motionof the third degree.

NOTE You must format the text file properly. Click the Help command onthe Add Motion dialog box for more information.

00

0.0280.1

0.1040.2

0.2160.3

0.3520.4

0.50.5

0.6480.6

0.7840.7

0.8960.8

0.9720.9

11

2 Save the file.


3 In the Actual Segment region of the cam generator, click Add newuser motion.

4 Enter a motion name.

5 Browse to, and select, the .TXT file you created.

6 Click OK to add your motion to the list of motions. Each user motion

appears with the icon.

TIP To delete a user-defined motion, select the motion and then click Delete.


Perform the CalculationYou use the Calculation tab to set values to perform calculation and strengthcheck.

1 Switch to the Calculation tab.

2 Select Cycle Time, and enter 1 s.

3 In the Follower Loads region, enter 20 N for the Force on Rollerfield.

4 For Accelerated Weight, enter 0.010 kg.

5 For Spring Rating, enter 2 N/mm.

6 Enter these values for the Cam Material and Follower Materialfields.■ For the Allowable Pressure field, enter 200 MPa.

■ For the Modulus of Elasticity field, enter 206700 MPa.

■ For the Poisson’s Ratio field, enter 0.3 ul.

7 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.

The program shows the results on the right side of the Calculation tab. Theinputs that fail the calculation are displayed in red (their value does notcorrespond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of thecalculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area. It displays whenyou click the chevron in the lower-right part of the Calculation tab.

Perform the Calculation | 899

TIP Click the Results command in the right upper corner to open anHTML report.

Click OK.


File Name SettingsIn the File Naming dialog box:

1 Specify the Display name of the disc cam and the File name settings.

2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newlyinserted Design Accelerator file name and display name of the componentevery time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the disc cam into the assembly.



Place Constraints1 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Position panel ➤ Constrain

.

2 In the Assembly tab of the Place Constraint dialog box, select the

Tangent type to constrain the cam.

Place Constraints | 901

3 Save the assembly. You use this assembly in the Compression Springstutorial.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you used the Design Accelerator Disc Cam generator to createand edit cams.


You learned how to:■ Design a disc cam.

■ Position the disc cam within the assembly.

■ Set disc cam properties.

■ Add your own motion file.

■ Set the file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Acceleratorcomponent.

■ Insert a disc cam into the assembly.

Refer to the Help for further information.

Previous (page 901)

Summary | 903

904

Compression Springs

About this tutorial

37

905

Design compression springs.



Cam_Spring.iamTutorial File Used


In this tutorial, you create compression springs using the Design AcceleratorCompression Spring generator.

Objectives■ Design a compression spring.

■ Position the compression spring within the assembly.

■ Use the graphical preview.

■ Set compression spring properties.


■ Insert the compression spring into the assembly.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Disc Cams tutorial.





Next (page 907)

906 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs



Start the Generator1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams

and Compression Springs ➤ Cam_Spring.iam.

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Spring panel ➤ Compression

.

The Compression Spring Generator opens in the Design tab by default,with the last valid settings.

■ Hold the CTRL key while clicking the Compression command toload the Compression Spring Component Generator with the defaultinstallation data.


■ We recommend that you create a disc cam using the disc cam tutorialbefore you design a compression spring, so that your assembly iscomplete.


Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load1 Click Axis in the Placement region, and then select the cylindrical

face of the valve.

2 Select Start Plane. Orbit the assembly and select the start plane of thetop retainer as shown on the image below.


A graphical preview of the compression spring displays in the AutodeskInventor assembly.

Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 909

A graphical preview of the selected geometry displays in AutodeskInventor.

In the graphical preview of the compression spring, four types of gripsare available:

■ grips to specify the spring diameter

■ grips to specify the wire diameter

■ grip to move the spring along its axis

■ grip to change the coils number

3 To edit a value, drag or double-click the appropriate grip.

4 On the Design tab, in the Placement region, select

Min. Load from the drop-down menu.


NOTE When you click the spring reference image at the top of the Design tab,a schematic image with the basic spring dimensions opens.


Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 911

Measure the DimensionWe can use the Measure command to measure the distance between twofaces. The generator automatically designs a compression preview accordingto the measured distance.

1 Select the Calculation tab. In the Spring Strength Calculationregion, select Compression Spring Design from the drop-down menu.

2 In the Assembly Dimensions region select H, L1--> L8.

3 Click the arrow next to the Min. Load Length field.

4 Select Measure.

5 In Autodesk Inventor assembly, select two faces on the spring retainersto measure the distance between them.


6 Click Calculate to display the preview. Notice that measured distanceof 30 mm appears in the Min. Load Length field.

Measure the Dimension | 913


Perform the CalculationIn the Calculation tab, you can set the values for compression springcalculation.

1 In Calculation Options, select F, Assembly Dimensions -->d, L0,n, D from the Design Type drop-down menu.

2 Select No Correction from the Method of Stress CurvatureCorrection drop-down menu.

3 In the Loads region:■ Set Min. Load to 500 N.

■ Set Max. Load to 800 N.

■ Set Working Load to 600 N.

4 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.


The program shows results on the right side of the Calculation tab.The inputs that fail the calculation appear in red (their value does notcorrespond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports ofthe calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area, whichappears after you click the chevron in the lower-right part of theCalculation tab.

5 Click the Results command in the right upper corner to openthe HTML report.

6 Click OK.


Insert the Compression Spring into the AssemblyIn the File Naming dialog box:

1 Specify the Display name of compression spring and the File namesettings.

2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newlyinserted Design Accelerator component's file name and display nameevery time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the compression spring to the assembly.

When you were designing the compression spring, the program promptedyou to select the compression spring placement. The program places thecompression spring in the selected position.


Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly | 915



Summary

The skills you learned in this tutorial include:■ Design a compression spring.

■ Position the compression spring within the assembly.

■ Use the graphical preview.

■ Set compression spring properties.


■ Insert a compression spring into the assembly.

Remember to check Help for further information.

Previous (page 915)

Summary | 917

918

Weldments

About this tutorial

Build weldments.



Welding.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used

38

919


In this tutorial, you build a weldment from an assembly.

The weldment file is a variation on the assembly template and opens with theWeld tab active. You can also use any of the other assembly tabs andcommands.

You use the welding feature groups (Preparations, Welds, or Machining) toadd assembly-level features and fully define your weldment.

Objectives■ Add weld preparation features.

■ Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■ Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■ Rollback to any weldment state.

■ Create weldment drawings.






Next (page 920)

Welding Steps OverviewWhen creating a weld in this tutorial, your steps include the following:

1 Set up your workspace.

2 Open an existing assembly.

3 Change to the weldment environment.

920 | Chapter 38 Weldments



4 Add groove and fillet cosmetic welds.

5 Add post-weld machining features.

6 Examine weld preparations and 3D fillet welds.

After the weldment is complete, you will:■ Turn off the display of weld symbols in the model.

■ Open a blank drawing.

■ Create drawing views of the various weldment stages.

■ Retrieve weld symbols from the model.

■ Add a cosmetic weld annotation in the drawing.

Welding Steps Overview | 921


Weldment Feature GroupsThe three weld groups represent stages in the weldment process:■ Preparations - Metal removal, typically a chamfer, to prepare for a weld.

■ Welds - Fillet, groove, and cosmetic weld beads.

■ Machining - Metal removal after welding, often through multiple assemblycomponents.

Features added in the three groups act at the assembly-level only. They do notappear in the individual parts and subassemblies.

The following image shows weld and machining features in a weldmentassembly.


The weldment features exist in the weldment assembly only and do not affectthe part files.

You activate the various weldment feature groups with the Weld tab orthrough the Model browser. To do this, you must first open a Weldment file.

1 Set the active project to tutorial_files.

2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar. Ensure that you clickthe icon itself, and not the associated drop-down menu.

3 To ensure that you complete this tutorial using a metric template file,click the Metric tab displayed along the top of the selection area of thedialog box.

4 Double-click the template file Weldment (ANSI - mm).iam.

5 To activate the Preparation feature group, click Preparation on theWeld tab.

Commands for creating weld preparations, such as chamfers andassembly-level cut extrusions, become active on the Weld tab.

You can also activate one of the three weld groups through the Modelbrowser. For example, if you double-click Welds in the browser, thecommands for creating welds, such as Fillet, Groove, and Cosmetic,become active. Alternatively, you can right-click a group in the browserand select Edit from the context menu.

6 Close this file without saving.


Weldment Feature Groups | 923

Open an AssemblyTwo different workflows can be used to create a weldment. You can:■ Use a weldment template to create an empty weldment into which you

then place components and welds.

■ Open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

In this exercise, you open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

1 Click Open on the Quick Access toolbar, and then openWeldments ➤ Welding.iam.

2 Click Zoom All on the Navigation bar to fit the model in the window.

3 On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤ Convert panel ➤

Convert to Weldment.

A message appears alerting you that the weldment cannot be convertedback to an assembly.

4 Click Yes. The Convert to Weldment dialog box displays.

5 Click the ANSI Standard option.

6 Select Welded Steel Mild from the Weld Bead Material drop-downlist.

7 Click OK.


The weld feature groups (Preparations, Welds, and Machining) appearin the Model browser.


Weld TypesYou can create three types of weld features: fillet, groove, and cosmetic welds.

Cosmetic weld features, the preferred type, are represented by graphicalelements. You can represent a wide variety of weld beads as cosmetic welds,including fillet welds and various groove welds.

Weld preparations are not required for cosmetic welds. The weld symbolcontains the weld preparation required for the selected edges.

Cosmetic weld features do not affect mass properties, and the application doesnot consider them during interference analysis.

You can also create 3D fillet welds.■ The weld is a true 3D feature in the assembly.

■ The program evaluates 3D fillet welds in assembly mass properties andinterference analysis.

Weld Types | 925

TIP Limit the use of 3D fillet welds to specific cases that require functionality notavailable in cosmetic welds.


Add a Cosmetic Weld BeadIn this portion of the tutorial, you add two cosmetic weld beads to theassembly.

To add a weld bead, you must first activate the Welds group.

1 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit from thepop-up context menu.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Cosmetic.

3 Select the five edges on the Brace part. Edge selections define the extentsof the weld bead.


NOTE You may need to use the Select Other command to select the two verticaledges.


Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued)1 Click the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog

box, then click Weld Symbol as shown.

2 On the Weld Symbol palette, click Bevel Groove Weld.

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) | 927


Complete the Cosmetic Weld1 Define the weld properties:

NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identifythe field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application windowis active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under thecursor.

■ Enter 6 mm in the Depth field (use the following illustration forreference).

■ Enter 6 mm in the Leg 2 field.

■ Select the Flat symbol from the Contour drop-down menu.

■ Select G (grind) from the Method drop-down menu (this menu isonly visible after you specify a contour).


2 Click OK.

NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identifythe field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application windowis active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under thecursor.

The program represents a cosmetic weld with a bright orange line. Theweld symbol is attached to the cosmetic weld.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not appear exactly as shown in the previousillustration.

3 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Return panel ➤ Return.

4 Save the file.


Complete the Cosmetic Weld | 929

Weld ExtentsYou can control the length of single edge welds by specifying two parallelfaces or work planes.

1 In the Model browser, right-click the START WELD work plane, andselect Visibility.

2 Repeat for the END WELD work plane.

3 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit.

4 Click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Cosmetic.

5 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

TIP If you select the wrong edge, press the Ctrl key and deselect the edge.


Complete the Weld Extent1 In the Cosmetic Weld dialog box, select From-To from the Extents

drop-down list.

2 Select the two visible work planes.


TIP Click on the outer edge of a work plane to select it.

3 To specify the weld bead size, begin by clicking the Create WeldingSymbol check box to expand the dialog box.

4 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 text box.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Return.

7 Turn off the visibility of the two work planes.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not be visible following creation, or it may notappear like the previous illustration. If it is not visible, orbit the model until youcan see the symbol. You can click the symbol, and then drag the green grips toresize the symbol leader or move the symbol along the weld.


Create a 3D Fillet WeldNext, we add a simple 3D fillet weld to one of the cylindrical reinforcementplates.

1 In the Model browser, double-click the Welds node.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Weld panel ➤ Fillet.

Create a 3D Fillet Weld | 931

For a 3D weld, you select sets of faces on two different components. Theprogram creates the weld at the common edges of the faces.

3 Click the channel face adjacent to one of the cylindrical plates.


Complete the 3D Fillet WeldTo complete the weld, select the other face to locate the weld.

1 In the dialog box, click the Select Face(s) 2 button.

2 Click the cylindrical face on the adjacent plate.


3 Enter 6 mm in both fields under the selector buttons.

4 Select the Create Welding Symbol check box.

5 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 field.

6 Click OK to create a 45 degree fillet with a leg length of 6 mm.

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld | 933


Change Weld Symbol VisibilityIn larger weldments, the graphics screen can become cluttered with weldsymbols. You can control the visibility of weld symbols, or weld features,individually or as a group.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then remove the checkmarkfrom Symbol Visibility. The program hides the weld symbols in thegraphics window.

Alternatively, expand the Welds node and switch the visibility ofindividual weld symbols.

2 Click Return to go back to the weldment assembly environment.


Add a Machining FeatureWeldments often require machining after welding. The final weld featuregroup, Machining, provides a way to add assembly-level features that removematerial from the welded assembly.

To add a machining feature, on the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Processpanel ➤ Machining.



Add a Hole1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Preparation and Machining

panel ➤ Hole.

2 In the Holes dialog box, select Concentric from the Placementdrop-down menu.

3 Select the top face of one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates.

4 For the circular reference, select the circular edge of the cylindrical plate.

5 Highlight the 3-mm dimension in the Diameter field, and then enter33 mm as the hole diameter.

6 Select Through All from the Termination drop-down menu.

7 Click OK.

The hole feature cuts through the two hole plates and the channel.

NOTE You can add extrude cuts, chamfers, and hole features in both thePreparations and Machining weld groups.


Add a Hole | 935

Add an Extrude CutAdd a second machining feature that cuts through one of the welds.

1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ 2D Sketch.

2 Click the top face of the brace highlighted in the following figure.

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project

Geometry.

4 Click the edge highlighted as shown.



Complete the Sketch1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Center Point

Circle.

2 Move the cursor over the midpoint of the projected line, and then clickwhen the green midpoint symbol appears.

3 Move the cursor away from the center point, and then click again todefine the radius of the circle.

The exact size of the circle radius is not important. Use the circle in thefollowing figure as a guide.

4 Right-click, and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu.

5 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch orright-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.


Extrude the Sketch1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Preparation and Machining

panel ➤ Extrude.

The program selects the circle profile.

2 Select All from the Extents drop-down list in the Extrude dialog box.

Complete the Sketch | 937

3 Ensure that Direction is selected as shown.

The program previews the cut, which should look like the image below.

4 Click OK.

The cut affects the two components and the weld bead.



Feature RollbackThe three weldment groups represent time-dependent processes in the creationof a welded assembly. Features from a subsequent process cannot appear whenan earlier group is active. For example, machining features do not appearwhen the Welds group is active.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then select Edit from thepop-up context menu.

The program rolls back the model to the welding state and removes thetwo machining features.

2 Click Return.

In the weldment assembly environment, all weld group features arevisible.


Feature Rollback | 939

Create a Weldment DrawingYou can create drawing views of the weldment in the following states:■ Assembled with no assembly-level features.

■ Complete with weld preparations.

■ As welded.

■ With all post-weld machining.

To create a weldment drawing:

1 OpenWelding.idw.

The drawing contains a blank A0 sheet with a border.

2 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base.

The Drawing View dialog box displays.

If Welding.iam is the only model open, it is automatically selected asthe source for the drawing. (If nothing is selected it is likely that youhave not clicked Return as instructed on the previous panel).

3 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the Filelist, and then select Welding.iam from the list.

4 On the Model State tab, select Welds from the Weldment list.

5 On the Component tab, select All Components from theRepresentation View menu.

6 Select 1/2 from the Scale list.

7 Click Top in the Orientation list.


Place Drawing ViewsTo complete the base view:

1 Click the upper-left corner of the sheet as shown.


2 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Projected

command is automatically activated.

3 In the graphics window, move the cursor below the base view and clickwhen a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.


Complete Orthographic ViewsYou can continue to place projected views from the base view.

1 Move the cursor to the right of the base view.

2 Click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Complete Orthographic Views | 941

3 Right-click, and select Create.


As-machined Drawing ViewsNow create drawing views of the as-machined weldment.

1 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Base

to display the Drawing View dialog box.

2 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the Filelist, and then select Welding.iam from the list.


3 Select All Components from the View pane on the Component tab.

4 Ensure Machining is selected from the Weldment list on the ModelState tab.

5 Select 1/2 from the Scale list.

6 Click Top in the Orientation list.

7 To complete the base view, click to the right of the existing views.


Projected Drawing ViewsAdd two projected drawing views from the base view of the machined state.

1 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Projected

command is automatically activated.

2 Add two projected views to match the image shown.

Projected Drawing Views | 943

The machining features appear in the drawing views based on the weldedstate of the assembly.


Retrieve Weld SymbolsYou can retrieve weld symbols from the model in the drawing views.

1 Right-click the side view of the as-welded assembly.

2 Select Get Model Annotations ➤ Get Welding Symbols from theoverflow menu.

NOTE The overflow menu appears just below or just above the markingmenu. Its location depends on where you right-click in the graphics window.

Symbols for visible welds in the view are retrieved from the model anddisplayed. If a weld displays in pink, right-click the symbol, and thenselect Delete from the overflow menu.


3 To reposition and reorient the symbol, you can click a weld symbol andthen drag the green grips.


Add a CaterpillarYou can add cosmetic weld entities to drawing views in place of, or to improvethe documentation of, cosmetic model welds. You can add weld caterpillarsand weld end treatment geometry to any drawing view.

1 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤ Navigate panel ➤ Zoom

Window.

2 Zoom in on the front view of the as-welded assembly, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Add a Caterpillar | 945


Add a Caterpillar (continued)1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Symbols panel ➤

Caterpillar.

2 Click the five line/arc segments highlighted as shown.


3 Click the Partial command.

A partial caterpillar displays on one side of the highlighted edge.

4 Move the cursor away from the view to position the caterpillar towardthe outside of the weldment, and click to place the caterpillar.

Click the following image to play an animation. Notice how thecaterpillar switches sides as the cursor moves.

5 Click the Options tab.

6 Enter 6 mm in the Width edit box.

7 Enter 2 mm in the Spacing edit box.

8 Check Seam Visibility.

9 Click OK.

10 Save your work.


Add a Caterpillar (continued) | 947

SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Create a weldment from an assembly.

■ Add weld preparation features.

■ Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■ Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■ Rollback to any weldment state.

■ Create weldment drawings.

Previous (page 946)


Sheet Metal Parts 39

949

About this tutorial

950 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts

Build sheet metal parts.



Cylinder Clamp.iam metric_hole.ide 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idwTutorial FileUsed


Parts fabricated from sheet metal are commonly required in designs. AutodeskInventor provides functionality that simplifies the design, editing, anddocumentation of both the finished folded model and flat patterns associatedwith sheet metal parts.

Objectives■ Create a simple sheet metal guard working within the context of the

Cylinder Clamp assembly that was used in the Assemblies tutorial.

■ Add sheet metal-specific annotations to a drawing of the guard.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.

■ Understand the basics of sheet metal fabrication.





Next (page 952)




Get StartedIn the first portion of this tutorial, you will create a simple sheet metal guard.You create the guard in the assembly using projected geometry andmeasurements of assembly components. This workflow ensures that the guardwill be sized correctly.

There are other ways to start a design. Before you begin the steps of the tutorial,let’s review a typical workflow that produces a similar model:

1 A common first step is the creation of a closed profile sketch.

2 Using this closed profile sketch, a sheet metal Face feature is created asthe base feature of the model.


3 Once a base Face feature exists, Flange features can be added.

4 Additional Flange features with automatic mitering can be added toexisting Flange features.

5 Finally, a series of Hole features can complete the model.

Using a Face feature as the base feature is very common in a stand-alone designworkflow. However, the sheet metal part that you are creating will often needto fit inside or over existing parts in an assembly. In the next portion of thetutorial, you open an existing assembly and create a part like the oneillustrated. You will use geometry selected in the assembly to determine thesize and position of the features that you will create.

Get Started | 953


Open the Assembly1 Set your project to tutorial_files.

2 OpenCylinder Clamp ➤ Cylinder Clamp.iam.

3 Using the View Cube, Orbit, or View Face, adjust your view of theassembly so that it appears as follows:

The guard that you are going to create must fit over the base. By creating thesketch for a Contour Flange feature on the face of Cylinder Base.ipt, youcan use the geometry of that part while defining your sketch profile geometry.

4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤ Create,or right-click and select Create Component from the marking menu.

5 Enter my_2mm_guard in the New Component Name field in the CreateIn-Place Component dialog box.


6 Click the Browse Templates button to the right of the Templatefield, which contains Standard.ipt as the default selection, and selectthe Metric tab in the displayed Open Template dialog box.

7 Select the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template, and click OK to enter theselection in the Create In-Place Component dialog box (replacing thedefault) and close the Open Template dialog box.

8 Click OK to close the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

9 In the graphics window, click to select the back face of CylinderBase.ipt as shown:

Following the selection of the face shown, an empty sketch within the newlycreated sheet metal file displays. Next you create a simple open profile sketchto use to create a Contour Flange as the base feature of your guard.


Open the Assembly | 955

Prepare Your Sketch

NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you haverecently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, your sketch grid isundisplayed by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not requirethe use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the grid displayed orundisplayed.

While creating a part within an assembly, you are able to see and referencethe other parts in the assembly. By default, when you reference geometry inanother part, you get an associative relationship to that part. If the originalpart changes, the geometry that you created also changes to honor theassociation. In this tutorial, you use an option to reference the geometrywithout creating the associative reference. In situations where you are certain


there will be no further design changes, not creating an associative relationshipimproves subsequent assembly recompute performance.

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Constructionto ensure that the line you project is “construction” geometry that willnot be used for feature creation.

2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry, orright-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu.

3 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the loweredge of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key while projecting geometry breaks the associativelink that would normally be obtained.

Next, you create a simple, three-line sketch that represents the inside faces ofthe Contour Flange. It will create the basic shape of the guard.


Prepare Your Sketch | 957

Create the Open Profile1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction

to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry.

2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or right-click andselect Line from the marking menu.

3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over the lower-left corner ofCylinder Base.ipt until you see the green circle. It indicates that youare over the endpoint of the construction line that you previouslyprojected.

4 Click to place the first point of your line.

5 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indications,place three line segments: vertical, then horizontal, and then verticalagain. Beginning the new segment from the end point of the previoussegment ensures that the lines form a single, continuous open profile.Your profile should appear as in the following image:


NOTE To determine the horizontal endpoint on the right end of segment2, drag your cursor down to locate the right end point of the constructionline that you projected earlier and then move your cursor upwards verticallymaintaining that alignment. The lower endpoint of segment 3 should becoincident with the right endpoint of the projected construction line.

These three lines represent the inside faces of the Contour Flange thatcreates the base feature of the sheet metal guard.

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-clickand select Create Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place avertical dimension of 95 mm to define the height of the guard. Bothvertical line segments adjust due to the horizontal constraint that wascreated when segment 2 was placed.

Create the Open Profile | 959

7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-clickand select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment.

Next, you create the Contour Flange using the open profile sketch you justcreated.


Create a Contour FlangeBefore you create the Contour Flange, check the Sheet Metal Defaults.


NOTE Complete the Sheet Metal Styles tutorial (when you have time) tounderstand the inter-relationships between the Materials, Sheet Metal Rules, andSheet Metal Unfolding Rules. By correctly establishing a set of Sheet Metal Rulesfor your work, and ensuring that these rules are set as the default in your SheetMetal.ipt template, you will be able to begin sheet metal design projects withoutediting the Sheet Metal Defaults each time you start a new part design.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ SheetMetal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults fromthe marking menu.

2 Take note of the following items:■ Name of the Sheet Metal Rule

■ State of the check box for Use Thickness from Rule

■ Value in the Thickness field

If Use Thickness from Rule is checked, and the value in theThickness field is something other than 2 mm, click the check box toremove the check.

3 The Thickness field is now enabled. Enter 2 mm to replace the value inthis field.

4 Click OK to apply the 2-mm thickness to the current model file.

NOTE These steps allowed you to override the material thickness declared by theactive Sheet Metal Rule. In most cases, you begin your designs using a templatethat has an appropriate Sheet Metal Rule active. Or, you previously created SheetMetal Rules for your work that you can select from the drop-down list of Rulesavailable in the shared Styles and Standards library.

Now, you can create the Contour Flange.

5 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ ContourFlange.

6 In the graphics window, click over the three-line sketch that youpreviously completed. Note that the 2-mm thickness of the sheet metalContour Flange is previewed, and that it is offset to the inside.

7 In the Contour Flange dialog box, click the Flip Side option. The 2-mmmaterial thickness should now be offset to the outside of the profile, asshown in the following image:

Create a Contour Flange | 961

8 With the Contour Flange dialog box active, adjust your view (using eitherthe View Cube or Orbit) to see the side of the model as follows:


Next, you change the flange creation direction and measure an existing edgeto complete the creation of the Contour Flange.


Complete the Contour Flange1 In the Contour Flange dialog box (in the Width Extents area), click

Distance Flip.

2 Click > to the right side of the Distance field, and select Measure from

the menu.

3 With the Measure option active, click in the graphics window tomeasure the length of the edge shown. Use the measured value as theDistance value for the Contour Flange.

Complete the Contour Flange | 963

Following the click, the measured value of 120 mm displays in theDistance field and the Contour Flange previews as 120 mm long.

4 Click OK to create the displayed Contour Flange and close the dialogbox.


The sheet metal Contour Flange is the base feature in the model file that youcreated working within the assembly context. The sheet metal part displaysas solid while the other components within the assembly display as translucent.By working within the assembly context you were able to use existing criticaldimensions without initially knowing their values. Next, you add a sheetmetal Flange feature with automatic mitering around three edges along theback side of the guard.


Place a Flange FeatureMany sheet metal parts are created by bending a portion of the flat sheet. Usethe Flange command to add flat material along an edge, portion of an edgeor around all edges of a face. The flat material connects to the selected edgeusing a bend radius defined within your Sheet Metal Rule. The Flange

Place a Flange Feature | 965

command provides flexibility in the position and size of the flange relativeto the selected edge and other features within the evolving model.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Flange,or right-click and select Flange from the marking menu.

2 In the graphics window, click to select the three inside edges shown.

As you select the edges, the Flange feature previews. Note that Flanges createdfrom co-planar edges automatically miter at corners that would otherwiseinterfere. You can access the Auto-miter option from the Corner tab of theFlange dialog box.

NOTE For this Flange, be certain to select the three inside edges.

By default, sheet metal Flange features are created using the Bend Positionoption labeled Inside of bend face extents. This produces a Flange facecoincident with the selected edge. In this case, such a Flange would not allowclearance for the corners of Cylinder Base.ipt. Instead, you will change the


Bend Position to Bend from the adjacent face, which uses the selectededge as the beginning location of the bend for the Flange.

3 Click the Bend Position option labeled Bend from the adjacentface.

NOTE As you click this option, notice that the preview of the three Flangefaces moves out from the selected edges. To see this change more clearly,display the model as Wireframe (View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤

Wireframe from under the Visual Style drop-down menu), and viewthe model from the Top. Switch between Inside of bend face extentsand Bend from the adjacent face (be certain to return to Bend fromthe adjacent face, then reset your display to Shaded and reset yourview angle, before continuing).

4 For this Flange feature, use the default value of 90 degrees for the FlangeAngle, as well as the default value of 25 mm for the Height ExtentsDistance.

5 Click OK to create the Flange and close the Flange dialog box.

Place a Flange Feature | 967

Next, you create a sketch containing center marks for punched holes.


Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create

2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu.Next, select the face of the guard shown in the following image:


NOTE If you have not already cleared the Autoproject edges for sketchcreation and edit application option as specified in the tutorialPrerequisites, this sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorialwill have unnecessary projected geometry.

2 If necessary, adjust your view normal to the sketch using the View Cubeor the View Face command. Click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Shaded with Hidden Edges from the drop-down menu underVisual Style. Use this orientation and display to see edges of othercomponents within the assembly. Your view should appear as follows:

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks | 969

You will again create non-associative construction geometry, as you didwhen you began your sketch for the Contour Flange base feature.

3 Click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction.

4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Project Geometry, orright-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu.

5 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the outsidecircular edge of Lock Pin:1 as shown:

This projected circle provides the location for a sketched Center Point.It locates a Punch feature (used to provide clearance for the pin), as wellas the alignment for two additional Center Points that will be used to


locate punched mounting holes to attach the guard to CylinderBase.ipt.

Continue by adding two construction line segments.


Sketch Punch Centers1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or

right-click and select Line from the marking menu.

2 In the graphics window, move your cursor into the center of theconstruction circle previously projected. When the green dot appears,indicating that you have located the center of the projected circle, clickto place the first point of a line segment:

3 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indicators,place a vertical and a horizontal construction line segment by selectingtwo additional points. Your profile should appear as follows:

Sketch Punch Centers | 971

4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension or right-clickand select Create Dimension from the marking menu Then, place ahorizontal length dimension of 85 mm that defines the distance betweenthe guard mounting holes.

5 Continue by placing a vertical dimension of 8 mm between the bottomedge of the guard and the horizontal construction line:

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Format panel ➤ Construction to reset yourgeometry creation to normal geometry.

7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point.


8 Place three sketch points at the ends of the two construction linesegments.

9 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-clickand select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment.

NOTE You can optionally continue to work with a hidden edge display. Theremaining illustrations in this tutorial show a shaded display. To return to a shadeddisplay, click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Shaded from the drop-downmenu under Visual Style.

Now that you have sketched Center Points, you will next place twodifferent-sized Punch features to provide clearance for the pin and holes formounting screws.


Punch HolesWhile there are several ways to create circular holes in your sheet metal part,using a round Punch feature provides you with annotation benefits when youdetail the flat pattern of your design.

Punch Holes | 973

NOTE This tutorial uses an example Sheet Metal Punch iFeature that contains thetwo punch sizes required by this tutorial. The IDE file that contains this punch islocated in the default project folder that is active when the tutorial_files projectis active. To learn more about Sheet Metal Punch iFeatures, please review the SkillBuilders posted to: http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder These sheet metalSkill Builders can be found by clicking on the Parts heading.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ PunchTool.

2 The Punch Tool Directory dialog box opens. By default, it displays PunchTools that are stored in the Punches folder, which is located in theCatalog folder under the default installation folder. Click Workspacein the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directorydialog box to switch to the Tutorial Files folder.

3 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤ metric_hole.ide, and click Open to displaythe Punch Tool dialog box.

4 The example file includes punches of two different sizes; however, the2.5-mm diameter punch is previewed on the three center points in thedisplayed and unconsumed sketch. While the 2.5-mm diameter punchis needed on two of the center points, you must first clear the centerpoint that will be used for the 12-mm punch. While holding the Shiftkey, move your cursor over the center point as shown, and click to clearthe center point.

5 Click Finish in the Punch Tool dialog box to place the 2.5-mm diameterpunch on the remaining two center points and close the dialog box.

Next, you follow a similar set of steps to place the 12-mm diameter punch.


http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder


Punch Holes (continued)1 Click + to the left of the Folded Model node in the Model browser to

view the expanded feature tree.

2 Click + to the left of the iFeature in the Model browser.

3 Right-click the sketch node located under the table node, and clickShare Sketch on the context menu. The sketch that was consumed(and hidden) by the placement of the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature isredisplayed. This provides you with a visible sketch to use while placingthe 12-mm diameter punch. Notice that a new sketch node is placed inthe Model browser above the feature that originally consumed the sketch.

4 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ PunchTool.

5 Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of thePunch Tool Directory dialog box.

6 Select the metric_hole.ide file, and click Open.

7 Click the Punch tab in the Punch Tool dialog box.

8 Click the text string ADSK-METRIC-25 to display the list of selectablekeys that exist for this Sheet Metal Punch.

NOTE You must click directly on the text string ADSK-METRIC-25. Clickingthe line with the text will not work.

9 Click on ADSK-METRIC-120 to change the selection.

10 Click Refresh in the Punch Tool dialog box to refresh the displayedpreview of the Punch iFeature to be placed.

Punch Holes (continued) | 975

11 Click Finish to place the 12-mm diameter Punch iFeature and close thePunch Tool dialog box.

12 Right-click the shared sketch node in the Model browser (the nodeabove the first iFeature node), and click Visibility to remove the checkmark and hide the shared sketch geometry.

Next, you mirror the punched holes.


Mirror the Punched Holes

To complete the folded model of your guard, mirror the three punched holesto the face on the opposite side. The Mirror functionality requires a plane to


mirror across, and due to the steps used to construct this part, you cannotsimply use one of the origin planes.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Work Features panel ➤

Plane and select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from thedrop-down menu.

2 In the graphics window, click the outside face shown in the followingillustration:

3 Now, rotate the view and click the outside face on the opposite side. Thenew work plane is created midplane between the two outside faces.

Mirror the Punched Holes | 977

4 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤ Mirror.

5 Click in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the first2.5-mm Punch.

6 Click again in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of thesecond 12-mm Punch.

7 Click the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the Mirror dialog box toenable selection of the mirror plane.

8 In the graphics window, click the midplane work plane that you createdin the middle of the guard.

9 Click OK to mirror the selected Punch iFeatures and close the Mirrordialog box. Notice that a Mirror node appears in the Model browser.


The mirrored features now appear on the opposite side of the guard.

Next, you create a flat pattern of your folded model.


Create the Flat PatternYou have finished adding features to the folded model. Many of these featuresadded bends using the default bending radius. Some of these features left gapsor corner reliefs using rules specified in the active Sheet Metal Rule. When thefolded model is flattened, these features result in a flat sheet that can bedetailed in preparation for manufacturing. Bend lines and bend extents areshown on the flat pattern and attributes of the punched iFeatures can berecovered during the creation of a drawing of the flat pattern.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤

Create Flat Pattern.

Create the Flat Pattern | 979

Because you are working within a sheet metal part that is active withinan assembly, the sheet metal part file will be opened in isolation, andthe flat pattern will be created.

2 Double-click the Folded Model icon at the top of the Model browserto return to the folded model.

NOTE Alternatively, you can also click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Partpanel ➤ Go to Folded Part to return to the folded model state.

3 Click Save.

4 Close the copy of the my_2mm_guard file that was opened.

5 Double-click the Cylinder Clamp.iam node at the top of the browserto return to the assembly.

6 Click Save to save the assembly.

7 Close the assembly.

Next, you add both a bend and punch table to a partially completed drawingof the guard.



Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation

1 Open the file 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw, located in \TutorialFiles\Cylinder Clamp.

NOTE This drawing contains several views of a completed example guardthat is supplied with the example tutorial files.

2 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel ➤ General.The Table dialog box displays, and the view selection cursor is active inthe graphics window.

3 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see thedotted red view boundary highlight.

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation | 981

4 Click to select the flat pattern view as the source view for the Generaltable.

NOTE The General table type provides column selections unique to the typeof source view selected. In this case, the table provides bend information.

5 Click OK in the table dialog box to accept the default selections, closethe dialog box, and place the table.

6 Move your cursor over the upper-left corner of the drawing border. Whenyour cursor changes to indicate a “point on” constraint, click to placethe table.


A table is created with columns for Bend ID, Bend Direction, BendAngle, and Bend Radius using the values for each of the bends in theselected view. Also, notice that the Bend ID numbers have been addedto the flat pattern view near the bend centerlines.

The bend sequence identified is not likely to match the sequence yourfabrication shop uses. Modifying the bend order sequence and adjusting thetable is covered in the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial.

Next, you place a punch table on the drawing.


Place a Punch Table

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤ Table panel ➤ Hole View(use the down arrow to the right of Hole to display Hole View).

2 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see thedotted red view boundary highlight, and click to select the view.

3 Move the datum target cursor along the lower edge of the flat pattern,until you reach the left-most corner and the “point on” constraint isindicated.

Place a Punch Table | 983

4 Click to select this point as the datum for dimensioning the punchedholes.

5 Move the displayed outline of the table to align it with the lower-leftcorner of the drawing boarder. When the “point on” constraint isindicated, click to place the table.

6 Right-mouse click over the table, and select Edit Hole Table from thecontext menu to display the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box.


7 Click Column Chooser on the Formatting tab of the dialog box todisplay the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box.

8 In this dialog box, select Description from the list of SelectedProperties, and click Remove.

9 Select HOLE DIAMETER in the list of Available Properties, andclick Add.

10 Select PUNCH ID in the list of Available Properties, and click Add.

11 Click OK to accept the new column arrangement and close the HoleTable Column Chooser dialog box.

12 Click OK in the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box to update thetable using the new column arrangement and close the dialog box.

13 Save the drawing of the guard flat pattern.


Summary

Summary | 985

In this tutorial, you learned a basic workflow for creating a sheet metal partand placing sheet metal annotations on a flat pattern drawing. Some keypoints of this exercise include:■ Working within the context of an assembly, you were able to use assembly

geometry to define key design aspects of your sheet metal part.

■ Sheet metal features are often created on one side or the other of a selectionto take into account the material thickness or bend radius.

■ Sheet metal Punch iFeatures simplify the creation of simple and complexcut (and formed) features on your model. Punch iFeatures carry attributionthat can be recovered in a Punch table on your drawings.

■ Bends created by features display a bend centerline and bend extents onthe flat pattern. These bends can be easily identified in a Bend table onyour drawing that contains important manufacturing attributes.

■ The flat pattern of your folded model is easily created and provides anaccurate representation of the flattened bend zones between adjacentfeatures. The size of these flattened bend zones are determined by theUnfold Rule defined within the active Sheet Metal Rule used when youbegin a new sheet metal model from a template.

What Next? - As a next step, continue to explore sheet metal functionalityby completing the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial.

Previous (page 983)


Sheet Metal Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore sheet metal functionality.


40

987


Start a new sheet metal part (metric)contour_roll-start.ipt

Tutorial File Used

sm_part2_model-completed.ipt (finished version)


Create a lofted flange feature, and then rip and flatten it. Work with the flatpattern to explore many sheet metal features.

Objectives■ Lofted flange features

■ Rip features

■ Bend order sequence

■ Cosmetic centerline features

■ Contour Roll features

■ Unfold features, with features added to the flattened model

■ Added refold features

Prerequisites■ Complete the tutorial Sheet Metal Parts.






Next (page 989)

988 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2



Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches

The Lofted Flange feature provides a way to create transitional sections inyour model. They may be the only (or primary) feature in a model or theymay be part of a more complex design.

The Lofted Flange feature requires the selection of two profile sketches. Theprofiles can be open or closed (or one of each) and can be on parallel ornon-parallel sketch planes. The resulting feature can be optionally targeted ateither a press brake or die-form manufacturing process.

1 To begin this exercise, begin a new sheet metal part using the SheetMetal (mm).ipt template.

2 In the open sketch, create a 1400-mm circle centered on 0,0.

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 989

3 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, orright-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

4 Create a Work Plane offset (up) from the XY Origin Plane by 2000 mm.

5 On this new offset Work Plane, create a 2D sketch.

6 In the sketch create a 600 mm x 600-mm square. Apply 300-mmdimensions so that the square is centered on 0,0.

7 Place a point on the mid-point of one side of the square.

NOTE This point is not required for the Lofted Flange; however, you will useit later to create a Rip feature to flatten the Lofted Flange.


8 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click andselect Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

9 Hide the work plane that you created and the XY origin plane (ifdisplayed). Hide the dimensions on both Sketch1 and Sketch2. Yourmodel should appear as shown in the following image from the defaultHome View (F6).

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 991

Next, you create the Lofted Flange.



Lofted Flange - Create the Flange1 Before you create the Lofted Flange, on the ribbon click Sheet Metal

tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and selectSheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu.

2 In the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box, clear the Use Thickness fromRule option. Enter a value of 4 mm in the Thickness value entry field.

3 Click OK to accept the new material thickness and close the dialog box.

4 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Lofted Flange.

5 In the graphics window, click to select the sketched square as Profile1.

6 Click to select the sketched circle as Profile 2. A preview of the resultingLofted Flange displays using the default settings.

7 Since Press Brake is the selected Output option, the preview showsa Lofted Flange that can be created using straight bends. This results ina faceted approximation of the circle. There are three methods that youcan use to adjust the resulting facets. In this exercise, you increase thedefault value for the Chord Value. Highlight the value of 0.5 mm,and enter a new value of 4 mm. Notice that your preview adjusts to showfewer facets.

NOTE If you have die-forming fabrication available, you can optionally selectDie Form as the Output option. Doing so results in a smooth, conicaltransition from the circular profile to the square profile.

8 Another optional selection determines if the material thickness is onone side or the other of the sketched profile. To see this better, zoom into the point that you created on the square profile sketch. By default,the material is offset to the outside of the selected profile. In this exercise,you want the dimensioned size of the profile to represent the outside ofthe resulting part. The material must be offset to the inside of the profile.Click the middle Flip Side.

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange | 993

Notice the material thickness now previews to the inside of the profile.

9 Click OK in the Lofted Flange dialog box to accept the edits you havemade, create the Lofted Flange, and close the dialog box.

Because you selected two closed profiles to create this Lofted Flange, the modelwill not currently create a flat pattern.

Next, you add a Rip feature to allow the model to flatten.


RipLike its physical counterpart, a folded sheet metal model that forms acontinuous tube-like shape cannot be flattened. The Rip feature provides aneasy way to create a cut in a face of the model that will allow the flat patternto be produced.


To create a Rip feature, you select a face of the model and (optionally) eitherone or two points that lie on the selected face. If you select an outside face,any points selected must be on an edge of the outside face. Optionally, youmight select an entire face to be removed.

TIP In this exercise, the point used to locate the Rip feature was added to one ofthe Lofted Flange profile sketches. Another technique is to create a 2D sketch ona flat face of a Lofted Flange targeted for Press Brake output. Then place a pointat a strategic vertex or edge midpoint.

1 In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Lofted Flange1.Right-click Sketch2, and select Visibility in the context menu to makeSketch2 visible.

2 Adjust your view of the model so that the edge of the sketched squarewhich contains the point is visible on top.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rip.

4 Select the face to be ripped (which contains the sketch point along theedge).

Rip | 995

5 Select the point you previously created that defines the location of thesingle-point Rip.


With the point selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip | 997

NOTE The Rip can cut a bend face adjacent to the selected face; however,a rip cannot cut across a bend face and through a second face. In thisexample, if the point was located anywhere other than the midpoint of theedge, the rip could not be created.

6 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close thedialog box.

7 In the Model browser, right-mouse select Sketch2, and click Visibilityin the pop-up context menu to switch off Sketch2 visibility.


Rip (continued)The previous Rip feature exercise directed you to create a sketch point to serveas the rip point. While the creation of sketch points are required for certainrip workflows, there are many instances where sketch points are not necessary.Inventor also accepts work points, midpoints on edges, or endpoints on facevertices as valid rip point selections.


Now, you will delete the rip feature and try creating it once again. But thistime, you will use the midpoint on the top edge of the 600mm x 600mmsquare as the rip point.

1 First, make sure that the Sketch2 visibility is turned off as previouslydirected.

2 Next, right-click the Rip node in the Model browser and select Deletefrom the pop-up context menu. Your model should appear as shown.

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Rip.

4 As you did before, select the identical top face to rip.

Rip (continued) | 999

5 Next, move your cursor to the midpoint of the top edge. When themidpoint appears, click to select.


6 With the midpoint selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip (continued) | 1001

7 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close thedialog box.

Next, you will create a flat pattern of the ripped Lofted Flange.



Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange

Now that the Lofted Flange has had a Rip feature applied it is no longer acontinuous closed shape. It is now possible to create a flat pattern suitable formanufacture.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat Pattern.

Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange | 1003

The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and the bend extent lineswhich indicate the bend zones required to flatten the lofted flange.

NOTE You can easily add a Rip feature to a lofted flange created from twoclosed profiles and generate a valid flat pattern. Your manufacturing shopmay prefer to fabricate this type of part as two pieces.

Using this flat pattern, you next explore Bend Order Annotation.



Bend Order AnnotationTo accommodate efficient manufacturing, bends must often be created onthe shop floor in a specific sequence. The manufacturing sequence has littlein common with the design sequence. Using the flat pattern you currentlyhave open, you can explore modifications to the bend order sequence.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ BendOrder Annotation.

Notice that a series of numbers appear within circles with a yellowbackground. As you proceed, focus on these numbered symbols in theupper portion of the flat pattern:

Bend Order Annotation | 1005

As you can see, these numbers do not currently have a logical sequence:


Next, you explore creating a directed sequence of bend overrides.

NOTE Do not be concerned if the order of the numbered symbols on your flatpattern differ from those shown in the images.


Directed Reorder1 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Directed Reorder from

the pop-up context menu.

The Directed Reorder method of applying bend sequence overridesrequires that you select a beginning bend and an ending bend. Thesystem applies a new bend order sequence between the selected bends.

Directed Reorder | 1007

2 Click the upper-most bend symbol (labeled A in the previous image) toselect the starting position of the override sequence.

3 Click the lower-most bend symbol (labeled B) to select the endingposition. Notice that the symbols all change from yellow circles to greensquares.


Also notice that the numbering sequence has been changed. The bendyou selected as the starting position is now numbered 1. The remainingbends are numbered in sequence to the bend that you selected as theending position.

Directed Reorder | 1009

Next, you explore creating a sequential reorder of bend identification overrides.


Sequential ReorderIf you were happy with the sequence you obtained, you can right-click andselect Done, then right-click again and select Finish Bend Order.Alternatively, pressing Esc twice is equivalent to selecting Done and FinishBend Order from the pop-up context menu.

Since this is an exercise, you will not keep the directed sequence that youcreated.

1 Right-click, and select Remove All Overrides from the pop-up contextmenu. Notice that the green squares revert to yellow circles and thenumbering sequence returns to the initial sequence generated byAutodesk Inventor.

2 Right-click again, and select Sequential Reorder from the pop-upcontext menu.


Use sequential reordering to pick bends manually in the order that youneed them to be manufactured.

3 Beginning again with the upper-most bend, click every other bend. Asyou click a bend, notice that the yellow circle again changes to a greensquare. The numbers change to correspond to the selected sequence.Click two or three more bends until you get the feel of this technique.

As explained previously, when you are happy with the reorderedsequence, press Esc twice, or use Done followed by Finish Bend Orderfrom the context menu.

4 Since this is an exercise, right-click again and select Remove AllOverrides from the context menu followed, by Finish Bend Orderto exit the command.

NOTE In a third method of editing the bend order, you select a single, individualbend and change the bend order identification.

Next, you explore converting lines sketched on your flat pattern into cosmeticcenterlines.


Sequential Reorder | 1011

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched LinesCosmetic centerlines are straight lines sketched on a flat pattern that areconverted to bend lines with bend extent lines. They represent bends that donot exist in your folded model, possibly stiffening creases or a bend line youwant to place on a die-formed portion of your flat pattern. Cosmetic centerlinescarry bend attributes that can be recovered in drawings. They can be sequencedusing the Bend Order Annotation techniques explored in the previous exercise.

1 Click to select the face of the flat pattern.


NOTE If you did not clear the Autoproject edges for sketch creationand edit application option, as specified in the Prerequisites at thebeginning of this tutorial, the sketch and all subsequent sketches made inthis tutorial will have unneeded projected geometry.

2 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the markingmenu.

3 Click OK in the dialog box that displays the message Edits to the flatpattern are exclusively applied to the flat pattern and willnot be reflected on the folded model.

4 Sketch two straight lines as shown:

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines | 1013

NOTE In this example, the size and position are not critical so dimensionswill not be applied. In your designs, you will likely want to apply dimensionsto position these lines accurately.


Next, you convert the sketched lines to cosmetic centerlines.



Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Cosmetic

Centerline, or right-click and select Cosmetic Centerline from themarking menu.

The Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box displays, and bend directioninformation appears on the existing bends in the flat pattern. TheSketched Bend Lines selection cursor is active.

2 Select the two straight lines that you added to the sketch.

Notice that the bend direction for these two lines differs from the benddirection of the other bends. This may or may not suit your purposes.To minimize material handling during the creation of this example part,you change the bend direction.

3 Click the Specifies Bend Up or Bend Down button in the CosmeticCenterlines dialog box to change the bend direction attribute.

Notice that the displayed bend attributes of the sketched lines now matchthe displayed bend attributes of the other bend lines on the flat pattern.

4 Change the Bend Angle value to 3 degrees in the CosmeticCenterlines dialog box.

5 Click OK in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to create the cosmeticcenterlines using the specified attributes and close the dialog box.

Notice that the sketched lines now display using the Bend Centerlinelinetype. Using the techniques learned in the Bend Order Annotation exercise,click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Manage panel ➤ Bend Order Annotation,or right-click and select Bend Order from the marking menu. Notice thatthe cosmetic centerlines now participate in the bend order sequence.

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines | 1015

These cosmetic centerlines can now be included in bend tables and bend notesyou create in your drawings.

6 Click the Esc key to exit Bend Order Annotation.

7 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Part panel ➤ Goto Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from themarking menu, to return to the folded model state.

8 You can Save your exercise file; however, the file is not used in furtherexercises.

9 Close the file that you have been using for these exercises.

Next, you will add Contour Roll features to a supplied sheet metal part.



Contour Roll

Creating digital prototypes of roll formed sheet metal parts in AutodeskInventor requires using a Contour Roll feature. The Contour Roll commandcreates a feature like a Contour Flange that uses a sketched profile as well asa sketched axis of revolution. The profile and axis geometry must exist withinthe same sketch.

In this exercise, you open a file that contains a straight Contour Flange feature.You add two Contour Roll features and a final Contour Flange. You then createa flat pattern of the resulting folded model.

1 Set your project to tutorial_files.

2 Open Sheet Metal Parts 2 ➤ contour_roll-start.ipt.

Contour Roll | 1017

3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create 2DSketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu.

4 When prompted to select a plane or sketch, select the top face of theContour Flange feature as shown:


NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recentlycompleted either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you have undisplayed thesketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not requirethe use of the sketch grid and may be completed with the grid displayed orundisplayed.

Next, you project edges into the sketch.


Project Contour Roll Profile GeometryIn this exercise, you project the edges of the existing Contour Flange and adda straight line as the axis of revolution. However, you can use any open profileconsisting of lines, arcs, splines, and elliptical arcs to create a Contour Rollfeature.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1019

NOTE The Contour Roll feature will transform sharp sketch corners into bends inthe finished part using the bend radius value. This behavior is like the ContourFlange feature and is not apparent in the following exercise.

1 If necessary, orient your sketch using the View Cube or View Face sothat you are looking at the sketch plane.

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ ProjectGeometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from themarking menu.

3 In the graphics window, click to select the lines and arcs that define theoutside edge of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

NOTE Be sure to select individual lines and arcs rather than the face loop ofthe detail faces.

4 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Line, or right-click and selectLine from the marking menu.


5 Create a line to represent your axis of revolution as shown:

NOTE The length of this line is not important; however, the line should beparallel to the short, horizontal line segments that you projected into yoursketch. You can either imply the parallel constraint as you draw the line oradd a parallel constraint after the line has been drawn.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1021

6 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-clickand select General Dimension from the marking menu. Place a100-mm dimension between the line you created and the short,horizontal line segment that you projected into your sketch.


8 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the overflow menu(or press F6) to reorient your view to an isometric view.


Create a Contour Roll1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Contour

Roll. The Contour Roll dialog box displays, you are prompted to selectan open profile.

2 In the graphics window, click the edge geometry that you projected intoyour sketch. The selected geometry highlights, and the Axis selectionbutton becomes active.

3 In the graphics window, click the straight line that you created parallelto the projected edge and then offset with a 100-mm dimension.

A 90 degree Contour Roll section previews; however, what is previewedis not what you want for this exercise.

4 Clear the default Rolled Angle value of 90 deg degrees and enter 30deg into the value field.

Your preview should now appear as follows:


5 Click OK to create the 30-degree Contour Roll segment and close thedialog box.

Next, you repeat these steps with a few minor differences to create a similarContour Roll that sweeps 30 degrees in the opposite direction.


Create a Second Contour Roll1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the

end face of the edge of the first Contour Roll as the new sketch plane:

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1023

2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metalmaterial, and then add a straight line segment. This straight line segmentshould be on the side of (and parallel to) the long horizontal projectionand offset by 100 mm. For the previous contour roll, the axis ofrevolution was on the side of the two short horizontal segments. Byputting the axis on the opposite side of the profile, the revolution willcurve in the opposite direction when you create this contour roll.


3 With your sketch completed, create the Contour Roll feature.

Notice that the Rolled Angle value is 30 degrees, the last value youused in this command. It is the value you will use for this second contourroll. Your preview should appear as shown in the following image.

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1025

4 Click OK to create the second 30-degree contour roll segment and closethe dialog box.

As a final modeling step, you will use the same sketch and project edgestechnique to create a sketch to use for a second contour flange.


Add another Contour Flange1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the

end face of the edge of the second Contour Roll as the new sketch plane.

2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metalmaterial. You are now ready to create the Contour Flange feature.


3 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ ContourFlange. The Contour Flange dialog box displays. Select the profile youjust projected.

Expand the dialog box using More (>> in the lower right), and use theWidth Extents type of Distance and a value of 200 mm.

4 Click OK to create the second 200-mm Contour Flange segment andclose the dialog box.

Your completed model should appear similar to the following image.Adjust your view of the model as needed.

Next, you create a flat pattern.


Add another Contour Flange | 1027

Flatten the Rolled TubeBecause the Contour Flanges and Contour Roll features have formed an opentube, you can create a flat pattern without adding any additional features.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤

Create Flat Pattern.

The flat pattern is created. The Flat Pattern tab displays as the active ribbontab.


The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and bend extents for the four90-degree bends that form the square tube, It also displays as the two rollcenterlines for the two 30-degree rolls created by the Contour Roll features.Bend centerlines, bend extents, roll centerlines, and roll extents are all exportedto separate layers when a flat pattern is exported to DWG or DXF formats tofacilitate flexibility in CNC manufacturing.

Flatten the Rolled Tube | 1029

In the final portion of this tutorial, you explore the use of the Unfold andRefold feature. You unroll and unfold the model that you created, addingsome features and then refolding and rerolling the model.


Unfold and Refold Feature PairThere are some features that are easier to create when the model is flat. Usethe Unfold feature to unfold (or unroll) all or some of the bends (or rolls)within your model. With the model unfolded, you can then add features anduse Refold features to return the model to the folded state.

In this portion of the tutorial, you unroll the two Contour Roll features andunfold two of the four bends that form the square tube. You add a hole whichyou will pattern down the length of the part. To complete the exercise, youadd two Refold features to refold and reroll the model. The completed modelwill appear as shown in the following image.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Folded Part panel ➤ Goto Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from themarking menu, to return to the folded model.


NOTE Alternatively, you can also double-click the Folded Model node inthe Model browser to return to the folded model state.

2 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the pop-up contextmenu (or press F6) to change the view to an isometric orientation.

3 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Unfold. The Unfolddialog box displays, and two stationary reference planes appear at eitherend of the Contour Roll features.

4 In this exercise, we first unroll the Contour Roll features. Click in thegraphics window to select the lower stationary reference plane.

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair | 1031

Once you select a stationary reference, the rolls that can be unrolledrelative to that reference are highlighted.

Next, you continue with additional Unfold selection steps.


Continue Unfold Selection1 Click to select the lower curved face as shown in the following image.


As you select faces, the preview shows the model state that results byunrolling the selection.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1033

2 In this exercise, we straighten the tube completely. Click the uppercurved face (not the preview graphic) to select the second rolled face.


Once the second rolled face is selected, the model again previews theunroll results.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1035

3 Click Apply in the Unfold dialog box to straighten the model as shownin the preview and to reset the dialog box for the next round of unfolds.

Next, you unfold two of the 90 degree bends which form the square tube.


Partially Unfold the TubeUse the Unfold feature to pick the bends that you want to flatten. It is notnecessary to flatten the model completely. It is possible to add the linear holepattern. For this exercise, with the model unrolled in its current state, youwill first unfold an additional two 90-degree bends.

1 As with the unrolled model that you created, you first identify astationary face. Click the face shown in the following image.


As soon as you select the face shown, the bends that can be unfoldedrelative to that face highlight:

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1037

2 Click to select the bend which forms the 90-degree corner closest to you:


Once the bend is selected, the part previews in the unfolded state.

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1039

Next, you finish creating the Unfold feature.


Complete the Unfold Feature1 Click to select the second 90-degree bend as shown in the following

image.


Following the select, the unfolded bend is previewed:

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1041

2 Click OK in the Unfold dialog box to flatten the two bends as shown inthe preview and to close the dialog box. Your model should now appearas shown in the following image.


Although these steps are not required to add the holes (that you will add next)they illustrate adding an Unfold feature to flatten straight bends.

Notice that your feature browser now contains two Unfold features: one forthe unfolding of the two contour rolls and one for the unfolding of the twostraight bends.

Next, you add a hole and pattern the hole so that it crosses the (now flat) facesof the Contour Roll features.


Complete the Unfold Feature | 1043

Add a Hole1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Sketch panel ➤ Create

2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu.Then select the face shown in the following image.

2 Reorient your view, if necessary, using the View Cube or View Facecommands, so that you are looking directly at the sketch.

3 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point. Drag over the projectedorigin point, and then up. You should see the dotted line which indicatesthat the point you will place is aligned with the origin point.


4 Click to place the point.

5 Click Sketch tab ➤ Constrain panel ➤ Dimension, or right-clickand select General Dimension from the marking menu. Now, placea 25-mm dimension between the point and the bottom edge of theunfolded part.

Add a Hole | 1045

6 Finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment.

7 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole, and place a 5-mmdiameter hole with a Through All termination on the sketched point.

Next, you pattern the hole.


Pattern the Hole1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤

Rectangular.

2 Select the hole as the feature to pattern.

3 Click the Direction 1 button and select a vertical edge and directionas shown:


4 Enter a value of 20 for the total number of holes, and a value of 25mm for the distance between each hole.

5 Click OK to create the pattern of holes that cross the two flattened rollfaces and close the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.

Next, you add two Refold features to return the flattened model to the foldedand rolled state.

Pattern the Hole | 1047


Add Two Refold FeaturesThe Refold feature is the complement of the Unfold feature. You are not ableto place a Refold feature unless there is an Unfold feature in the model. Whenthere are more than one Unfold features in the model, you must refold themin reverse order. You must refold the most recently created Unfold featurefirst.

Although there are several Refold workflows, in this exercise you use the mostcommon workflow. You right-click to select the Unfold feature and selectRefold Feature in the pop-up context menu. This method automatically selectsthe originally selected stationary face and which ever bends or rolls wereoriginally selected to create the Unfold feature. Other Refold workflows providemore flexibility and allow partial refolding when that makes sense for yourdesign situation.

1 Right-click the Unfold feature in the Model browser that is immediatelyabove the Hole feature. Select Refold Feature in the pop-up contextmenu.

Notice that the two 90-degree straight bends refold, and that a Refoldfeature is added to the list of features in the Model browser.

2 Right-click the first Unfold feature (between the Contour Flangefeature and the second Unfold feature), and select Refold Feature.

Notice that the two 30-degree Contour Roll features reroll and that asecond Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser.

The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.


This completes the exercises of this tutorial.


Add Two Refold Features | 1049

Summary

The features you explored in this tutorial represent powerful additions to yoursheet metal modeling skills.■ Transitional shapes defined by selecting two profiles for a Lofted Flange

feature are common in some sheet metal design situations.

■ The ability to define the output of a Lofted Flange targeted at either a PressBrake or Die Form manufacturing process provides flexibility in both designand manufacturing.

■ The ease of adding a Rip feature to a Lofted Flange created from two closedprofiles provides for ease of flat pattern creation during the design process.

■ Bend Order Annotation on the sheet metal flat pattern allowsdocumentation of the correct fabrication sequence.

■ The ability to add cosmetic centerlines provides additional efficiencies byallowing the documentation of bends that have not been created in thefolded model state.


■ Certain features are easier to create while the model is flat: Unfold andRefold features allow efficient creation of these features while showingthem correctly in both the final folded model and the flat pattern.

What Next? As a next step, consider exploring the creation of Lofted Flangefeatures with two open profiles. Or, create a variation of the folded and rolledsquare tube with cut features that cross over both the 90-degree square cornerbend as well as the 30-degree rolled faces. You can also explore the capabilitiesof the Inventor Studio environment which was used to create several of thephotorealistic images that were used in this tutorial.

Previous (page 1048)

Summary | 1051

1052

Sheet Metal Styles 41

1053

About this tutorial

Control sheet metal characteristics.



electrical box.iptTutorial File Used

1054 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles


In this tutorial, you capture and manipulate the following sheet metalcharacteristics using sheet metal styles:■ Complete material definition

■ Bend relief shape and size

■ Bend radius value

■ Bend transition type

■ 2-bend corner relief type and size

■ 3-bend corner relief type and size

Various style types, or style categories, control sheet metal characteristics. Thestyle types, when taken together, create a composite style that determines thecharacteristics of a sheet metal part. You can apply styles locally to the activepart, or you can save new styles and style edits to the Style Library to sharethe styles.

Objectives■ Create new styles.

■ Save the styles to the Style Library.

■ Use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■ Edit the styles.

■ Apply a library style change to a part.






Next (page 1056)




Edit the Project and Open the Sample FileLater in the tutorial, you write style information to the Style Library. Thelibrary must be set to Read/Write. You use the Projects editor to make thissetting.


2 Double-click the tutorial_files project to make this project active.

3 In the lower panel of the Project editor dialog box, if Use Style Libraryis Read Only or No, right-click this setting and select Yes. This valuesets the Style Library to Read/Write.

4 Click Save and then Done.

5 Openelectrical box.ipt, located in the Electrical Box folder.



Add a New MaterialIn this portion of the tutorial, you add a new material to the document.

1 On the Tools tab ➤ Material and Appearance panel ➤ Materials

. The Material Browser displays.

The Material Browser has two sections:■ Document Materials, upper section

■ Library Materials, lower section

2 The new material can be made from an existing one. In the librarysection, if not already selected, select Inventor Material Library.

3 In the library list, on the right, scroll to locate Steel - Mild. Double clickthe material in the list.

The material is added to the document and opened in the Material Editor.

4 In the Material Editor, change the material name to Steel - Test.

5 Before continuing, in the Asset section, select the structural asset. Notethe properties making up the material listed in the pane below. Whenmaking new materials you can modify some properties, others aredetermined by the material Type and Class to which the asset is assigned.

In addition, the new material is not currently saved in the part file. Ifyou close the part without saving, this new material is lost.


Change the Appearance1 Ensure Steel - Test is selected in the Material browser.

2 In the Asset section of the Material Editor, select the Appearance asset.

3 To the right, click

4 In the Asset Browser, select the Appearance named Steel - Galvanized

5 Click . You can also use double-click to select and exchange anappearance in one step.

Add a New Material | 1057

6 Close the Material Editor.

7 Select the component and in the Material Browser, select the new materialSteel - Test. The part has the new material and appearance.

8 Close the Material Browser.


Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gaugeand Material

Next, you define a new sheet metal rule style that includes a sheet metal gaugeand material, along with bend and corner relief attributes.

To define the gauge and material:

1 On the ribbon, click {Condition: product='inv'}{Condition: product='inv'}

Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor .


The browser on the left side of the Styles and Standards Editor liststhree style types or style categories:

■ Lighting

■ Sheet Metal Rule

■ Sheet Metal Unfold

Unique styles are nested under each of these top-level nodes.

Expand the Sheet Metal Rule style category in the browser.

2 Right-click the Default node, and select New Style from the pop-upcontext menu. Name the new style Sheet Metal Rule Style Test. ClickOK to close the New Local Style dialog box.

3 Ensure that the new style is selected in the browser, and that the Sheettab is selected.

4 Select Steel, Mild from the Material menu.

5 Specify a thickness of .105 in.


Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material | 1059

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend andCorner Relief

Now, define the bend and corner relief attributes:

1 Select the Bend tab.

2 Change the Bend Radius from Thickness to Thickness * 1.15.

3 Select the Corner tab.

4 Change the 2 Bend Intersection relief shape to Square.

5 Change the Relief Size to Thickness * 5.


6 Right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test in the browser, and selectActive from the pop-up context menu.

If you receive an error message, click Accept. The error is not critical inthis exercise.

7 Click Save in the Style and Standard Editor dialog box.

If a message box displays, click Accept.

The program applies the bend radius and corner relief style attributes tothe part.

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief | 1061

8 Click Done.

TIP In the tutorial, click Undo and Redo on the Quick Access toolbarto see the effects of the style changes. Be sure to redo all changes beforecontinuing.

9 Save the part to prevent the new styles from being lost. The new stylesare now preserved locally in this part.


Save Styles to Library1 With the sample part open, on the ribbon select Manage tab ➤ Styles

and Standards panel ➤ Save . The command is locatednext to the Styles Editor command.

2 In the Save to Library? column, set Sheet Metal Style Rule Testto Yes.


3 Click OK. The program notifies you that the operation overwrites stylesin the library.

4 Click Yes.

Any style marked Yes is saved to the Styles Library. They can be sharedfrom part to part, and shared with anyone who has access to the project.

TIP You can also save styles to the style library in the Style and StandardEditor. Right-click a style in the browser, and select Save to Style Library.

5 Save and close the part.


Create Sample PartIn this portion of the tutorial, you create some simple sheet metal geometryand then apply styles to the part.

1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window.Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next tothe icon.

2 In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Sheet Metal (in).ipt template .

3 Sketch a rectangle approximately 10 inches square. The exact size andshape is not important.

Create Sample Part | 1063

4 Click the Finish Sketch command on the ribbon, or right-click andselect Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch.

5 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Face . You canalso right-click and select Face from the marking menu.

6 Accept the default dialog box settings, and then click OK.

Next, you add two flanges.

7 Click the Flange command from the ribbon or the marking menu.

.

8 Select two adjacent edges.


9 Click OK.

The default template uses the default sheet metal styles. Next, you useSheet Metal Defaults to apply the new styles to the part.

TIP If you routinely use a certain style set, create a sheet metal part template thatuses those styles by default.


Use Sheet Metal DefaultsYou use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply different styles to the active sheet metalpart. The changes are local to the part.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Setup panel ➤ Sheet

Metal Defaults , or right-click and select Sheet MetalDefaults from the marking menu.

Because you saved the styles you created to the Style Library, they areavailable for application in this part.

2 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Sheet MetalRule Style Test.

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1065

3 Ensure the Use Thickness from Rule option is selected.

The Thickness input field is disabled, and the thickness you specifiedfor Sheet Metal Rule Style Test is shown in the field.

4 From the Material drop-down menu, select Steel - Test.

5 Click Apply. The program applies the styles to the part.


6 For confirmation purposes, you can use the commands on the Toolstab, Measure panel to run a couple of checks.■ The sheet thickness is 0.105 in, as specified in Sheet Metal Rule

Style Test.

■ The bend radius is 0.121 in, per the style specification of Thickness* 1.15 (0.105 * 1.15).

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1067

■ In addition, the corner is square, per the Sheet Metal Rule TestStyle.



Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing StylesWith Sheet Metal Defaults, you can quickly apply different styles to thepart in a wholesale manner. You can also directly access the Styles andStandards Editor through the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to make editsto the styles themselves.

1 If you closed the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to use the Measurepanel commands, select the Sheet Metal Defaults command again

from the ribbon or the marking menu .

2 Click the Edit button next to the Sheet Metal Rule menu.

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles | 1069

3 Select the Corner tab, and then change the Relief Size value toThickness * 4.

4 Click Save. The program applies the style change to the part.



Update StylesOn the previous page, the edit you made to the Rule Style Test style wasonly applied locally (the active part). To make the edit available globally, savethat style to the Style Library.

1 In the Style and Standard Editor, right-click Sheet Metal Rule StyleTest (under the Sheet Metal Rule node in the browser) and selectSave to Style Library in the pop-up context menu.

2 Click Done to close the editor.

3 The edited and globally saved style is not picked up automatically byparts that share the style. Update that style in any other part that usesthe style.

4 Close the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box.

5 Openelectrical box.ipt.

TIP Select the file from the Recent Documents section of the Applicationmenu.

6 Click Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards panel ➤ Update

.

7 In the Update Styles dialog box, set the Update? column for SheetMetal Rule Style Test to Yes.

8 Click OK.

A message appears stating that the library style definition will overwritelocal style edits.

9 Click Yes. If a message box displays, click Accept.

The edit that you made to Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (the changein corner relief size) is applied to this part.

10 Closeelectrical box.ipt.


Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat PatternFinally, you can also use Sheet Metal Defaults when the flat pattern is active.

Update Styles | 1071

The sample part you created should still be open.

1 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Flat Pattern panel ➤ Create Flat

Pattern .

2 Next, click Sheet Metal Defaults .

3 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Default.

4 From the Unfold Rule drop-down menu, select Steel 16 Ga_KFactor.

5 Click OK. The changes are applied to the part.



Summary

In this tutorial, you:■ Created new styles.

■ Saved the styles to the Style Library.

■ Used Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■ Edited the styles.

■ Applied a library style change to a part.

Summary | 1073

Remember to check Help for further details.



Frame Generator

About this tutorial

Build structural frames.



42

1075

Start a new assembly fileframe_generator.ipt

Tutorial FilesUsed

frame_generator_hybrid.ipt


In this tutorial, you create structural frame assemblies in a standards-based,automated fashion with Frame Generator.

First you use a predefined skeletal model consisting of unconsumed sketchesto determine the placement and extent of frame components, such as squaretubing and c-channel. Then you fit those components together with mitersand cuts.

Finally, you use a hybrid model consisting of a solid and sketches to place theframe components. The Frame Generator process saves extensive assemblyand part modeling.

Objectives■ Select and position frame components.

■ Trim excess material.

■ Create miter joints.

■ Create notched cuts.

■ Make edits to the assembly.


view tools, and work with components in the assembly environment.

■ Understand the Help topic “Getting Started.”



Next (page 1077)

1076 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator



Get StartedFrame Generator uses frame members contained in the Content Center. Tobegin, set your active project, and then verify that Content Center is installedand configured.


2 In the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project inthe projects list to set it as the active project.

3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure

Content Center Libraries.

4 In the Configure Libraries dialog box, verify that the Din and ISOContent Center libraries are available.

5 Close all dialog boxes.

NOTE The Content Center libraries must be configured and available to performthe tutorial steps. If no libraries are available, install and configure the ContentCenter libraries before starting the tutorial. See the Help for more details, or contactyour CAD Administrator.


Skeletal ModelThis tutorial uses a skeletal model to position and create frame members.Create an assembly and place the skeletal model.

1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iamtemplate.

2 Place one occurrence of frame_generator.ipt located in the FrameGenerator folder into the assembly.

Get Started | 1077

This part consists of one 2D and one 3D sketch that together define thesample skeletal model. You use this part model to define the placementand extent of frame components in the assembly.

3 Save the assembly using Skeletal.iam for the name.



Insert ProfileThe Frame Generator commands are located in the Frame panel of the Designtab. We start by inserting frame members on the four upright lines.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

.

2 Select ISO from the Standard menu.

3 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu.

4 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

5 Select the upright sketch line as shown in the image. Ensure that youselect somewhere on the upper half of the line. The position of the framemember is partially dependent on which half of a given line you select.

Insert Profile | 1079

6 The tube previews as shown in the image. Select the other three uprightlines.


NOTE To remove a line from the selection, press and hold Ctrl and thenselect the line again, or select the profile preview.


Profile OrientationBy default, the tube profiles are centered on the selected sketch lines.

The orientation indicator corresponds to the selected sketch line.

Profile Orientation | 1081

1 Click the middle radio button to the right of the profile preview image.

The profile preview in the graphics window shifts position relative thesketch line to match the position of the orientation indicator.


2 Click the center radio button to return to the default orientation.

The previews update accordingly.

The Offset fields control the distance by which the profile is offset fromthe selected sketch line.

3 Enter 300 mm in the Horizontal Offset field (labeled with the

Horizontal Offset icon).


The Mirror Frame Member command controls the profile orientationrelative to the selected geometry, in this case a sketch line.

4 Click Mirror Frame Member, and notice the offset direction swapsin the graphics window.


5 Return the profiles to the original orientation: click Mirror FrameMember again, and enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.



Create ProfileWe must make one last adjustment to the orientation before creating theframe members.

1 Click the arrow next to the Angle field, and then select 90.00 deg fromthe menu.

2 Click Apply.

3 Click OK in the Create New Frame dialog box.


The Frame Member Naming dialog box displays. This dialog box is usedto change member display names, member file names, and locations.

4 Click OK without making changes.

Whenever this dialog box appears in the tutorial, click OK withoutmaking changes in the dialog box.

NOTE If you press Cancel during the frame member naming, the framemembers are created using the default names.

The profiles are created, and you can continue to make other profileselections.


Place the Upper C-channelNow we insert a c-channel on the upper horizontal lines.

1 Select ISO 657/11 - 1980(E) from the Family menu.

2 Select CH 250 x 34 from the Size menu.

3 Select the sketch line as shown in the image.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1087

The preview shows the profile is upside down (relative to the designintent for this model).


4 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1089


Orient the Upper C-channelThe orientation of the c-channel must be changed to meet the design intent.

1 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicators, as shown, sothat the top of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the tubes.


2 Click Apply.


Place the Lower C-channelsWe now place c-channel members along the bottom lines, so that the bottomof the c-channel is flush with the ends of the rectangular tubing.

1 Select the four lower lines as shown in the image.

Place the Lower C-channels | 1091

2 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator, as shown.


3 Click Apply.


Place the Lower C-channels | 1093

Place the Horizontal tubePlace a tube across the remaining horizontal line.

1 Select the remaining horizontal line.


2 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu.

3 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

Place the Horizontal tube | 1095


5 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator.

6 Click Apply.



Place the Angle BracesOnly one more selection set and we are finished with component placement.We place the angle braces using the sketch lines.

1 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Square) from the Family menu.

2 Select 80x80x6.3 from the Size menu.

3 Ensure that the orientation indicator is on the center radio button, thehorizontal and vertical offsets are set to 0.00 mm, and the angle is 90.00deg.

4 Select the two angular lines.

Place the Angle Braces | 1097

5 Click Apply.

6 Click Cancel to close the Insert dialog box..


Lengthen ProfileThe c-channel on top of the taller vertical members must extend to the outsideedges of the tubes (plus an additional 15 mm on each end to allow for a filletweld).

1 Zoom in on the model, as shown (upper portion of one of the tall verticalmembers).


2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten .

3 In the Lengthen - Shorten Frame Member dialog box, click Both Ends.

4 Select the c-channel.

We know the rectangular tube is 150 mm wide and that the c-channelcurrently extends to the center of the tubes. Therefore, the extensiondistance is (150/2) + (15) = 90.

5 Enter 90 mm in the Extension field.

6 Click Apply.

The program adds 90 mm to both ends of the c-channel.

7 Click Cancel.

Lengthen Profile | 1099


Notch ProfileNext, we fit the tube within the c-channel using the Notch command.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Notch .

2 Select the tube, as shown.

The first selection is the component to cut. The second selection is thecutting tool.

The other member selection command activates automatically.

3 Select the c-channel to use as the cutting tool.

4 Click Apply.


5 Repeat these steps for the notch cut on the other vertical member at theopposite end of the c-channel.

6 Click Cancel.

7 To see the notches clearly, turn off the visibility of the c-channel. In theModel browser, right-click the c-channel, and then remove the checkmark next to Visibility.

8 Turn on the Visibility of the c-channel when finished.


Notch Profile | 1101

Create Miter JointsNow, create miter joints between the shorter vertical tubes and the horizontaltube.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter .

2 Select the first and second tube as shown.

3 Orient the model view as shown in the following image to see how themiter options affect the miter joint.


NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off forclarity.


Change Miter Joint OptionsWe now try different miter options and use the one that best fits our design.

1 To create a clearance for a groove weld and see the two miter types, enter5 mm in the Miter Cut Extension field.

Miter Cut at both sides is selected by default. As the name implies,this option adds or removes material on both components equally.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1103

2 Click Apply.

The total offset distance between the mitered faces is 5 mm.

3 To continue experimenting with the miter options, select Miter Cutat one side.

4 Select the lower tube, and then select the upper tube.


5 Click Apply.

The joint is offset 5 mm, but only the lower tube is offset from the jointmidplane.

6 This time, select the upper tube first, and then the lower tube.

7 Click Apply.

The first component selected is the component offset from the jointmidplane.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1105

8 Create another miter joint at the other tube junction.

9 Click Cancel when finished.


Remove End TreatmentsFor this exercise, assume that the miter joints you created previously areincorrect and must be recreated.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Remove End

Treatments . This command is located in the expanded Framepanel.


2 Select the horizontal tube, and then click Apply.

The program removes the miter joints and restores the tubes to theiroriginal, unmodified state.

3 Click Cancel.

4 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter ,and then re-create the miter.

NOTE The miter offset type is not important for this example.

Remove End Treatments | 1107


Re-create Miter JointRe-create the second miter.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter ,and create the miter shown.




Trim ProfileNext, we remove the excess material from the lower c-channels.

1 Orient the model view as shown.

NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off forclarity.

Trim Profile | 1109

2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim to Frame

.

3 First, select the trimming component, which is the tube.


4 Select the component to trim, which is the c-channel.

Trim Profile | 1111

5 Click Apply.


6 Use the same method to trim the other c-channel.

You can repeat these steps to trim the c-channels at the other threejunctions, but it is not required for this exercise.

7 Close the Trim to Frame dialog box when finished.


Trim Profile | 1113

Cut ProfileNow, remove the excess material from the angle braces using existing facesas the cutting plane.


2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Trim/Extend

.

3 First, select the component to cut, which is the square tube.


4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

5 Click Apply.

If desired, you can set the view to Wireframe display, and orbit themodel to more clearly see the cut results. Return to Shaded displaywhen finished.

Cut Profile | 1115

In the remaining steps, we cut the other side of the tube using the samemethod.

6 Select the tube, click the Face command, and then select the face, asshown.


7 Click Apply.

8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.


Profile InformationUse the Frame Member Info command to view characteristics of a framecomponent.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Frame Member

Info . This command is located in the expanded Frame panel.

2 Select a frame member.

Profile Information | 1117

The dialog box populates with the information on the selectedcomponent. The Select command remains active, and you can select adifferent component to return information on that component.

3 Click Done when finished.


Change ProfileUse the Change command to make various edits to a selected component.The Change command uses the same dialog box as the Insert FrameMembers command and allows modification of any of the properties in thedialog box.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Change.

2 Select the longer square tube.

3 Select 90x90x6.3 from the Size menu. Leave all other settings at thedefault values.

NOTE You can use the Multi-Select Profiles option located at the lower rightof the dialog box to select and modify multiple components in one execution.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Yes in the Frame Generator message box.

6 Click OK in the Frame Member Naming dialog box.

The cuts on the tube are preserved.


Load CalculationYou can use the Beam/Column Calculator to determine how loads affectthe design.


On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Beam/Column

Calculator to access the command.

The Beam/Column Calculator command is not used in this tutorial.


RefreshYou can publish your own frame shapes to Content Center or modify existingContent Center families and templates. Use the Refresh command to updateexisting frames after the Content Center has been modified.

On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Refresh toaccess the command.

The Refresh command is not used in this tutorial.


Modify the SkeletonThe frame components are associative to the skeletal sketches. We modify thesketches in frame_generator.ipt to see how this change affects the framemembers.

1 Edit frame_generator:1.

Refresh | 1119

2 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤ Parameters panel

➤ Parameters .

3 Change the value for base_L to 3000 mm.

4 Click Done.

5 Return to the assembly. The frame components, including the variousjoints and cuts, update to match the change.


6 Close the assembly.


Hybrid SkeletonIn this exercise, we start a new assembly and place a component that containsa solid and unconsumed sketches. This component is used as the skeleton forour frame. We use Frame Generator to add frame members around the solidand sketches.

1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iamtemplate.

2 Place frame_generator_hybrid.ipt into the assembly.

Hybrid Skeleton | 1121

This skeletal model consists of a solid feature and unconsumed sketches.

3 Change the display from Shaded to Wireframe.


Insert Profile - Insert Frame MembersWe now insert frame members around the existing geometry. First, select theprofile to use for the frame members.

1 Save the assembly. Use frame-hybrid.iam for the file name.


.

3 Select DIN from the Standard menu.


4 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu.

5 Select S 40 x 5 from the Size menu.

6 Select Steel from the Material menu.


Insert Profile - Select GeometryNow we select the geometry to position the lower and upper frame members.For the lower frame members:

1 Select the four lower edges. Ensure that the first selection matches theimage, as indicated by the cursor.

2 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1123

3 Select 0.00 deg in the Angle field.

The design intent is that the inside surfaces of the L-channels are flushwith the solid. Since the channels are 5 mm thick, they must be offset5 mm.

4 Enter -5 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.


5 Click Apply. The Create New Frame dialog box appears.

6 Click OK.

For the upper frame members.

1 Select the four upper edges. Ensure that you select the left end of thefirst line, as shown.

2 Click Apply.

3 Change the graphics display to the Shaded visual style.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1125



Insert Profile - Position First Vertical MemberNext, we position the first vertical member.

1 Select the vertical edge.



Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member | 1127

The inside surfaces of the channel must be flush with the outer surfacesof the existing channels.

4 Enter -10 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.


5 Click Apply.

NOTE Since the orientation of the channels for each vertical edges isdifferent, we place the channels one at a time.


Insert Profile - Position Remaining VerticalMembers

Repeat these steps for the remaining vertical edges:

1 Select an edge.

2 Use the Angle field to adjust the orientation of the frame member, asneeded.

3 Click Apply.

4 Click Cancel when all vertical members have been inserted.

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members | 1129


Lengthen ProfileIn our design, the vertical members must be flush with the upper and lowerchannels. We must lengthen the vertical members to meet this criteria.

1 Orient the model view, as shown.



Lengthen/Shorten .

3 Select the vertical channel. Make the selection near the top of thechannel.

NOTE When you lengthen one end of a component, the end closest to yourcursor when you select the component is the end that is lengthened.

4 Ensure the One End command is selected.

Currently, the end of the vertical channel is flush with the inner surfacesof the upper channels. The width of the channels is 40 mm. Therefore,the extension distance is 35 mm.


6 Click Apply.


7 Repeat this process for the other end of the vertical channel, this timeusing 5 mm for the lengthen distance.

8 Repeat this process for the upper ends of the remaining three channels.It is not necessary to adjust the lower ends of the remaining channels.

9 Close the dialog box when finished.


Create Miter JointNext, we create a miter joint. Since the channels have a radius on the innercorner, we offset the miter to provide relief for the radius.

1 Orient the model view, as shown. This view is the top of the model.


2 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Miter .

3 Select the two channels.

Create Miter Joint | 1133

4 Ensure Miter Cut at both sides is selected. Enter 2 mm inthe Miter Cut Extension field.

5 Click Apply.


6 You can repeat this process for the remaining seven junctions, but it isnot required for this tutorial.

7 Close the dialog box when finished.


Insert Profile - Place Other MembersNow, we use the sketches to place the other members of the frame.


.

2 Select DIN EN 10219-2 (Circular Hollow Section - Cold Formed)from the Family menu.

3 Select 26.9x3 from the Size menu.

4 Enter -3 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1135

5 Enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.


7 Set the orientation indicator, as shown in the following image.

8 Select the five sketch segments as shown.

NOTE Depending on where you select on the first element, you may needto adjust the orientation and angle to match the preview in the image.


9 Click Apply.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1137


Insert Profile - Add Support MembersNow we insert the support members.

1 Select the line as shown.



3 Click Apply.

4 Select the remaining line.

5 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Add Support Members | 1139

6 Click OK.



Cut Profile - Trim TubingNext, we trim the round tubing.


.

2 Select the four tubes, as shown.

3 In the Trim - Extend To Face dialog box, click the Face command, andthen select the face as shown.

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing | 1141

4 Click OK. The tubes are trimmed to the selected face.


Lengthen ProfileFirst, we must lengthen the support tubes so we can notch them to meet theother tubes.


Lengthen/Shorten .

2 Select the tube as shown.



4 Click OK.




Notch ProfileNow that the support tubes extend past the other tubes, we can notch thesupports to fit the mating tubes.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Notch.

2 Select the component to notch, which is the lower tube.

Notch Profile | 1145

3 Click the notching profile, which is the upper tube.

4 Click OK. The lower tube is notched to fit the upper tube.



Insert Profile - Point To PointNext, we add angular braces.


Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1147


.

3 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu.

4 Select S 35 x 5 from the Size menu.

5 Select the Insert Members Between Points option.

6 Select the start point. This point is the corner vertex on the skeletalmodel.


7 Select the end point.


8 Set the orientation indicator, as shown.

Enter -5 mm in the Vertical Offset field.


9 Enter 0.00 mm in the Horizontal Offset field.

10 Enter 0.00 deg in the Angle field.

11 Click Apply.

12 Use this procedure to add another brace on the other side. Change thevalue for the angle to 180.00 deg, and click the Mirror FrameMember command.




Cut Profile - Trim SupportsFinally, we trim the supports to meet the vertical frame members.

1 Turn off the Visibility of frame_generator_hybrid:1, and thenorient the model view as shown.


.

3 Select the angular braces.

4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.


5 Click Apply.

6 Select the angular braces again.

7 Click the Face command.

8 Select the cutting face.

Cut Profile - Trim Supports | 1153

9 Click Apply.


10 If you like, you can repeat this procedure for the other end of the braces.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Select and position frame components.

■ Trim excess material.

■ Create miter joints.

■ Create notched cuts.

Summary | 1155

■ Remove end treatments from a profile.

■ Replace components.

■ Work with both wire frame and hybrid skeletons.

Remember to check the Help files for further information.



Summary | 1157

1158

DWG Data 1 43

1159

About this tutorial

1160 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1

Part 1 - Create parts from DWG files.

Data ExchangeCategory


eBox2.dwgTutorial File Used


Import two layers from a multiple layer DWG file to create a simple extrudedpart.

Prerequisites■ See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

The imported layers contain the geometry and the dimensions that definethe sketch you use to create the extruded part.



Open a New Part FileNext, import the DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor part file. You need apart file open in 2D Sketch mode. Open a new Part document:

1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window.Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next tothe icon.

2 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).ipt template .

Open a New Part File | 1161



The part opens in Sketch mode, where the 2D Sketch commands are availableand the sketch grid displays, if turned on.

Import DWG Data

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Insert panel ➤ ACAD .

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, selectTranslator: DWG and click the OK button.

2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects ImportOptions dialog box opens.

3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to eachlayer, except the p and p dim layers.

4 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.

5 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialogbox. Activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometricconstraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box.

6 Click Finish to close the dialog box. The program imports geometryand dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

7 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2DSketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.



Extrude Sketch Geometry1 Press E on the keyboard, or right-click and select Extrude from the

marking menu, to invoke the Extrude command.

2 Click inside the 4.25" x 4.25" square to satisfy the profile selection. Thisis the only portion of the sketch to be extruded.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1163

3 Drag the gold distance manipulator until the value 0.075 appearsin the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter .075 directly inthe box.


4 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and exit the command.


Orient the Part

1 On the navigation toolbar in the graphics window, click Zoom .

2 In the graphics window, click and drag the zoom indicator down thescreen to zoom in on the extrusion.

Orient the Part | 1165

NOTE If your system zooms out when you drag down, it is likely that thisoption was selected during installation. You can easily change the zoomdirection of the drag and mouse wheel (at any time): on the Display tabof the Application Options dialog box select the Reverse direction option.If you have been using AutoCAD for some time you may be more comfortableusing the AutoCAD zoom direction preferences.

3 Click the following image to play the animation.

4 On the navigation toolbar, click Free Orbit .

5 In the graphics window, click and drag inside the orbit indicator to orbitthe part.

6 Right-click, and then select Done [Esc]. The exact position of the partis not important.

7 Press F6 to orient the part in the default home view.


Change the Part AppearanceTo change the part color:

1 Select a new appearance from Appearance drop-down menu. The menuis located on the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Autodesk Inventorwindow.

2 Select Blue (Sky) from the list of available part appearances.

In the default Home (isometric) view, the part appearance looks dark.You can optionally orbit the part again using the technique just describedto see how model position in relation to the lighting affects theappearance.



Save the Part

1 Click Save , located on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2 Name the file panel, and then click Save.

3 Click ➤ Close to close the file.


Save the Part | 1167

SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Use existing DWG geometry to define a sketch profile.

■ Use the sketch geometry to create an extruded part feature.

■ Orient the part using Zoom and Free Orbit.

■ Change part appearance.

■ Save the part.

■ Close the part file.

Use the skills you learned in this tutorial to create a more complex part in thenext tutorial, DWG Data 2.

Use the table of contents to the left to start the DWG Data 2 tutorial.


Click here to return to the tutorials home page


DWG Data 2 44

1169

About this tutorial





eBox2.dwgTutorial File Used


Import two different layers from the same DWG file. Create the cover for anelectrical panel from the DWG geometry.

This tutorial draws on skills you learned in part 1 of this tutorial set.

The cover consists of a base extrusion, a fillet, and a shell. You use the existinggeometry and dimensions from the DWG file to create the part features inAutodesk Inventor.

Prerequisites■ Complete Part 1 (DWG Data 1) of this tutorial set.




Next (page 1171)

Open Part and Access DWG1 Open a new part file:

■ Click the New icon , located at the top of the applicationwindow. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-downmenu next to the icon.

■ In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Standard (in).ipt template .


Open Part and Access DWG | 1171





Import DWG1 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import

Options dialog box opens.

2 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the pand p dim layers, and then check the c and c dim layers.

3 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.

4 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialogbox. If not already enabled, activate the Constrain End Points andApply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of thedialog box.

5 Click the Finish button to close the dialog box. The program importsthe geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.


6 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2DSketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.

NOTE Finishing a sketch automatically switches the display to the Home(isometric) view. Restore the front view of the sketch by clicking Front onthe View Cube at the upper-right of the display screen.


Extrude Sketch Geometry1 Press E on the keyboard to invoke the Extrude command, or right-click

and select Extrude from the marking menu.

The "front" view of the inserted DWG file contains geometry whichrepresents the outside of the cover and the thickness of the material thatmakes the cover sides. To create this part, you select both of the regionsdisplayed in the front view inside of the 6.30" x 6.30" rectangle.

Notice that you must click inside both sketch loops. Click to play theanimation which shows the selections needed.

2 In the value input box in the in-canvas display, or the Extents field ofthe Extrude dialog box, highlight the 1 in value.

3 Select the .560 dimension value (the full depth of the cover) in the "top"view of the inserted geometry.


4 The program replaces the default extrude distance of 1 inch by theexisting dimension, as represented by the parameter name d5.

5 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature that will becomethe electrical panel cover and exit the command.

6 Press F6 to position the part in the Home view.




Create a RoundNext, you create the rounded edge on the outside of the cover. You referenceexisting dimensions to determine the radius for the round, just as you did tocreate the base extrusion.

1 In the Model browser, click the expand/collapse symbol next toExtrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1 to display a menu of commands that apply to thecurrent selection, and then select Visibility.

3 Select Zoom All from the Navigation toolbar. Zoom All is also locatedon the Navigate panel of the View tab. The imported sketch is visibleand ready for reference in the graphics window.


4 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Fillet

. You can also right-click and select Fillet from the markingmenu.

5 Select the edge loop on the front of the cover (the edge opposite the facewith the sketch).

Create a Round | 1177

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the default Radius value in the value input box in thein-canvas display, or in the Fillet dialog box. Select the .110 dimensionvalue found on the lower left corner of the front view of the sketchgeometry.


7 Click the green Ok button to create the round and exit the command.

Create a Round | 1179



Create a Shell

1 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Shell.

2 Use Orbit to approximate the view shown in the following image. Theexact orientation is not important.

Create a Shell | 1181

3 Use the Shell command to hollow out the model while maintaining aspecified wall thickness. You can remove faces of the model that will beopen after completing the command.

4 Select the face with the sketch.


5 Using the dimension-referencing technique you learned previously,highlight the default value in the Thickness field of the Shell dialogbox, and select the dimension value .060 located in the top view of thesketch geometry to set the material thickness.


6 Click OK to create the shell and exit the command.


Notice that because you created the round before the shell, the programcreates the inner fillet automatically as part of the shell operation.


7 In the Model browser, right-click the Sketch1 browser node and removethe check mark next to Visibility to turn off the display of the sketch.

8 Save the part, using cover_panel for the file name.

9 Close the part.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Import layer-specific DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. Then

create an Autodesk Inventor solid model of the ACAD drawing views usingthe actual DWG geometry and dimensional values.

■ Add round and shell features to an extrusion.

■ Use and refer to the imported DWG data to determine feature dimensions.

■ Use the Autodesk InventorOrbit command to make the selection ofgeometry easier during feature modeling.

■ Use Autodesk Inventor marking and context menus to access commandsthat apply to the current selection.

■ Use the Visibility option on browser objects to ease your design process.



Summary | 1187

1188

DWG Data 3

About this tutorial

45

1189




Start a new assembly documentTutorial File Used

Create the box portion of the electrical panel within the context of theassembly. Use specific layers of the supplied 2D DWG file to define the Inventorsolid part geometry.

At the assembly level, insert the panel and cover parts you created earlier. Useassembly constraints to position the parts relative to one another.

This tutorial draws on the skills you learned in parts 1 and 2 of this tutorialset.

Objectives■ Create part models in the context of an assembly.

■ Use layers of a DWG file to define your part geometry.

■ Insert parts into an assembly.

■ Position parts relative to one another with assembly constraints.

Prerequisites■ Complete Parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set.

■ Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with thevarious view tools.





Next (page 1191)

Create New Assembly File1 Ensure that your active project is tutorial_files.

2 Click the New icon located at the top of the application window.Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next tothe icon

3 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).iam template.

You now have a new, empty assembly.


Create New Assembly File | 1191

Create In-place Component1 To begin creating the electrical box in the empty assembly, right-click

anywhere in the graphics window, and then select Create Componentfrom the marking menu. The Create In-Place Component dialog boxopens.

2 In the New Component Name field, type box.

3 Next to the Templates menu, click Browse Templates , thenselect the English tab, and double-click the Standard (in).ipt template.

4 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

NOTE Although this tutorial (and the previous two tutorials) required youto select the English tab, you usually select a new template from the templatesdisplayed on the Default tab when creating new files.

5 Before Autodesk Inventor can create the empty part file where you createyour electrical box, you must select a plane in the assembly. The planeis coincident to the sketch plane of the part. Often, a planar part faceexists in the assembly on which you want to create your part. However,in this tutorial the assembly is empty, and you select an origin plane.

Notice that the cursor changes and the program prompts you toSelect sketch plane for base feature.

6 To select an origin plane (that is not currently visible), click theexpand/collapse symbol next to the assembly Origin folder to expandthe folder.

TIP The origin folder for the assembly is located at the top of the browser,just under the Representations folder.

7 Select the XY Plane. This selection aligns the new part origin with theassembly origin in your empty assembly file.

Once you select the origin plane, the program creates and names thepart document. The assembly browser updates to show the new part and


that you are working within the sketch of the newly created box partfile. The sketch commands are active and you can begin to define thegeometry for the first extrusion.

8 If necessary, click the Front face of the View Cube to set the sketchplane parallel to the screen.


Insert DWG Data


Insert DWG Data | 1193


2 Select eBox2.dwg, and then click Open. The Layers and Objects ImportOptions dialog box opens.

3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the cand c dim layers, and then check the b and b dim layers.

4 Ensure that All is selected in the Selection field.

5 Click Finish. The program imports the geometry and dimensions onthe specified layers into the sketch.

NOTE The colors of your sketch lines could be different from the image.Differences in color are not important for this tutorial.


Extrude Geometry1 Press E on the keyboard to activate the Extrude dialog box.


Like the previous tutorial, you must select each of the regions inside the6 x 6 rectangle. In this case, there are three.

2 To make the selection of the first region easier, click Zoom Window

located on the navigation bar in the graphics window. Thendrag a zoom window around the area to magnify. Click the followingimage to play an animation that shows using Zoom Window andmaking the proper selections.

3 After you make the selections, click Zoom All to fit all geometrywithin the graphics window.

As with the previous tutorials, you use an existing sketch dimension asthe distance of the extrusion being created.

4 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, or from the value inputbox in the in-canvas display, highlight the 1 in value, and then selectthe 4.00 dimension from the top view displayed in the sketch window.

5 Click Ok to create a solid extrusion 4 inches deep.

6 If necessary, press F6 to position the part in the default home view asshown.

Extrude Geometry | 1195


Create RoundsNext, you create rounds on the two edge loops of the front and back faces. Asbefore, you refer to dimensions contained in the imported sketch to determinethe size of the rounds.

1 In the browser, expand the part feature named Extrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1, and then select Visibility.

3 Click the Zoom All .


4 Click the Fillet command on the ribbon , or right-click andselect Fillet from the marking menu.

5 Select the front edge loop of the cover (the edge opposite the face withthe sketch).

Create Rounds | 1197

The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the Radius value in the Fillet dialog box, or in the value inputbox in the in-canvas display, and select the 0.110 radius value that wasdefined by the designer who originally created the DWG drawing.


7 Click Ok to create the round.


Create ShellLike the cover part, this part must be hollowed out, or shelled. However, unlikethe cover part, you do not remove any faces from the part during the shelloperation.

1 Click the Shell command.

2 Highlight the default value in the Thickness field.

3 Select the 0.060 wall thickness value in the right-side view of the sketch,which is still displayed in the graphics window.

Create Shell | 1199

4 Click OK to create the shell. Because the shell removed only interiormaterial, there is no apparent change to the part.


5 Save the part.


Create Cut ExtrusionNext, you use the imported sketch to remove material from the part.

1 Use the View Cube to change your view so that the sketch is visible.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1201

2 Click the Extrude command , and then click inside the innerloop of the sketch. The preview indicates the current extrude distance.


3 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, select To Next from thedrop-down menu. If you are using the mini-toolbar, select To nextface/body from the drop-down menu.

4 In the Extrude dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar, click Cut.


Within the selected region of the box part, you should see a directionindicator pointing to the inside of the box. The indicator shows thedirection of the cut extrusion. Though dim, the direction indicator isvisible in the highlighted portion of the image.

5 To see the indicator more clearly, click the Flip Direction button inthe dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar.


6 Click the other Flip Direction button. Ensure the indicator points tothe inside of the box.


7 Click OK to create the cut. Because you selected To Next from theExtents menu, or To next face/body from the mini-toolbar, the cutterminates on the next face it encounters. In this case, it is the back faceof the box.


8 In the browser, right-click Sketch1 (nested under Extrusion1), and thenremove the check mark next to Visibility.


9 Save the part.


Assembly Environment

1 In the Return section of the tab, click Return . This actionreturns you to the top-level assembly environment from the partenvironment. Assembly commands replace the part commands.

It is within this assembly environment that you add and constrain thepanel and cover parts that you created earlier.


2 Before you continue, save the assembly. Use eBox for the file name, andthen click Save. If prompted to save eBox.iam and its dependents, clickOK.


Show Origin PlanesThe panel and cover that you created in the first two tutorials will be placedrelative to faces on the box you created. They will also be place relative to theassembly origin planes (which are not currently displayed).

1 Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the YZ and XZ origin plane browsernodes so that they are both selected. The planes highlight in the graphicswindow. Click the following image to play an animation that illustratehow the planes will highlight.

2 With both planes selected, right-click one of the planes in the browser,and then select Visibility. The planes are now visible in the graphicswindow.

Show Origin Planes | 1209

You use these planes to attach, or constrain, the panel and cover partsto the box part.

NOTE Your origin planes could be a different color.


Add PartsNext, you add the panel and cover parts you created in the first two tutorialsto the assembly.

1 In a blank area of the graphics window, right-click, and then select PlaceComponent from the marking menu.

NOTE Do not right-click over the box which would invoke the context menufor a selected component.


The Place Component dialog box displays. You are viewing the contentsof the Tutorial Files folder.

2 Find and select the panel part you created in the first tutorial, and thenclick Open.

3 The panel is attached to your cursor. Click anywhere in the blank spacearound the existing box part to place one occurrence of the panel. Donot attempt to place the panel within the box.

After you click, notice that another occurrence of the panel is attachedto the cursor and ready for placement.

4 Since you only need one occurrence of the panel, press Esc to end thePlace operation.

5 Use the previous steps to find and place one occurrence of the cover partyou created in the second tutorial.

Add Parts | 1211


Unconstrained PartsYou placed the panel and cover parts; however, they are not in their finalpositions. You use assembly constraints to locate the parts with respect to oneanother. Typically, you need three constraints to position a part.

Currently, the panel and cover parts are unconstrained and are free to movein 3D space. Click and drag the cover part. Notice that the part moves withyour cursor, and the part remains at whatever location you release the mouse.

Click in the following image to play an animation that shows dragging thecover part within the assembly.



Grounded PartsNow, attempt to drag the box part. This part does not move, and your cursorchanges to the push-pin, grounded symbol.

Autodesk Inventor always grounds the first part placed into an assembly toprovide a fixed, foundational part to which you can constrain other parts.You can specify that any part is grounded or not grounded. You can alsospecify that the first part placed is not grounded. But the best practice is toselect a strategic, foundational part for the first part placed, and then leave itgrounded.


Constrain the Panel Part - Display PlanesAs you become proficient with solid modeling, you learn that having yourpart geometry oriented relative to your file origin provides certain benefitsduring assembly. The supplied 2D DWG drawing was created so that thegeometry is symmetrical about the sketch origin point when inserted into theAutodesk Inventor sketch The origin point is the X-Y 0, 0 coordinate. Youtake advantage of the origin planes of each part as you position the parts usingassembly constraints. Display these planes now.

1 In the browser, expand the Panel part, and then expand the Originfolder nested under the Panel part.

2 Use the technique used earlier to Ctrl-click the YZ Plane and XZPlane. Right-click the browser node for one of the planes, and selectVisibility to display the planes in the graphics window.

Click in the following image to play an animation that shows the resultsof displaying the panel origin planes.

TIP As you proceed, your view angle of the assembly should approximatethat of the previous image. Orbit the part as needed.

3 Right-click anywhere in the blank space of the graphics window. Ensurethat you do not click on one of the parts. Then, select Constraint fromthe assembly marking menu.

The Place Constraint dialog box activates.


Grounded Parts | 1213

Constrain the Panel Part - First ConstraintThe Place Constraint command provides several different constraint types.The Mate constraint is selected by default when the command is activatedand is suitable for all the constraints needed in this tutorial.

Any constraint type requires that you select geometry on two parts. In thenext step, you place a mate constraint between the top face of the panel partand the inside back face of the box part.

1 Click in the following image to watch the animation, and then selectthe face of the panel, as shown.

The selected face highlights and the direction indicator shows theconstraint vector.

2 Click the following image to watch the next animation and then selectthe inside back face of the box part as shown.

By default, Place Constraint previews the constraint automatically.It is only a preview and the constraint is not yet complete.

3 In the Offset field of the Place Constraint dialog box, change the defaultvalue to 1 in to move the panel 1 inch away from the inside back face.

4 To finalize the constraint, click Apply. The mate constraint is createdand the panel is offset one inch from the back of the box.

The Place Constraint command remains active and ready for the nextconstraint set.


Constrain the Panel Part - Second ConstraintThe Mate constraint type is also needed for the next selection set; however,you use the Flush solution type to modify the constraint. The Flush solutionpoints the constraint vectors of each selection in the same direction, ratherthan in opposition.

1 In the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box, click Flush.


2 In the graphics window, select the YZ plane of the panel (click thefollowing image to watch an animation of this selection).

3 Select the YZ plane of the assembly (click the following image to watchan animation of this selection).

4 Click Apply to create the constraint.

NOTE In the constraint that you created, no physical geometry existed foreither selection. It is important to consider the part and assembly origingeometry when creating your part models and when constraining them inassemblies. Parts should be created symmetrical about the origin when itmakes sense. Otherwise a principal face should be coincident with one ofthe origin planes. Use care when selecting the first part placed into anassembly and its position relative to the assembly origin.


Constrain the Panel Part- Third ConstraintThe panel needs one more constraint to finalize its position. In this nextselection set, you select the XZ plane of the assembly and the XZ plane of thepanel.

1 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the assembly originfolder. The plane highlights in the graphics window (click the followingimage to watch an animation of this selection).

2 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the origin folder forthe panel part (click the following image to watch an animation of thisselection).

NOTE Since work features, such as workplanes, are abstract geometry andyou are not selecting a specific face, you can select them in the browser.

Note the direction vectors on each plane. If the direction vectors arepointing in the same direction, you can place a Flush constraint.However, in this case, the direction vectors are pointing towards eachother so you must change the solution type to Mate before you applythe constraint.

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint | 1215

3 Select Mate in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.

Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews.

4 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The panel isnow fully positioned.


Constrain the Cover Part - Place ConstraintFinally, you constrain the cover part to the box. This process is nearly identicalto the steps you took to constrain the panel part.

1 In the browser, expand the origin folder nested under the cover part.

2 Ctrl-click YZ Plane and XZ Plane, right-click the text for one of theplanes, and then select Visibility.


3 Press C on the keyboard to activate the Place Constraint dialog box.

NOTE Using the keyboard is often a more comfortable method of invokingcommands for users who are transitioning from AutoCAD.

4 Select the face of the box, as shown.

Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint | 1217

5 Select the inside face of the cover. Click the following illustration to seehow the constraint previews.

6 Click Apply to create the constraint. The inside face of the cover ismated to the outside face of the box.



Constrain the Cover Part - Finish PlacementNext, you finish placement of the cover.

1 In the browser, select the YZ plane nested under the origin folder forthe assembly. The plane highlights in the graphics window.

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement | 1219

2 In the browser, select the YZ plane for the cover.

3 Click Apply.



Final Constraint - Mate or Flush?Sometimes, when using origin planes to position a part, you know that yourfinal constraint will need to be either a mate or a flush. It is important toobserve the selection vector previews to determine if you want your arrowspointing towards each other (mate) or pointing in the same direction (flush).

1 In the browser, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the assembly.Then, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the cover.

TIP When the expected preview of the constraint does not happen tryreversing the constraint solution.

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? | 1221

2 Click Flush in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.The constraint now previews (click the following illustration to see thepreview).

3 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The cover isfully positioned.


View the Assembly1 To return the work planes to an invisible state, on the ribbon select View

tab ➤ Visibility panel ➤ Object Visibility, and select AllWorkfeatures from the drop-down menu.

2 Save the assembly. When prompted to save ebox.iam and itsdependents, click OK.


3 Click the View Face command , located on the navigationtoolbar, and then select the front face of the cover. It makes that faceparallel with the screen.

4 Click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Visual Style, and select

Wireframe from the drop-down menu .

NOTE Autodesk Inventor defaults to the Shaded display visual style.Wireframe, Wireframe with Hidden Edges and others are optionalvisual styles.

5 If you like, you can now compare this front view of the Autodesk Inventorassembly to the front view in the 2D drawing in the original DWG file.The geometry in the two files should be identical.

View the Assembly | 1223


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to:■ Build upon the skills you learned in the previous tutorials in this set by

importing, using, and referring to DWG geometry in part sketches andpart features.

■ Create a part within the context of an assembly.

■ Insert parts into an assembly.

■ Position parts in the assembly using assembly constraints.

■ Use origin geometry to constrain parts in an assembly.

■ Display and undisplay origin geometry to aid in the clarity of yourassembly.

■ Change the display of your assembly from shaded to wireframe displayfor optional visual inspection of part positions.

The next logical step in the workflow suggested by this set of tutorials wouldbe to document your design with an Autodesk Inventor drawing. You can usethe table of contents to the left to start the Drawings tutorial and learn howto prepare final drawings.

These tutorials focused on using existing DWG geometry to build a set of threesimple parts and to put them together in an assembly. To increase your generalfamiliarity and comfort with Autodesk Inventor, you may find it useful towork through some, or all, of the other tutorials. To access the tutorials fromthe ribbon, select Get Started > Learn about Inventor > Tutorials.



Summary | 1225

1226

Alias to Inventor

About this tutorial

Translate an Alias file to an Inventor part file and explore the association.



Keyboard.wire (original)Keyboard.ipt

Tutorial File Used

Keyboard.wire (revised)

46

1227


In this tutorial, you open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it as anInventor part (.ipt) file in Autodesk Inventor. You also reassociate an editedAlias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file.

Envision an engineering environment in which a standard keyboard designwas created as a surface model by an industrial designer using Alias. The Aliasgeometry is translated into Autodesk Inventor and becomes an Inventor partfile (.ipt). Additional design enhancements are made to the keyboard part fileusing Autodesk Inventor modeling commands.

Meanwhile, the industrial designer continues to modify the Alias design intoa more organic, ergonomic shape. Because there is direct associativity betweenAlias and Autodesk Inventor, the part file is easily updated to reflect the newergonomic design when the modifications to the Alias surface model arecomplete.

Objectives■ Derive and exclude surfaces.

■ Import individual surfaces.

■ Update surface associations.

■ Open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it directly in AutodeskInventor as an Inventor part (.ipt) file.

■ Re-associate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor partfile.

Prerequisites■ Have a basic understanding of the Derived Part functionality.

■ Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with thevarious viewing tools.

NOTE You do not need Alias to complete this tutorial.



Next (page 1229)

1228 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor



Translate the Alias Wire File1 Set your active project to tutorial_files.

2 Use the Open command to select Alias Files (*.wire) from the Filesof type drop-down list.

3 Navigate to C:\Program Files\Audodesk\Inventor 2011\TutorialFiles\Keyboard\Original, and select Keyboard.wire from the file list.

4 Click Options to display the Alias Import Options dialog box. Makesure that the Associative Import radio button is active.

5 Click OK.

6 Next, click Open to open the Alias wire file.

You may experience a slight delay as the wire file is translated directlyinto Autodesk Inventor and the Derived Alias dialog box displays.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1229

Observe that four node names appear in the dialog box: Body, Keys,Logo, and Tools. The layer icon appears just to the left of the four nodenames because they represent the layer names of the surfaces which werein Alias.


The top three commands in the Status area at the top of the dialog boxremain inactive until you select one of the nodes from the list. Use thesecommands to select the layer as a composite surface or all surfacesindividually. You can also exclude some (or all) surfaces.

Use the + command at the far left to derive all the surfaces as a compositesurface. It is the default condition. A composite surface appears in yellowand can be stitched into a solid. Most of the Autodesk Inventor modelingcommands, like Shell or Split, can then be performed on the stitchedsolid.

Use the middle command \ to exclude selected surfaces from the yellowcomposite surface. Excluded surfaces appear translucent.

Use the command at the far right to import objects as individual surfaces.Individual surfaces appear in blue.

7 Expand the Logo node to display the eight surfaces that comprise theletters of the Autodesk logo. Click the + command to the left of the logoname. Observe that the icon changes to \ indicating that all eight surfacesare excluded from the composite surface. The logo does not appear inthe keyboard model.


8 Click OK to close the dialog box. The translated Alias file now appearsin the graphics window as an Autodesk Inventor part file comprisedentirely of surface features.


Take a moment now to examine the Model browser. The Keyboard.wirenode represents the associative import of the Alias wire file. Expandingthe Keyboard.wire node reveals the three composite surface features(Keys, Tools, and Body) that were translated into Autodesk Inventor.The composite names match the native Alias layer names.


NOTE Observe that the Logo surfaces do not appear under theKeyboard.wire node because they were excluded previously in thisprocedure.

9 Close the file without saving it.


Update the Inventor Part1 Use the Open command to select Autodesk Inventor Files (*.iam,

*.idw, *.dwg, *.ipt, *.ipn) from the Files of type drop-down list.

2 Go up one folder level to C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 2011\TutorialFiles\Keyboard, and select Keyboard.ipt from the file list. Click Opento open the part file.

3 The completed keyboard part file appears in the graphics window. Rotatethe part to view the features.


The Model browser lists the operations that were performed on the partfile after it was translated into Autodesk Inventor. Observe that theout-of-date icon appears in front of the Keyboard.wire node in thebrowser.

Update the Inventor Part | 1235

This icon indicates that the original Alias wire file was edited since itwas initially translated into Autodesk Inventor. Now the AutodeskInventor part file is no longer in sync.

4 Click Update on the Quick Access toolbar to load the newerversion of the Alias file. After a short delay as the wire file loads, theUpdate Part Document dialog box displays several error messages. Severalfeatures that existed in the original Alias wire file are now missing fromthe revised Alias wire file.

5 Click Accept to close the Update Part Document dialog box.


The Keyboard.wire node appears in a red font in the Model browserindicating that the Alias wire file and the Autodesk Inventor part file areno longer associated correctly.

6 Right-click the Keyboard.wire node in the Model browser, and selectUpdate Associations from the pop-up context menu. There is a delaywhile the data is translated. When complete, the Update Associationsdialog box appears.

NOTE Two translucent views now appear in the graphics window. The viewon the left contains the information that is in the wire file. The view on theright shows the updated information in Autodesk Inventor.


The Tools layer name appears in the drop-down list at the top of theUpdate Associations dialog box.

The dialog box has two lists and a color legend that appears below thetwo lists. Do not be alarmed if the colors in the color legend differ slightlyfrom the colors that appear on your screen. It is because the color legendis based on the Autodesk Inventor color scheme in use.


The list at the left displays the surface names from Alias. Thecorresponding Autodesk Inventor surface names appear on the right.From left to right, the four status buttons at the bottom are labeledMatched, Orphaned, Updated, and Deleted. Observe from theKeyboard Part File list on the right that surfaces Cavity_3_Bottomand Cavity_3_Sides are orphaned. The two surfaces no longer exist inthe Autodesk Inventor part file after the original Alias wire file was edited.Orphaned surface names always appear at the top of the list on the right.These surfaces must be deleted.

NOTE There are several ways that you can delete these two surfaces. Youcan select them individually, or you can hold the Ctrl key and pick themboth. Once the surfaces are selected, click the X at the top right of the dialogbox to delete. Alternatively, you can right-click and select Delete from thecontext menu when the surface names are highlighted.

7 Delete Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides from the Part File liston the right. The deleted surface names now appear in a different colorin the list. You can observe the identical color change in the graphicswindow.

8 Next, select the Body layer from the layer name drop-down list at thetop of the dialog box.


Observe that four surfaces from the Alias Body layer are orphaned. Inthis instance, the surfaces still exist in the two models but they havechanged significantly and must be matched.

9 To match the orphaned surfaces, select Body_Fillet_A from the BodyImport File list on the left. Then, select Body_Fillet_A from the BodyPart File list on the right. Now click the Match command = locatedjust to the right of the layer drop-down list.

NOTE You can also match the two surfaces by right-clicking and selectingMatch from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted.

The two surface names in the file lists change color and also appear inthis same color in the graphics window.

10 Repeat the matching process with Body_Fillet_B and the other twosurfaces. Make sure to select = (the Match command) after each pair ofsurface names are selected from the lists.

11 After all four surfaces are matched, click OK to exit the UpdateAssociations dialog box.

There is a slight delay as the associations between the surfaces areupdated. When complete, the Autodesk Inventor part file appears in thegraphics window reflecting the changes that were made in the editedAlias wire file.


The Update Associations dialog box also appears stating that StitchSurface4 cannot be built. This error message appears because the twosurfaces that were used to create Stitch Surface4 (Cavity_3_Bottom andCavity_3_Sides) were deleted.

12 Click Accept to close the Update Associations dialog box.

13 Expand the Sculpt1 node in the Model browser and observe the iconnext to Stitch Surface4.


14 Although not necessary, you can right-click over this node and selectDelete from the pop-up context menu if you want to remove it fromthe Model browser. To remove the icon next to the Sculpt1 node,right-click over Sculpt1 and select Edit Feature from the pop-upcontext menu. When the Sculpt dialog box appears, click OK to closethe dialog box and rebuild the Sculpt feature.

15 As an optional step, move the End of Part marker above Move Body3in the Model browser to view the revised keyboard in an unexplodedrepresentation.

16 Do not save Keyboard.ipt.


SummaryIn this tutorial, you learned how to open and translate an Alias wire file directlyinto Autodesk Inventor. Procedures to update the part file after changes aremade to the Alias file were also provided to illustrate the associativity betweenAlias wire files and Autodesk Inventor part files. Some key points of thisexercise include:■ Deriving and excluding surfaces

■ Deleting orphaned surfaces

■ Matching one surface to another


■ Deleting a stitched surface

■ Rebuilding a sculpted feature


Summary | 1243

1244

Index

A

animationstutorials 630, 636

B

bearingstutorials 878

bolted connectionstutorials 784

C

compression springstutorials 906

constraintstutorials 36

Content Centertutorials 332, 502

D

disc camstutorials 892

F

Frame Generatortutorials 1076

I

Inventor Studiotutorials 630, 636

L

Level of Detail representationstutorials 537

N

navigatingSteeringWheels 20ViewCube 20

P

parameterstutorials 370

Positional representationstutorials 636

projectstutorials 2

S

shaftstutorials 820

sheet metaltutorials 951

Skeletal Modeling (top-downdesign) 650

sketch constraintstutorials 36

sketchesconstraints 36

spur gearstutorials 846

SteeringWheels 20substitutions

Level of Detail representations 537

T

Top-Down Design 650tutorials

animation 630bearings 878

1245 | Index

bolted connections 784compression springs 906Content Center 332, 502disc cams 892Frame Generator 1076Inventor Studio 630Level of Detail representations 537parameters 370positional representations 636projects 2shafts 820sheet metal parts 951

skeletal modeling 650sketch constraints 36spur gears 846SteeringWheels and ViewCube 20V-belts 864

V

V-beltstutorials 864

ViewCube 20

1246 | Index

Date post:	20-Oct-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	limaonoverao
View:	514 times
Download:	26 times